HomeMy WebLinkAboutB12-0309 VOLUME 1 CONTRACTS & SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL
Contract Documents and Specifications
For
Fire Station 2 Renovation
42 West Meadow Drive, Vail, CO
TOWN OF VAIL
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS/TRANSPORTATION
1309 Elkhorn Drive
Vail, Colorado 81657
16 July 2012
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A-2
Table of Contents
Invitation to Bid and Bid Forms
Invitation for Bid
Instruction to Bidders
Bid Form
Bid Schedule
Measurement & Payment
Bidders Qualification Statement
Certificate Regarding Employment Of Illegal Aliens
Bid Bond
Notice of Award
Contract Forms
Construction Contract
Certificate of Insurance Verification
Payment and Performance Bond
Notice to Proceed
Change Order
Substantial Completion Form
Certificate of Final Payment
Final Acceptance Form
General Conditions
Technical Specifications
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
Note: All references to Division 1 or General Conditions refer
to the General Conditions within the Contract Forms
01210 ALLOWANCES
01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING
01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
02080 PIPED UTILITIES – BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
02230 SITE CLEARING
02240 DEWATERING
02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
02300 EARTHWORK
02370 EROSION CONTROL
02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION
02530 SANITARY SEWERAGE
02552 GROUND-LOOP, HEAT-PUMP PIPING
02620 SUBDRAINAGE
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A-3
02630 STORM DRAINAGE
02732 ROADWAY BASE
02741 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
02751 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02764 PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
02780 UNIT PAVERS
02920 LAWNS AND GRASSES
02930 EXTERIOR PLANTS
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
03532 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-
DIVISION 05 – METALS
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
05511 METAL STAIRS
05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY
06200 FINISH CARPENTRY
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07131 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
07210 BUILDING INSULATION
07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES
07411 METAL SHINGLE ROOFING
07460 FIBER CEMENT SIDING
07610 METAL ROOF PANELS
07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING
07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES
07920 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
08111 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08311 ACCESS DOORS
08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
08411 ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT
08550 WOOD WINDOWS
08710 DOOR HARDWARE
08800 GLAZING
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09260 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ASSEMBLIES
09912 PAINTING
09931 EXTERIOR WOOD STAIN
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A-4
DIVISION 10 – BUILDING SPECIALTIES
10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS
10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
VOLUME 2
DIVISION 15 – FIRE PROTECTION/MECHANICAL
15300 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
DIVISION 16 – FIRE ALARM/ELECTRICAL
16721 FIRE ALARM
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING
220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING
220519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220533 HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220548 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220700 PLUMBING INSULATION
221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221413 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL
230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC
230516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC
230519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
230548 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR HVAC PIPING
230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230700 HVAC INSULATION
230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
231123 NATURAL GAS PIPING
232113 HYDRONIC PIPING
232123 HYDRNIC PUMPS
232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING
232500 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
233113 METAL DUCTS
233300 DUCT ACCESSORIES
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A-5
233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
235216 CONDENSING BOILERS
235523 GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS
235700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
236313 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
266423 SCROLL WATER CHILLERS
238219 FAN COIL UNITS
238316 RADIANT HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING
238316 SNOWMELT
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260523 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
262200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262413 SWITCHBOARDS
262416 PANELBOARDS
262713 ELECTRICITY METERING
262726 WIRING DEVICES
262813 FUSES
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
263213 ENGINE GENERATORS
263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES
264313 TRANSIENT-VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CIRCUITS
265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING
265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Construction Drawings (As Attached By Reference)
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A-6
INVITATION TO BID
AND
BID FORMS
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A-7
Invitation to Bid
Project: Fire Station #2 Renovation
Bid Date: August 7, 2012, 1 PM (MST)
Bid Location: Submit one hard copy of the Bid, along with one PDF copy to:
Tom Kassmel
Vail Public Works Department-Administration Building
1309 Elkhorn Dr.
Vail, CO 81657
GPS coordinates and internet maps to the above address frequently are misleading. It is
the responsibility of every bidder to insure timely delivery to the correct location.
Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting:
Date & Time: July 23, 2012 9:00 am (MST)
Location: Vail Public Works Department-Administration Building
1309 Elkhorn Dr.
Vail, CO 81657
Bidders are required to attend the pre-Bid meeting. Bids will not be accepted from bidders
that do not attend. A tour of the Site will follow the pre-Bid meeting for those interested.
Brief Description of Work
Interior and exterior renovation of existing Fire Station at 42 West Meadow Drive, Vail,
CO.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A-8
Instructions to Bidders
1.0 Bidders may obtain Drawings and Specifications for the Project on July,16, 2012,
after 1 PM via the Town of Vail Sharefile website in electronic PDF format.
Access to the sharefile site shall be gained only by emailing a request for access
to the Town of Vail’s Project Manager at TKassmel@vailgov.com with subject
line “Fire Station #2 Renovation Bid Documents”. Please provide name, company
name, address, phone number, email address and trade in the body of the email.
Bidders must print their own copies. The Architect can provide printing services
to Bidders at the Bidders expense.
1.1 Printed copies are not available. It is the Bidder's responsibility to assure that it
has a complete set of the Bid Documents. General contractors are responsible
for assuring that their subcontractors and suppliers receive the Bid Documents
and Addenda thereto.
1.2 Bidders shall carefully examine the Contract Documents and the construction site
to obtain first hand knowledge of existing conditions, surrounding areas, and
local conditions.
1.3 All questions regarding the Bid and the Contract Documents shall be addressed
in writing via email, to:
William Pierce
bill@vailarchitects.com
1.4 The final date for questions will be July 30, 2012 at , 1PM. Replies will be issued
only by Addenda. Only answers to questions answered by formal Addenda will
be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal
effect. Addenda will be posted on the Town of Vail Sharefile site in electronic
PDF format for all parties having received the Bid Documents. No Addenda will
be issued later than August 3, 2012, except for an addendum, if necessary,
postponing the Bid date or withdrawing the Invitation for Bids.
1.5 Bids may be disqualified at any time upon evidence of collusion with intent to
defraud or other illegal practices upon the part of the Bidder.
1.6 A "Bid" is a responsive, conforming, unconditional, complete, legible, and properly
executed offer by a Bidder on the form supplied by the Town to provide the Work
specified in the Request for Bids for the compensation specified. Partial Bids will
not be accepted unless otherwise specifically stated within the Bid Documents.
1.7 Bids shall be contained within a sealed envelope clearly marked with the project
name, Bidder's name and contact person, mailing address, and telephone number
of the Bidder. A printed original hard copy of the Bid along with a compiled, single,
exact duplicate PDF file shall be provided to the Town. The Bidder may e-mail the
PDF copy directly to the Town’s Project Manager in lieu of providing it in the Bid
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A-9
envelope if the PDF file is emailed within 24 hours of and not before the designated
Bid Date and time. Failure to provide a PDF copy of the bid within the Bid envelope
or within an e-mail within the stated timeframe may be grounds for disqualification.
1.8 The following information shall be submitted with the Bid as provided in the Bid
Documents, and printed by the Bidder in exact form provided in the Bid
Documents.:
1.8.1 Completed Bid Form.
1.8.2 Complete Bid Schedule.
1.8.3 Completed Bidders Qualifications Statement.
1.8.4 Bid Bond.
1.8.5 The names and resumes of key staff personnel who will be assigned to the
Work;
1.8.6 A complete graphical representation of the proposed scope of Work and
schedule, including all relevant activities and critical milestones. Any
alternatives included in the Bid Schedule shall be included as separate Work
items to identify the change in project duration as a result of the requested
alternatives.
1.8.7 The names and addresses of any subcontractors who will be hired for the
Work.
1.9 It shall be the responsibility of the Bidder to ensure that the Bid is in proper form
and in the Town's possession by or before the designated time and date. Bids will
not be accepted after the designated time and date, as defined by the clock at the
place of Bid opening. Any Bid received late will be returned to the Bidder
unopened, if possible.
1.10 The Town of Vail Building Department will issue a construction permit for the
Project. All Town Building Permit fees will be paid by the Town. The contractor's
licensing fee with the Town shall be paid by Contractor.
1.11 This Project is Tax Exempt. No Bid shall include federal excise taxes or state or
local sales or use taxes. The Town’s Tax Exempt Indemnification number is 98-
02395.
1.12 A Notice to Proceed is anticipated on or about August 22, 2012. Restrictions to
construction activity outlined in the “Vail Village and Lionshead Construction
Hours Information Handout” updated yearly are applicable to the Project.
Construction activity in the Right-of-Way may not commence until August 23,
2012 and must be completed no later than March 1, 2012.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A-10
1.13 If a mistake is made or discovered during or after the Bid review, the Town reserves
the right to determine which party made the mistake and whether the mistake is
material and, after these determinations, the Town, in its sole reasonable
discretion, shall decide whether to accept or reject the Bid. No advantage shall be
taken by any party of manifest clerical errors or omissions in any Bid or the Contract
Documents. Bidders shall notify the Town immediately of any errors or omissions
that are encountered.
1.14 Any interlineation, alteration, or erasure shall be initialed by the Bidder. In the case
of conflict between the indicated sum of any addition of figures and the correct sum,
the correct sum shall control.
1.15 The Town shall not reimburse any Bidder for any cost incurred in preparing a Bid or
attending equipment demonstrations, inspections, pre-Bid conferences, or
interviews.
1.16 Any amplification, clarification, explanation, interpretation, or correction of the Bid
Documents prior to the Bid shall be made only by written addendum(s), and a copy
of the addendum(s) shall be made available to the prospective bidders. The Town
is not responsible for any amplification, clarification, explanation, or interpretation or
correction of a Bid not contained in written addenda. The Town is not responsible
for failure of any Bidder to receive any addenda, it is the responsibility of the
prospective bidders to confirm that they have all addenda.
1.17 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a
vice-president (or a corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign),
and the corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant
secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown. Bids
by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner,
and the legal address of the partnership shall be shown. Bids by limited liability
companies shall be executed in the company's name and signed by a member, and
the legal address of the company shall be shown. Names and titles shall be typed
or printed below each signature.
1.18 The submission of a Bid shall be conclusive evidence and a legal admission that
the Bidder: (1) has no questions, complaints, or objections in connection with the
Contract Documents, subject to any requests made by the Bidder for amplification,
clarification, explanation, interpretation, or correction; (2) has no questions,
complaints, or objections as to the completeness, sufficiency, scope, or detail of the
Bid; (3) has full knowledge of the scope, nature, quality, and quantity of the
equipment to be provided, the performance criteria, the requirements of the
Contract Documents, the site and conditions of delivery, the Vail Town Code, and
other applicable law; (4) has complied with all requirements of the Bid and Contract
Documents; (5) and that the Bid and Contract Documents provide, without
limitations, sufficient scope and detail to allow for the complete construction of the
desired Project with complete and finished operable systems.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A-11
1.19 The Contract will be awarded to the lowest responsible and responsive Bidder
complying with the terms and conditions, guidelines, and specifications presented
in the Request for Bids and these Instructions to Bidders. The Town reserves the
right to determine, in its sole reasonable discretion, whether any Bid meets the
needs or purposes intended and is within the approved budget. The Town does
not base its award on prices alone. Also to be considered are: quality of product;
past experience with the Bidder or any subcontractors, consultants, products or
suppliers; qualifications of the Bidder and/or subcontractors or suppliers; services
offered; warranties; maintenance considerations; long-range costs; schedule and
delivery; and similar conditions.
1.20 The Town reserves the right to conduct such investigations as it deems necessary
to assist in the evaluation of any Bid to establish the experience, responsibility,
reliability, references, reputation, qualifications, or financial ability of any Bidder,
manufacturer or supplier. The purpose of such investigation is to satisfy the Town
that the Bidder has the experience, resources, and commercial reputation
necessary to supply the specified equipment and to perform the necessary
warranty and product support in accordance with the Contract Documents in the
prescribed manner and time.
1.21 The Town reserves the right, if it deems such action to be in its best interests, to
reject any and all Bids or to waive any irregularities or informalities therein. Any
incomplete, false, or misleading information provided by any Bidder shall be
grounds for rejection of the Bid. If Bids are rejected, the Town further reserves the
right to investigate and accept the next best Bid in order of ranking, or to reject all
Bids and re-solicit for additional Bids.
1.22 In the event of any claim, suit, or demand which may result from any Bid, or the
award of any contract as a result of submission of a Bid, Colorado law shall govern.
1.23 Once access is gained to the sharefile site, all communications shall be made
through the contact provided, unless specifically in regards to access to the
sharefile site. No other communication by a Bidder/subcontractor/supplier may be
made with the Town or its representatives . Failure to comply with this direction
may result in disqualification, at the Town's discretion.
1.24 All parts not specifically mentioned which are necessary in order to provide a
complete unit shall be included in the Bid. Any item listed as "Standard" in the
manufacturer's published specification, furnished by the Bidder, is assumed to be
included in the Bid. Any variations shall be outlined in writing, noting cost factors
where applicable.
1.25 All labor, material, tools, supplies, equipment, supervision, coordination, and all
incidentals required to provide the complete improvements and complete operable
systems as indicated in the Contract Documents shall be included in the Bid.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A-12
1.26 The submission of a Bid implies the required warranty for all installed components
of the design, and compatibility of said components with adjacent surfaces and
materials. Each Bid shall include a statement of standard warranty of the
manufacturer,
1.27 Bids shall be in accordance with the specifications contained in the attached
Contract Documents. Should any requirement in the specifications not be included
in manufacturer's specification sheets, the Bidder shall include with its Bid a
statement of compliance. Failure to do so shall be grounds for disqualification of
the Bid.
1.28 The Town requires a Bid Bond in the form of a corporate surety bond in the amount
of five percent (5%) of the total Bid amount before the Town can accept and
consider any Bid. Upon award, such Bid Bonds shall be returned to the
unsuccessful Bidder(s). For the successful Bidder, the Bid Bond will be returned
upon receipt of the required Payment Bond and Performance Bond, in the full
amount of the Contract Price.
1.29 A Bid is prepared at the Bidder’s expense and becomes Town property and is
therefore a public record upon opening by the Town. No Bid may be withdrawn for
a period of sixty (60) days after the deadline for Bids.
1.30 If the Bidder takes exception to any requirements or component of the Bid and
Contract Documents, a written letter of exceptions with explanations shall be
provided with the Bid. Any exception to the Bid and Contract Documents is
grounds for disqualification, at the sole discretion of the Town.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A-13
BID FORM
The undersigned offers and agrees to furnish all items, upon which the prices are quoted,
at the price set opposite each item, if this Bid is accepted within sixty (60) days of the due
date. The undersigned also agrees to make delivery, or render service, within ten (10)
days of receipt of the Notice to Proceed. The undersigned certifies that no federal, state,
or local tax is included in the quoted prices and that none will be added.
Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda:
Name of Bidder:
______________________________________________
Address:
______________________________________________
______________________________________________
Telephone Number:
______________________________________________
BID SUMMARY
Total Base Price:
$ __________________________________
____________________________________________________________
_____
(in words)
BIDDER:
By: ________________________________
STATE OF COLORADO )
) ss.
COUNTY OF )
The foregoing instrument was subscribed, sworn to and acknowledged before me
this ___ day of ___________________, 20__, by __________________________, as
_________________ of ____________________________________________.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A-14
My commission expires:
(S E A L)
____________________________________
Notary Public
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
B-1
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
BID SCHEDULE
To: Tom Kassmel
Town of Vail
1309 Elkhorn Drive
Vail, CO 81657
Work: Fire Station # 2 Renovation
BID: Pursuant to the request for bids for the above-named work and being familiar with all
contractual requirements, therefore, the undersigned Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all
labor, materials, tools, supplies, equipment, plant, transportation, services, and all other
things necessary for the completion of the contractual work. All other work to complete the
work but not specifically itemized shall also be included as incidental to the work cost.
Bidder also agrees to perform the work in accordance with the time of completion set forth
herein, for and in consideration of the following unit and lump sum prices:
BIDDER:
By: ________________________________
STATE OF COLORADO )
) ss.
COUNTY OF )
The foregoing instrument was subscribed, sworn to and acknowledged before me
this ___ day of ___________________, 20__, by __________________________, as
_________________ of ____________________________________________.
My commission expires:
(S E A L)
_________________________________
___
Notary Public
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C-1
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
BIDDER’S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT
A Statement showing the qualifications of Bidder shall be a prerequisite to the Bidder
being awarded the Contract. The qualification statement is intended to assure the Town
that a high degree of overall workmanship can be expected, and that the Work will be
completed within the time limits contained in the Contract Documents.
All items on the statement must be answered in full and submitted with the Bid. The
qualification statement will be reviewed by the Town after all Bids have been received
and opened and prior to award.
The Bidder shall answer and furnish the following items for review:
1. Name of
Bidder._________________________________________________________
2. Permanent address and phone number of Bidder.
3. Date company was organized.
4. If a corporation, where incorporated.
5. Number of years engaged in contracting business under present firm or trade
name.
6. Certified copy of financial statement prepared during current fiscal year as
prepared for bank or bonding company.
7. List of current jobs new under contract, indicating client and telephone number,
size, type of job and percentage of completion of each and date of completion.
(Use additional sheets if necessary).
8. List of projects of this size and complexity completed within the last three (3)
years along with contract amount, client’s name and address.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C-2
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
9. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, when, where,
and why?
10. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, when, where, and why?
BIDDER:
By: ________________________________
STATE OF COLORADO )
) ss.
COUNTY OF )
The foregoing instrument was subscribed, sworn to and acknowledged before me
this ___ day of ___________________, 20__, by __________________________, as
_________________ of ____________________________________________.
My commission expires:
(S E A L)
_________________________________
___
Notary Public
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E-1
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS
THAT ________________________________________, (hereinafter called Principal)
as PRINCIPAL, and, ___________________________________(hereinafter called the
SURETY) as SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto the Town of Vail, Colorado,
hereinafter called OWNER, as Obligee, in the penal sum of
________________________ Dollars ($______________), for the payment of which
sum in lawful money of the United States, well and truly to be made, said PRINCIPAL
and SURETY bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and
assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the PRINCIPAL has submitted a Bid to OWNER for certain Work or
services generally described as follows:
____________
NOW, THEREFORE, (a) if said Bid shall be rejected, or (b) if said Bid shall be accepted
and the PRINCIPAL is awarded the Contract and, within the time and manner specified
in the Contract Documents, enters into a written Contract in the prescribed form and
shall give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the Contract Documents to
guarantee faithful performance of such Contract and to guarantee prompt payment of
labor and materials furnished in the prosecution thereof, and shall provide to OWNER a
Certificate of Insurance as required by the Contract Documents, and shall in all other
respects perform the Contract created by the acceptance of said Bid, or (c) in the event
of the failure of the PRINCIPAL to enter such Contract and to give such bond or bonds,
and Certificate of Insurance, if the PRINCIPAL shall pay to OWNER the difference not
to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said Bid and such larger
amount for which the OWNER may in good faith contract with another party to perform
the Work covered by said Bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it
shall be and remain in full force and effect.
The SURETY, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of
said SURETY hereunder shall be in no way impaired or affected by any alteration or
irregularities in the bid or in the bidding procedure or by any extension of time within
which OWNER may accept such Bid, and does hereby waive notice of same.
Dated this _________________________ day of , 20__.
(SURETY) (PRINCIPAL)
By: ___________________________ By: _________________________
Title: __________________________ Title: ________________________
(ACKNOWLEDGMENTS AND POWER OF ATTORNEY TO BE ATTACHED)
CORPORATE SEAL MUST BE AFFIXED IF PRINCIPAL IS A CORPORATION.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E-2
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E-3
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
NOTICE OF AWARD
Date: ____________________
_________________________
Contractor Name
_________________________
Address
_________________________
_________________________
RE: __________________________________
Dear ___________________:
Thank you for submitting a Bid for the ______________________________.
Your firm submitted the most qualified Bid and you have been selected as the successful
Contractor. Accordingly, this is your Notice of Award for the
________________________.
Enclosed please find an original and duplicate original Construction Contract. Please
review and sign both, then, within ten (10) days of receipt of this letter, return both to me
along with your certification of insurance, payment and performance bond, each in the full
amount of the Contract Price, and appropriate powers of attorney. When dating the above
documents, please make sure that all dates, on all documents, are the same and that the
insurance policy reflects the requirements of the Contract Documents. Please return all of
the documents at the same time, in the same envelope.
Upon receipt of the signed Contracts, the Town will execute both and return one fully
executed original to you.
Should you have any questions, please call me at __________________________.
Sincerely,
__________________________________
___________________, Project Manager
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E-4
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
CONTRACT FORMS
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E-5
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
THIS CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT is made and entered into this ____ day of
_____________, 20__, by and between the TOWN OF VAIL, 75 South Frontage Road,
Vail, Colorado 81657, a Colorado municipal corporation (the "Town"), and
___________________, a _____________________ ("Contractor") (collectively the
"Parties").
For the consideration described herein, the receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby
acknowledged, the Parties hereby agree as follows:
1. Scope of Work. Contractor shall perform the following described work (the
"Work"), in accordance with this Contract and the Contract Documents, attached hereto
and incorporated herein by this reference:
2. Bonds. Within ten (10) days of the date of this Contract, Contractor shall
provide the payment and performance bond and certificate of insurance required by the
Contract Documents.
3. Commencement and Completion of Work. Contractor shall commence the
Work within ten (10) days of date of the Notice to Proceed. Substantial Completion of the
Work shall be accomplished by the ___ day of ____________, 20__, unless the period for
completion is extended otherwise in accordance with the Contract Documents. Final
Completion of the Work shall be accomplished within ________(__) days of the date of
Substantial Completion.
4. Compensation/Contract Price. The Town agrees to pay Contractor, subject
to all of the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, for the Work, an amount not
to exceed ________________________ ($___________). The Town shall pay
Contractor in the manner and at such times as set forth in the Contract Documents.
5. Illegal Aliens.
A. Certification. By entering into this Contract, Contractor hereby
certifies that, at the time of this certification, it does not knowingly employ or contract
with an illegal alien who will perform work under this Contract and that Contractor
will participate in either the E-Verify Program administered by the United States
Department of Homeland Security and Social Security Administration or the
Department Program administered by the Colorado Department of Labor and
Employment in order to confirm the employment eligibility of all employees who are
newly hired for employment to perform work under this Construction Contract.
B. Prohibited Acts. Contractor shall not:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E-6
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
1. Knowingly employ or contract with an illegal alien to perform
work under this Contract; or
2. Enter into a contract with a subcontractor that fails to certify to
Contractor that the subcontractor shall not knowingly employ or contract with
an illegal alien to perform work under this Contract.
C. Verification.
1. If Contractor has employees, Contractor has confirmed or
attempted to confirm the employment eligibility of all employees who are
newly hired for employment to perform work under this Construction
Contract through participation in either the E-Verify Program or the
Department Program.
2. Contractor shall not use the E-Verify or Department Program
procedures to undertake pre-employment screening of job applicants while
this Construction Contract is being performed.
3. If Contractor obtains actual knowledge that a subcontractor
performing work under this Construction Contract knowingly employs or
contracts with an illegal alien who is performing work under this Construction
Contract, Contractor shall:
a. Notify the subcontractor and the Town within three (3)
days that Contractor has actual knowledge that the subcontractor is
employing or contracting with an illegal alien who is performing work
under this Construction Contract; and
b. Terminate the subcontract with the subcontractor if
within three (3) days of receiving the notice required pursuant to
subsection 1 hereof, the subcontractor does not stop employing or
contracting with the illegal alien who is performing work under the
contract; except that Contractor shall not terminate the contract with
the subcontractor if during such three (3) days the subcontractor
provides information to establish that the subcontractor has not
knowingly employed or contracted with an illegal alien who is
performing work under this Construction Contract.
D. Duty to Comply with Investigations. Contractor shall comply with any
reasonable request by the Colorado Department of Labor and Employment made
in the course of an investigation conducted pursuant to C.R.S. § 8-17.5-102(5)(a)
to ensure that Contractor is complying with the terms of this Construction Contract.
E. Affidavits. If Contractor does not have employees, Contractor shall
sign the attached "No Employee Affidavit." If Contractor wishes to verify the lawful
presence of newly hired employees who perform work under this Construction
Contract via the Department Program, Contractor shall sign the "Department
Program Affidavit" attached hereto.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E-7
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
6. Governing Law and Venue. This Construction Contract shall be governed
by the laws of the State of Colorado, and any legal action concerning the provisions hereof
shall be brought in Eagle County, Colorado.
7. No Waiver. Delays in enforcement or the waiver of any one or more defaults
or breaches of this Construction Contract by the Town shall not constitute a waiver of any
of the other terms or obligation of this Construction Contract.
8. Integration. This Construction Contract and the Contract Documents
constitute the entire agreement between Contractor and the Town, superseding all prior
oral or written communications.
9. Third Parties. There are no intended third-party beneficiaries to this
Construction Contract.
10. Notice. Any notice under this Construction Contract shall be in writing, and
shall be deemed sufficient when directly presented or sent pre-paid, first class United
States Mail, addressed to:
The Town: Tom Kassmel
Town of Vail
1309 Elkhorn Drive
Vail, Colorado 81657
Contractor: ____________________
____________________
____________________
____________________
11. Severability. If any provision of this Construction Contract is found by a
court of competent jurisdiction to be unlawful or unenforceable for any reason, the
remaining provisions hereof shall remain in full force and effect.
12. Modification. This Construction Contract may only be modified upon
written agreement of the Parties.
13. Assignment. Neither this Construction Contract nor any of the rights or
obligations of the Parties hereto, shall be assigned by either party without the written
consent of the other.
14. Governmental Immunity. The Town, its officers, and its employees, are
relying on, and do not waive or intend to waive by any provision of this Construction
Contract, the monetary limitations (presently one hundred fifty thousand dollars ($150,000)
per person and six hundred thousand dollars ($600,000) per occurrence) or any other
rights, immunities, and protections provided by the Colorado Governmental Immunity Act,
C.R.S. § 24-10-101, et seq., as amended, or otherwise available to the Town and its
officers or employees.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E-8
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
15. Rights and Remedies. The rights and remedies of the Town under this
Construction Contract are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law.
The expiration of this Construction Contract shall in no way limit the Town's legal or
equitable remedies, or the period in which such remedies may be asserted, for work
negligently or defectively performed.
16. Subject to Annual Appropriation. Consistent with Article X, § 20 of the
Colorado Constitution, any financial obligation of the Town not performed during the
current fiscal year are subject to annual appropriation, and thus any obligations of the
Town hereunder shall extend only to monies currently appropriated and shall not
constitute a mandatory charge, requirement or liability beyond the current fiscal year.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Construction Contract has been executed by the
Parties as of the date first above written.
TOWN OF VAIL, COLORADO
_________________________________
___
Stan Zemler, Town Manager
ATTEST:
_______________________________
Lorelei Donaldson, Town Clerk
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
_______________________________
Matt Mire, Town Attorney
CONTRACTOR
By:
________________________________
STATE OF COLORADO )
) ss.
COUNTY OF )
The foregoing instrument was subscribed, sworn to and acknowledged before me
this ___ day of ___________________, 20__, by ________________, as ___________
of ___________________.
My commission expires:
(S E A L)
_________________________________
___
Notary Public
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E-9
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E-10
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
NO EMPLOYEE AFFIDAVIT
[To be completed only if Contractor does not have any employees]
1. Check and complete one:
I, _______________________________, am a sole proprietor doing business as
__________________________. I do not currently employ any individuals. Should I
employ any individuals during the term of my Contract with the Town of Vail (the "Town"), I
certify that I will comply with the lawful presence verification requirements outlined in that
Contract.
OR
I, ______________________________, am the sole owner/member/shareholder of
___________________________, a ______________________________ [specify type
of entity – i.e., corporation, limited liability company], that does not currently employ any
individuals. Should I employ any individuals during the term of my Contract with the Town,
I certify that I will comply with the lawful presence verification requirements outlined in that
Contract.
2. Check one.
I am a United States citizen or legal permanent resident.
The Town must verify this statement by reviewing one of the following items:
A valid Colorado driver's license or a Colorado identification card;
A United States military card or a military dependent's identification card;
A United States Coast Guard Merchant Mariner card;
A Native American tribal document;
In the case of a resident of another state, the driver’s license or state-
issued identification card from the state of residence, if that state
requires the applicant to prove lawful presence prior to the issuance
of the identification card;
Any other documents or combination of documents listed in the
Town’s “Acceptable Documents for Lawful Presence Verification”
chart that prove both the contractor’s citizenship/lawful presence and
identity.
OR
I am otherwise lawfully present in the United States pursuant to federal law.
Contractor must verify this statement through the federal Systematic Alien
Verification of Entitlement program, the "SAVE” program, and provide such
verification to the Town.
________________________________ _______________________
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E-11
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
Signature Date
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E-12
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
DEPARTMENT PROGRAM AFFIDAVIT
[To be completed if Contractor participates in the
Department of Labor’ Lawful Presence Verification Program]
I, ________________________, as a public contractor under contract with the
Town of Vail (the "Town"), hereby affirm that:
1. I have examined or will examine the legal work status of all employees who
are newly hired for employment to perform work under this public contract for services
("Contract") with the Town within twenty (20) days after such hiring date;
2. I have retained or will retain file copies of all documents required by 8 U.S.C.
§ 1324a, which verify the employment eligibility and identity of newly hired employees who
perform work under this Contract; and
3. I have not and will not alter or falsify the identification documents for my
newly hired employees who perform work under this Contract.
____________________________________
________________________
Signature Date
STATE OF COLORADO )
) ss.
COUNTY OF )
The foregoing instrument was subscribed, sworn to and acknowledged before me
this ___ day of __________, 20___, by _______________________ as
_________________ of ________________________.
My commission expires:
(S E A L)
___________________________________
Notary Public
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
F-1
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
STATE OF )
) ss.
COUNTY OF )
I, __________________________, being first duly sworn, state and affirm, under
penalty of law, that I am familiar with the insurance coverages maintained by the
Insured, ________________________________, and the coverage requirements set
forth in the foregoing Certificate of Insurance, that I have completed or caused to be
completed and subsequently reviewed the foregoing Certificate of Insurance and that
the information provided contained therein is true and correct to the best of my
knowledge. I further understand that the Town of Vail shall rely on the information
provided.
This information is provided for the Town of Vail, Project Name: _________________.
By: ______________________________________
Title: ___________________________________
Agency: ________________________________
STATE OF COLORADO )
) ss.
COUNTY OF )
The foregoing instrument was subscribed, sworn to and acknowledged before me
this ___ day of ___________________, 20__, by __________________________, as
_________________ of ____________________________________________.
My commission expires:
(S E A L)
_________________________________
___
Notary Public
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
J-1
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BOND
Bond No._____________
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that
(Firm)
(Address)
(an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as "the Principal",
and
(Firm)
(Address)
hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the Town of Vail,
Colorado, a Municipal Corporation, hereinafter referred to as "the Owner", in the penal
sum of __________________________ Dollars in lawful money of the United States, for
the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and
assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered
into a certain Contract with the Owner, dated the ____ day of
______________________,20____, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part
hereof for the performance of the Work, ______________________________________.
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the
undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Contract during the
original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the Owner, with
or without Notice to the Surety and during the life of the guaranty or warranty period, and
shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Contract, and shall fully
indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all cost and damages which it may suffer by
the Principal's failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the Owner all outlay and
expense which the Owner may incur in making good any default, and make payment to all
persons, firms, subcontractors and corporations furnishing materials for or performing
labor in the prosecution of the work provided for in such Contract, and any authorized
extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants,
repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed, rented or used in connection with
the construction of such work, and all insurance premiums on said work, and for all labor
performed in such work, whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall
be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and
agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract
or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
J-2
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
shall in any way affect its obligation on this Bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any
such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the
Work or to the Specifications.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Principal
shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder whose claim may be unsatisfied.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in five (5) counterparts, each one of
which shall be deemed an original, this ______ day of
____________________________, 20_____.
ATTEST: PRINCIPAL
By: _______________________________
By:______________________________
__
Title:______________________________
Title:_______________________________
Address:__________________________
__
__________________________
_
(Corporate Seal)
SURETY
ATTEST:
Surety:___________________________
__
By: _________________________________ By:
_______________________________
Attorney-in-Fact: ______________________ Title:
______________________________
Address:__________________________
__
__________________________
__
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
J-3
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
(Surety Seal)
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract and Surety must be
authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable
to the Town.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
J-4
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
NOTICE TO PROCEED
Date: ___________________
________________________
Contractor Name
________________________
Address
________________________
________________________
RE: ______________________________
Dear ______________:
This letter is your Notice to Proceed, effective as of the date cited below. This notice is in
reference to the Construction Contract between you and the Town of Vail concerning the
_________________________.
Please note that in accordance with the Construction Contract, Work must commence
within ten (10) days of the date of this Notice, and all Work must be substantially
completed within __________________ (_______) days of the date of this Notice, which
shall be the ___ day of _________, 20__, and finally completed within
__________________ (_______) days of the date of this Notice, which shall be the ___
day of _________, 20__.
If you have any questions, please call me at __________________.
Sincerely,
____________________________________
___________________, Project Manager
________________________
Date
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
K-1
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
CHANGE ORDER
Date: __________________________
Order No.: _____________________
Base Contract Date:_______________
Name of Project: Fire Station #2 Renovation
Owner: Town of Vail, Vail, Colorado
Contractor:
The following changes are hereby made to the Contract Documents:
Justification:
Original Contract Price: $
Current Contract Price adjusted by previous Change Order(s): $
The Contract Price due to this Change Order will be increased/decreased by: $
The new Contract Price, including this Change Order, is: $
The Contract Time will be increased/decreased by ______ calendar days.
The date for completion of all Work will be _________________
(Date)
If additional compensation is determined due Contractor under this Change Order, it shall be in full
payment of all extra work and/or materials as set forth in the Change Order to the date of the Change
Order, including compensation for all claims, direct or indirect, for the extended overhead and profit, and
damages of any type whatsoever, including delay and impact damages. Any additional costs to
Contractor resulting from delays caused by the Town shall be presumed to be included in this Change
Order adjusted for time and price.
APPROVALS REQUIRED:
To be effective, this Change Order must be approved by the Town if it changes the scope or objective of
the Contract, or as may otherwise be required by the General and Supplementary Conditions.
Requested by: Date:
Recommended by: Date:
Ordered by: Date:
Accepted by: Date:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
K-2
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
CERTIFICATE OF FINAL PAYMENT
With reference to Contract Number ____________ dated _____________________,
20__, between the undersigned Contractor and the Town of Vail, for:
_______________________ at Vail, Colorado
Contractor hereby certifies that all costs, charges and expenses incurred by it on its
behalf for work, labor, services, materials and equipment supplied to the foregoing
premises, and/or used in connection with its Work under the Contract have been duly
paid.
Contractor further certifies that to its best knowledge and belief (based upon reasonable
investigation) each of its subcontractors and material suppliers have duly paid all costs,
charges and expenses incurred by them or on their behalf for work, labor, services,
materials and equipment supplied to the foregoing premises and/or used by them in
connection with Contractor’s Work under the Contract.
In consideration of ________________ dollars ($__________) representing final
payment under the Contract, Contractor hereby releases and discharges the Town and
the Town's property from all claims, liens and obligations of every nature arising out of
or in connection with the performance of the Work.
As additional consideration for the final payment, and to the fullest extent permitted by
law, the undersigned indemnifies and holds the Town and its employees, officials,
agents and representatives harmless from and against all costs, losses, damages,
claims, causes of action, judgments and expenses arising out of or in connection with
claims which may be asserted by Contractor or any suppliers, subcontractors of any
tier or any of their representatives, officers, agents and employees for the costs, losses,
damages, claims, causes of action, judgments and expenses and expenses that are
attributable to the act, omission, error, professional error, mistake, negligence or other
fault of Contractor.
The foregoing shall not relieve Contractor of its obligations under the provisions of the
Contract as amended, which by their nature survive completion of the Work including
without limitation warranties, guarantees and indemnities.
Executed this ________ day of _____________________, 20__.
__________________________________
Contractor
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
L-1
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Date:
TO:
Project Title:
______________________________
This is to advise you that substantial completion for the referenced Work has
been obtained and that all substantially complete work and material has been found to
be satisfactory, unless otherwise noted below. Therefore, the work is considered to be
substantially complete in accordance with the approved plans, specifications and
contract documents.
In accordance with the Contract, all Warranty periods for substantially complete
Work shall begin as of the date of this letter. Warranty periods for those portions of
Work remaining incomplete, as noted below, shall begin upon Final Acceptance.
Incomplete Work Remaining;
TOWN OF VAIL
By: _________________________________
Title:_________________________________
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
L-1
7/16/2012
K:\1204 - MEADOW DRIVE FIRE STATION\PROJECT MANUAL\SPECIFICATIONS\000 TOV DIVISION 1.DOC
CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE
Date:
TO:
Project Title:
______________________________
This is to advise you that a final inspection of the referenced Work has been
made and all work and material was found to be satisfactory. Therefore, the Work is
considered to be complete in accordance with the approved plans, specifications and
contract documents.
In accordance with the Contract, all Warranty periods shall begin as of the date of
this letter.
TOWN OF VAIL
By: _________________________________
Title:_________________________________
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GENERAL CONDITIONS
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1. DEFINITIONS
1.01 BID
All documents and information supplied by Contractor to bid on the Project, including
the Bid Bond.
1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
The documents related to the Work, which are the property of the Town and are not to be
used for any purpose not related to the Work without the prior written consent of the Town,
including the following;
A. Invitation to Bid;
B. Instructions to Bidders;
C. Bid Form (Including Bid Summary);
D. Bid Schedule;
E Measurement and Payment;
F. Bidder’s Qualification Statement;
G. Construction Contract;
H. General Conditions
I. Supplemental Conditions;
J. Technical Specifications;
K. Construction Drawings;
L. Certificate of Insurance Verification;
M. Notice of Award;
N. Notice to Proceed;
O. Bid Bond;
P. Payment and Performance Bond;
Q. Certificate of Final Payment;
R. Final Acceptance Form;
S. Documentation submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award; and
T. Addenda as identified in the Bid Form and Construction Drawings.
1.03 CHANGE ORDER:
A written order issued by the Town in the form of a Change Order, Construction Change
Directive, or Amendment to the Contract after execution of the Contract authorizing an
addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the
Contract Time. Other written or verbal correspondence, including without limitation
Requests For Information ("RFIs"), Submittals and e-mails do not constitute a Change
Order or change or amendment to the Contract, or relieve Contractor from compliance
with the Contract Documents.
1.04 TOWN:
The Town of Vail, Colorado.
1.05 CONTRACT:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
The entire written agreement covering the performance of the Work described in the
Contract Documents, including all Change Orders.
1.06 CONTRACT PRICE:
The amount set forth in Paragraph 4 of the Construction Contract, as amended by Change
Order.
1.07 CONTRACT TIME:
The time for completion of the Work as set forth in Paragraph 3 of the Construction
Contract.
1.08 DAY:
Calendar day, unless otherwise specified. When the last day for the occurrence of an
event falls on a Sunday or legal holiday as recognized by the Town, the time for
performance shall be automatically extended to the next business day.
1.09 DRAWINGS:
The graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,
location and dimensions of the Work and generally include plans, elevations, sections,
details, diagrams, schedules, and quantities.
1.10 FINAL COMPLETION:
The date as certified by the Project Manager when all of the Work is completed and final
payment may be made.
1.11 MAJOR ITEM:
Any item having a Bid value, determined by multiplying the Bid quantity by the unit Bid
price, that exceeds ten percent (10%) of the original Contract Price.
1.12 PRODUCT DATA:
Illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams
and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for
some portion of the Work.
1.13 PROJECT MANAGER:
The Town's duly authorized representative in connection with the Work, or his or her
designee.
1.14 SITE
The physical location where the Work is being performed.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1.15 SPECIFICATIONS:
The written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards of workmanship,
and performance of the Work.
1.16 SUBCONTRACTOR:
Any person, firm or corporation with a direct contract with Contractor who acts for or in
behalf of Contractor in executing any part of the Contract, excluding one who merely
furnishes material.
1.17 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:
The date as certified by the Project Manager when the Town occupies or takes possession
of all or substantially all of the Work, or when the Town may occupy or take possession of
all or substantially all of the Work and put it to beneficial use for its intended purposes.
1.18 WORK:
All the work specified, indicated, shown or contemplated in the Contract Documents,
including all alterations, amendments or extensions thereto made by supplemental
agreements or Change Orders.
PART 2. TIME
2.01 TIME OF THE ESSENCE:
All times stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence.
2.02 TIMING OF WORK:
A. General. Subject to the restrictions set forth in this Section, rhe Project shall be completed
within the following timeframe:
Construction Period: August 23, 2012 through March 1, 2013
B. Exceptions. The Project schedule shall be further limited to periods and corresponding
types of activity delineated in the "2012 Vail Village and Lionshead Construction Information
Handout".
C. Special Event Restrictions. No Work shall occur within the public Right of Way during
the following time periods.
Summer August 23, 2012 through September 3, 2012
Farmers Market September 9 & 16, 2012
October Fest September 14, 15, & 16, 2012
Winter November 15 through April 15, 2012
3.06 SATURDAY, SUNDAY AND HOLIDAY WORK:
A. Work shall normally not be performed on Saturdays, Sundays, observed holidays, or outside
of the daytime working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., or as indicated on the construction
schedule. Lane closures are restricted to normal working hours on streets, except for such Work as
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
may be necessary for proper care, maintenance, and protection of Work already completed, or in
cases where the Work would be endangered or if hazards to life or property would result.
B. If Contractor believes it necessary to work on Saturdays, Sundays, holidays, or at night,
Contractor shall make prior arrangements with the Town and receive written approval at least forty-
eight (48) hours before such time so that inspection and engineering services can be provided. Such
approval may be revoked by the Town if Contractor fails to maintain adequate equipment and
lighting at night for the proper prosecution, control, and inspection of the Work. If Work is
performed without the Town's prior approval, and as a result the Town had not assigned inspectors
to the Work, the Town may declare Work performed during this period of time defective, solely on
the grounds that it was not properly inspected.
C. Any Work performed on a Saturday, Sunday, holiday, or night shall be at Contractor's risk in
terms of extra costs, extra Work, or unforeseen conditions.
2.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:
A. When Contractor considers the Work ready for its intended use, Contractor shall
certify to the Town, in writing, that the Work is substantially complete. The certification
shall include a punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final acceptance.
B. If the Project Manager considers the Work to be substantially complete, the
Project Manager will issue a certificate of Substantial Completion.
2.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE:
Upon written notice from Contractor that the Work is complete, the Town will make a final
inspection and notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals
that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such
measures as are necessary to remedy such deficiencies within a timeframe and schedule
approved by the Project Manager. After Contractor has completed all such corrections to
the satisfaction of the Project Manager and as required by the Contract Documents, the
Town shall issue a certificate of Final Acceptance.
2.05 CHANGES IN THE WORK:
A. The Town reserves the right to order changes in the Work, in the nature of
additions, deletions or modifications, without invalidating the Contract, and to make
corresponding adjustments in the Contract Price and the Contract Time. All changes shall
be authorized by a written Change Order signed by the Project Manager. The Change
Order shall include appropriate changes in the Contract Documents and the Contract
Time. The Work shall be changed and the Contract Price and Contract Time modified
only as set forth in the written Change Order. Any adjustment in the Contract Price
resulting in a credit or a charge to the Town shall be determined by mutual agreement of
the parties before the Work set forth in the Change Order is commenced. If a Change
Order results in an increase in the Contract Price, approval of the Town shall be required,
and if such approval is not obtained, the Town shall have no payment obligation
regardless of whether the Work pursuant to the Change Order has been performed.
B. Execution of a Change Order shall constitute a final settlement of all matters
relating to the change in the Work, including any and all claims and adjustments to the
Contract Price and Construction Schedule.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2.06 DELAYS:
A. If Contractor is delayed in the progress of the Work by fire, unusual delay in
transportation, unanticipated adverse weather conditions, or other unavoidable casualties
beyond Contractor's control other than unanticipated adverse weather conditions, the
Contract Time shall be extended for a reasonable period of time. Reasonable
“Unanticipated adverse weather conditions” extensions shall be granted only when such
conditions are more severe than the monthly average temperatures and/or precipitation
recorded in Vail, as provided for at http://www.wrcc.dri.edu/cgi-bin/cliMAIN.pl?covail. As
these average weather conditions are to be anticipated during construction, and that
reasonable extensions may be granted for any monthly adverse conditions, so will
reasonable accelerations be expected to be given to the Town for monthly weather
conditions that are more favorable than the provided averages.
B. Any request for extension of the Contract Time shall be made in writing to the
Project Manager not more than seven (7) days after commencement of the delay;
otherwise it shall be waived. Any such request shall contain an estimate of the probable
effect of such delay on the progress of the Work.
C. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price, or to
damages, or to additional compensation as a consequence of any such delays.
D. If Contractor falls behind the Town-approved schedule, Contractor at its own
expense shall take all necessary extraordinary measures to accelerate the current
progress of the Work to meet the Town-approved schedule.
2.07 NO DAMAGES FOR DELAY:
In strict accordance with C.R.S. § 24-91-103.5, the Town shall not amend the Contract
Price to provide for additional compensation for any delays in performance which are not
the result of acts or omissions of the Town or persons acting on behalf of the Town.
PART 3. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
3.01 COMPLETION/SUPERVISION OF WORK:
A. Contractor shall be responsible for completion of all Work in a timely and
workmanlike manner in accordance with the terms and specifications of the Contract
Documents, including the techniques, sequences, procedures and means. Contractor
shall be responsible for the coordination of all Work. Contractor shall supervise and direct
the Work and give it all attention necessary for proper supervision and direction.
Contractor shall maintain a supervisor on Site at all times when Contractor or any
subcontractor is performing Work. The Town and its representatives are not responsible
for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction,
the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or Contractor's failure to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to be complementary, and what is
required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; and that the Work shall be at
Final Completion a complete, operational and functional project and provide the
intended or specified performance. Contractor shall provide all incidental items and
parts necessary to achieve this intent.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C. The Project Manager, architects, engineers, consultants, and artists will visit the
Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction to observe the
progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine if the Work is proceeding in
accordance with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager is not required to make
exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The
Project Manager is authorized to reject Work which is defective, and to require special
inspection or testing of the Work, whether the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
D. Contractor shall employ at all times a competent resident superintendent, who
shall not be replaced without prior written notice to the Project Manager. Such
superintendent shall be capable of reading and thoroughly understanding the Plans and
Specifications and shall be able to communicate with the Project Manager. The
superintendent shall have full authority to execute the Work specified in the Contract
Documents without delay and promptly to supply materials, tools, plant equipment and
labor as may be required to perform such Work. The superintendent will be
Contractor's representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on behalf of
Contractor. All communications given to the superintendent shall be as if given to
Contractor. If the superintendent is not present, the Project may be shut down.
E. Contractor acknowledges that it has not acted or relied upon any express or
implied representation or warranty of the Project Manager or representative of the
Town.
F. Unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager, Contractor shall provide all
normal maintenance on all items of the Work through Substantial Completion.
3.02 COORDINATION, INSPECTIONS AND TESTING:
A. Town-provided Documents. Contractor shall be furnished, free of charge, an
electronic set of the Contract Documents in .pdf format. The Town shall also provide
one electronic (in .pdf format) of each report and test of subsurface and latent physical
conditions at the Site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work
which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and
Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness.
Contractor shall inspect all Contract Documents, tests and reports, including soil tests,
materials tests and engineering tests, if applicable, and shall conduct a Site or field review
prior to executing the Contract. Contractor assumes the risk of all conditions which are
disclosed, or which are reasonably suggested by any such tests or reports, or which would
be disclosed by a field or Site review. Contractor shall have the affirmative duty to advise
the Town of any concerns which Contractor may have regarding construction conditions
prior to executing the Contract. Contractor shall be responsible for all additional
geotechnical investigations necessary to perform the Work.
B. Easements. Contractor shall identify any and all necessary easements for
construction and maintenance of the Work.
C. Coordination of Inspections. Contractor shall coordinate its construction schedule
with all testing agencies and the Town so that key inspection points may be observed. If
Contractor fails to provide reasonably adequate notice or proceeds without the required
inspection, the subject Work shall be re-exposed or redone in its entirety, while the
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
inspector is present. No extra compensation shall be awarded to Contractor for extra
Work due to Contractor's failure to coordinate inspections with the testing agency or the
Town. All costs associated with Contractor's failure to coordinate inspections shall be
borne by Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating, requesting,
receiving, documenting, and passing all required Inspections from/for all regulatory
agencies that are related to the Work.
E. Construction Inspections. Contractor shall perform construction inspections.
Contractor shall attend any pre-construction meeting(s) and be available to provide
technical assistance during the course of construction as necessary. Contractor shall
provide Site visits and reviews upon request from the Town during the construction phase
to ensure compliance with the intent of the plans and to resolve any potential conflicts.
Contractor shall provide a written summary after each Site visit.
F. Final Inspection. Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling the final inspection
with the Town.
G. Quality Control Testing. Contractor shall be responsible for contracting for,
providing payment for, and performing all necessary Quality Control materials testing
necessary to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and by applicable laws,
statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations. Frequency of testing shall be as
necessary to comply with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall provide timely notice
to the Project Manager so that the Project Manager may be present. Contractor shall
provide the Project Manager with copies of all materials testing reports. In addition to the
materials testing performed by Contractor, the Town may conduct Quality Assurance
testing in its own discretion.
H. Coordination of Subcontractors. Contractor shall coordinate all Subcontractors to
complete the Work. Weekly Subcontractor meetings shall be held by Contractor, and the
Project Manager shall be notified of these weekly meetings and provided the recorded
minutes from these meetings.
1. Coordination Drawings. To allow Contractor to coordinate the installation of
Contractor and Subcontractor work, some Drawings are shown
schematically. Typical schematic Drawings may include without limitation
mechanical, electrical, plumbing and special systems installations, showing
schematic installations of pipes, conduits, ductwork, wiring, and equipment.
Contractor shall coordinate the installation of this Work and submit
Coordination Drawings in accordance with the Contract Documents showing
exact locations of all installations, prior to installation. Coordination
Drawings shall be provided as a submittal to the Project Manager. Any
conflicts within the Coordination Drawings or with the Contract Documents
shall be brought to the attention of the Project Manager immediately for
resolution prior to installation.
2. Pre-Installation Meetings. Contractor shall coordinate Pre-Installation
Meetings in accordance with the Contract Documents and the Project
Manager shall be notified of the pre-installation meetings.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3. Failure to Coordinate Subcontractors. No extra compensation shall be
awarded to Contractor for extra Work due to Contractor's failure to
coordinate Subcontractors, Coordination Drawings, and pre-installation
meetings. All costs associated with Contractor's failure to coordinate shall
be borne by Contractor.
3.03 FURNISHING OF LABOR AND MATERIALS:
A. Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials and equipment, including:
tools; construction equipment and machinery; utilities, including water; transportation; and
all other facilities and services necessary for the proper completion of the Work.
B. In all purchases of supplies, materials and provisions to be incorporated or
otherwise used by Contractor in the Work, Contractor shall use supplies, materials and
provisions produced, manufactured or grown in Colorado if such supplies, materials and
provisions are not of inferior quality to those offered by competitors outside of Colorado.
C. While engaged in the performance of the Work, Contractor shall maintain
employment practices that do not violate the provisions of the Colorado Antidiscrimination
Act of 1957, C.R.S. § 24-34-301, et seq., as amended.
3.04 PHOTO AND VIDEO DOCUMENTATION:
A. Video. Contractor shall provide the Town with a video of the entire Site, including
all adjacent areas, prior to beginning the Work, at Contractor's own expense. The copy
provided to the Town shall become the property of the Town. Existing conditions shall be
documented. The video shall be time and date stamped.
B. Photography. Contractor shall provide the following color photography in printed
and electronic .jpg format unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager: Printed
color photos , 4” x 6”; and electronic photos at a resolution for clear visibility of the pictures
intent within the size range of 0.5 MB and 1.5 MB, unless otherwise required or approved
by the Project Manager. Photos shall include pre-existing photo documentation prior to
the start of Work, progress photo documentation at all stages of the Work documenting
progress of Work for each day, encountered conflicts and issues, discovery, and final
photo documentation showing the completed Work. Photos shall be organized and
ordered by date, and time and date stamped.
3.05 EMPLOYEES AND SAFETY:
A. Contractor shall maintain at all times strict discipline of its employees, and
Contractor shall not employ on the Work any person unfit or without sufficient knowledge,
skill, and experience to perform properly the job for which the employee was hired.
B. Contractor shall be responsible to the Town for the acts, negligence and omissions
of all direct and indirect employees and Subcontractors. The Contract Documents shall
not be construed as creating any contractual relation between any subcontractor and the
Town.
C. Contractor shall provide for and oversee all safety orders and precautions
necessary for the safe performance of the Work. Contractor shall take reasonable
precautions for the safety of all employees and others whom the Work might affect, all
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
work and materials incorporated into the Work, and all property and improvements on the
Site and adjacent property.
D. Catcalling or harassment of any persons in or adjacent to the Site by Contractor's
workforce will not be tolerated. Any incidents shall result in immediate dismissal of the
individual(s) involved.
3.06 SATURDAY, SUNDAY AND HOLIDAY WORK:
A. Work shall normally not be performed on Saturdays, Sundays, observed holidays,
or outside of the daytime working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., or as indicated on the
construction schedule. Lane closures are restricted to normal working hours on streets,
except for such Work as may be necessary for proper care, maintenance, and protection
of Work already completed, or in cases where the Work would be endangered or if
hazards to life or property would result.
B. If Contractor believes it necessary to work on Saturdays, Sundays, holidays, or at
night, Contractor shall make prior arrangements with the Town and receive written
approval at least forty-eight (48) hours before such time so that inspection and engineering
services can be provided. Such approval may be revoked by the Town if Contractor fails
to maintain adequate equipment and lighting at night for the proper prosecution, control,
and inspection of the Work. If Work is performed without the Town's prior approval, and
as a result the Town had not assigned inspectors to the Work, the Town may declare
Work performed during this period of time defective, solely on the grounds that it was not
properly inspected.
C. Any Work performed on a Saturday, Sunday, holiday, or night shall be at
Contractor's risk in terms of extra costs, extra Work, or unforeseen conditions.
3.07 TEMPORARY FENCING AND BARRICADES:
A. General. Contractor shall provide temporary fencing and barricades as
necessary to complete the Work and shall be included in the contract price, unless
otherwise specified.
B. Materials. Fences and barriers may be new or used, but shall be suitable for
intended purpose, structurally adequate and neat in appearance, and shall be
maintained in such manner for the duration of the Project.
C. Barrier Fencing. Barrier fencing may be used when approved by the Project
Manager for short duration Work areas. The Town has approximately fifty (50) eight-
foot (8') barrier fences available for use by Contractor. If Contractor elects to use this
fencing, Contractor shall be responsible for replacement of any damaged fencing. The
Town has the right to withhold portions of final payment if the barrier fencing borrowed
from the Town is not returned in its original condition.
1. Barrier fencing shall be free standing steel pedestrian barricades with a
minimum height of 4’-0” and able to withstand a wind load of eighty (80) m.p.h.
Barrier fencing is the preferred method of delineation between pedestrians and
construction in the pedestrian Village and mall areas. The intent is to provide a
barrier without restricting the openness of the Village and mall areas to maintain
the appearance that the Village and mall areas are open to our guests.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2. Traffic cones and barrier tape shall only be allowed as a temporary
barriers and restricted to durations of four (4) hours or less. Contractor shall use
Banner Guard, imprinted with "CAUTION: CONSTRUCTION AREA", or an
approved equal.
3. Where required or as directed by the Project Manager, Contractor shall
provide adequate plywood construction barrier fencing to enclose partially
completed areas of construction that pose a safety hazard to the public. Where
necessary there shall be a lockable entrance.
4. Barrier fencing may be removed only upon approval of the Project
Manager.
D. Portable Chain Link Fencing. Portable chain link fencing shall be used to
enclose and protect the Site as needed for the duration of the Project. Portable chain
link fencing shall be open mesh, 6 feet in height, with top and bottom rails, with green
screen coverings unless safety or sight distances for pedestrians and/or vehicles is
impaired, and lockable gates. Posts shall be spaced a maximum of 8 feet on center,
and be equipped with cross bar bases for stability. Bases shall be weighed down with
sandbags if required.
E. Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights.
1. Contractor shall erect and maintain barricades, lights, danger signals, and
warning signs in accordance with ANSI D6.1 and the approved Traffic Control
Plan, and where applicable the “Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices for
Streets and Highways”, U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway
Administration, including State of Colorado supplements.
2. Contractor shall adequately barricade and post all open cuts in the project
area. Illuminate barricades and obstructions at night; keep safety lights burning
from sunset to sunrise.
3. Contractor shall use street plates over open cuts and position excavation
equipment to minimize any open trenches.
4. Contractor shall install barrier tape where necessary, and keep a minimum
of two rolls on Site at all times.
5. Contractor shall cover pipes, hoses, and power lines crossing sidewalks
and walkways with troughs using beveled edge boards.
6. Contractor shall remove barriers no longer needed upon approval by the
Project Manager.
3.08 TEMPORARY PEDESTRIAN WALKWAYS AND ACCESS:
Contractor shall provide temporary walkways and ramps, in compliance with the Traffic
Control Plan, that are constructed of wood, asphalt, or other reasonable material, and
signed to provide safe access to businesses and residences during the Project.
Walkways shall be a minimum of six feet (6') in width, and comply with ADA
requirements.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3.09 SIGNAGE:
Temporary informational and directional signs shall be provided as necessary to redirect
pedestrians and vehicles and be mounted for easy reading.
3.10 PRIVATE PROPERTY:
Contractor shall not enter upon private property for any purpose without first obtaining
permission, and Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and
private property, trees, fences, monuments and underground structures on and adjacent
to the Site and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage or injury
thereto. Property damaged by Contractor shall be, at Contractor's expense, repaired or
replaced and left in as good condition as found.
3.11 DAMAGE DUE TO CRIMINAL ACTIVITY:
Contractor shall take all necessary steps to protect the Site from vandalism, theft, and
other criminal activity. Contractor shall be solely responsible to repair any damage caused
by vandalism, including the removal of graffiti, at Contractor's own cost. The Contract
Price shall not be increased to reimburse Contractor for such costs.
3.12 CLEANUP AND DUST CONTROL:
A. Contractor shall keep the Site and adjoining ways free of waste material and
rubbish caused by its employees or subcontractors. Contractor shall also keep the Site
clear and free of all weather impediments (i.e. snow, hail, ice and water) as necessary to
complete the Work. Contractor shall remove all such waste material,rubbish, and
impediments daily during construction, together with all tools, equipment, machinery and
surplus materials. Each day, Contractor shall establish and enforce a daily system for
collecting and disposing of waste materials from the Site. Hauling of debris to a legal
dump or landfill is required at least weekly. Contractor shall take measures to prevent
spread of waste materials off the Site by wind.
B. Contractor shall provide suitable trash containers at a central collection point on
the Site. Burning or burying of waste materials is prohibited. Disposal of volatile fluids
and wastes in storm sewers, sanitary sewers, septic systems, or into streams or
waterways is prohibited. Hazardous materials shall be immediately removed from the
Site, and all volatile wastes shall be kept in covered containers. Contractor shall recycle
as much as possible. All excavated material shall be used as soon as possible. Waste
concrete shall be removed from the Site and legally disposed of by masonry and
concrete installers.
C. Contractor shall use measures to prevent and control dust within the area affected
by the Work.
D. At completion of the Work, Contractor shall remove from and about the Site all
Work-related materials, equipment, machinery, tools, fencing, waste, and rubbish, and
Contractor shall also conduct general cleanup operations on adjacent properties which
were disturbed by the Work.
E. If Contractor fails to perform the cleanup or dust control required by this Section,
after written notice, the Town may cause the cleanup to be performed at Contractor's
expense. Upon receipt of a statement for such cleanup, Contractor shall pay to the Town
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
the costs incurred by the Town for such cleanup, or the Town shall have the right to
withhold said amount from any payment due to Contractor.
F. If a dispute arises among Contractor, others performing Work at the Site and the
Town as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the Site
and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Town may clean up
and may back charge proportionate costs to each of the involved parties.
3.13 SANITARY FACILITIES:
A. Sanitary facilities for the use of all persons employed on the Project, properly
screened from public observation, shall be provided in sufficient numbers and in such a
manner and at such points as approved by the Town. The contents shall be removed and
disposed of in a satisfactory manner.
B. The sanitary conveniences specified above shall be the obligation and
responsibility of Contractor. The facilities shall be made available to all other contractors,
subcontractors, and inspection personnel in the Site.
C. Contractor shall supply sufficient drinking water from approved sources to all of its
employees.
D. Full compensation for compliance with this Section is included in the Contract Price,
and no additional compensation shall be provided.
3.14 PROTECTION OF WORK:
A. General. Contractor shall obtain the advice and recommendations of
subcontractors for procedures to protect their Work. When the subcontractor is no
longer working in an area, Contractor shall provide protective measures and materials
to ensure that each element will be protected from damage or deterioration until Final
Acceptance.
B. Cold Weather Protection. Contractor shall provide temporary heat or blanket
heating required by construction activities, for curing or drying of completed Work or
protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high
humidity. Contractor shall provide freeze protection for all temporary water service
piping.
C. Existing Trees and Vegetation. Contractor shall protect existing trees and other
vegetation to remain in place, against damage to roots, trunks or branches, and fence
or guard areas not to be disturbed. Contractor shall not stockpile materials within drip
line.
D. Environmental Protection. Contractor shall conduct the Work to comply with
environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil
might be contaminated or polluted
3.15 CONSTRUCTION STAGING:
All construction staging areas shall be located within the Site. The boundaries of
construction staging areas shall be approved by the Town. Construction staging areas
shall be used for material storage, parking for equipment, and employees' vehicles. A
construction trailer shall not be required, but may be used if the location of the trailer is
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
approved by the Town. Upon Final Completion, all staging areas shall be clean and
restored to their original condition. No additional compensation shall be provided to
Contractor for cleaning of construction staging areas.
3.16 PAYMENT OF ROYALTIES AND LICENSE FEES:
Contractor agrees to pay all royalties and license fees necessary for the Work, and to
defend against all actions for infringement of copyright or patent rights, and to save and
hold the Town harmless from such actions.
3.17 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS AND REGULATIONS:
A. Contractor shall comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations and orders in any manner relating to the Work, including without limitation the
Urban Drainage and Flood Control District Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual, CDOT
Specifications, AASHTO Specifications, International Building Code, Uniform Plumbing
Code, Uniform Mechanical Code, National Electrical Code, Americans with Disabilities Act,
and the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways. If any
provision of the Contract Documents is at variance therewith, Contractor shall notify the
Project Manager promptly.
B. In case of any discrepancy between any of the requirements set forth in the Urban
Drainage and Flood Control District Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual, CDOT
Specifications, AASHTO Specifications, International Building Code, Uniform Plumbing
Code, Uniform Mechanical Code, National Electrical Code, Americans with Disabilities Act,
and these Contract Documents, the more stringent requirement shall apply. If any
questions arise as to which requirement is more stringent than another, the Project
Manager shall be authorized to determine which is more stringent, and the Project
Manager's decision shall be final.
C. Contractor shall take all reasonable measures to reduce noise pollution from
construction operations and to be in compliance with the Town's noise ordinance.
3.18 SUBCONTRACTORS:
A. Contractor shall furnish to the Project Manager at the time the Construction
Contract is executed, a list of names of subcontractors to whom Contractor proposes to
award the portions of the Work to be subcontracted by Contractor.
B. Contractor shall not employ a subcontractor to whose employment the Town
reasonably objects, nor shall Contractor be required to hire a subcontractor to whose
employment Contractor reasonably objects.
C. All Work performed by subcontractors shall be performed under a written contract
between Contractor and subcontractor that conforms to the provisions of the Contract
Documents, and shall incorporate the relevant provisions of the Contract Documents.
3.19 CORRECTIVE WORK:
When any Work does not conform to the Contract Documents, Contractor shall make the
necessary corrections so that the Work will so conform. Such corrections shall be
accomplished within the time period approved by the Project Manager. Failure to
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
complete such required corrections within the time period required shall constitute a
breach of the Contract.
3.20 TAXES, LICENSES AND PERMITS:
A. Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses necessary for the prosecution of
the Work. The obtaining of all permits and licenses shall be coordinated with the
schedule so as to not delay the Work. The Town shall pay all costs of permits and
licenses obtained from the Town, but all such permits and licenses shall be obtained
and all typical procedures shall be followed.
B. This Project is exempt from state and local sales tax (98-02395).
C. Contractor and all subcontractors shall be registered in the Town, and shall
obtain and pay for contractor’s registration at the Town of Vail Department of
Community Development, 75 S. Frontage Road, Vail, CO 81657.
3.21 SURVEYING / LAYOUT:
A. The Contractor is solely responsible for the coordination of all layout required for
the proper installation of all material and labor incorporated in to the Project and to ensure
that the Work is installed in accordance with the Contract Documents including such
material and labor that may be supplied ansd installed by the Owner under separate
contract. The Town will furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, and legal
limitations for the Project, and a legal description of the Site. The Town will provide
base datum, including control points for reference. Contractor shall check all Town-
established control points, and verify and document their accuracy prior to using them
for surveying control. Contractor shall protect and preserve the established reference
points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the
Town. Contractor shall report to the Project Manager when any reference point is lost
or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or
locations, and shall be responsible for replacement or relocation of such reference
points by professionally qualified personnel.
B. Contractor shall perform all necessary construction surveying and staking. The
required surveying shall consist of the office preparation, construction surveying,
calculating, drafting, and staking necessary for of all elements of the Project. Layout of
Site elements will be accomplished either by means of coordinates or traditional
baseline method or a combination of both. Contractor shall furnish all personnel,
materials, traffic control, and incidentals necessary to perform the required construction
surveying.
C. All surveying equipment, including Electronic Distance Meters ("EDMs"), tapes,
tribrachs, theodolites, total stations, GPS receivers and levels shall be calibrated prior to
the start of Work. EDMs, total stations, and GPS receivers shall be checked on a
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration ("NOAA") calibrated baseline.
Equipment calibration accuracy and adjustments made to meet requirements specified
in the CDOT Survey Manual shall be documented.
D. The surveying shall be done under the supervision of a Professional Land
Surveyor ("P.L.S.") who is experienced and competent in construction surveying and
registered in the State of Colorado. Referencing, setting and restoring land monuments
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
and the determination of property lines shall comply with Section 629 of the CDOT
specifications. The P.L.S. shall be available to review Work, resolve problems and
make decisions in a timely manner.
E. Contractor shall:
1. Establish horizontal and vertical control for the Project;
2. Provide all construction surveying for line and grade;
3. Working from lines and levels established by the property survey,
establish and maintain benchmarks and other dependable markers to set the
lines and levels for the Work and elsewhere on the Site as needed to properly
locate every element of the Work;
4. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level and
plumb;
5. Calculate and measure required dimensions as shown within recognized
tolerances;
6. Advise entities engaged in construction activities of the marked lines and
levels provided for use;
7. Establish all necessary benchmarks on Site for layout and grading based
on the control points shown on the plans; and
8. Locate and lay out Site improvements, including pavements, paver
patterns, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility line gradients and
elevations, invert, planters, irrigation lines, and other features by instrumentation
and similar appropriate means.
F. For layout procedures, Contractor shall:
1. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings in relation to the property
survey and existing benchmarks, before proceeding with the layout;
2. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points;
3. Preserve permanent reference points during construction;
4. Refrain from changing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval;
5. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points, or requirements to
relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations;
6. Promptly replace lost or destroyed Project control points;
7. Base replacements on the original survey control points; and
8. Establish and maintain a minimum of two temporary benchmarks on the
Site, referencing data established by survey control points.
G. A Pre-survey Conference shall be held prior to performing any surveying. The
Project Manager, Contractor's Superintendent and the P.L.S. shall attend. A surveying
schedule shall be submitted to the Project Manager prior to the conference. Acceptable
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
staking placement intervals for the various construction survey control operations shall
be reviewed by the Project Manager at the Pre-Survey Conference.
H. Accuracy of surveys and survey tolerances shall be as specified in the CDOT
Survey Manual.
I. All changes in lines and grades required by field conditions and all discrepancies
in grades, alignment, location or dimensions detected by Contractor shall be
immediately submitted to the Project Manager in writing and documented.
J. At Substantial Completion, Contractor shall supply the Project Manager with a
digital file of as-built survey information of all installed and discovered Site and utility
improvements including all primary and secondary services for water, sanitary sewer,
storm sewer, gas, electrical, snowmelt and fountain mechanical systems, utility trenches
and vaults, irrigation systems, telecommunications and fiber optics (cable and
telephone) and all conduit connections. This does not relieve Contractor from providing
other as-built information. The as-built survey shall be provided in AutoCAD 2004 or
newer version, unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager.
3.22 UTILITIES
A. The Work shall be coordinated with all impacted utility companies, districts,
associations, agencies, and residents located near the Site. Contractor shall conduct the
coordination meeting and provide summary minutes.
B. Contractor shall determine the actual location of all existing utilities prior to starting
any Work. Contractor shall contact utility companies for field locations prior to the start of
Construction Work, and shall contact all utilities at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to
beginning excavation or grading. If the exact location and depth of existing underground
utilities are unknown, Contractor shall perform all necessary exploratory excavation to
locate these facilities which may affect the Work prior to beginning construction.
Contractor shall obtain required locates and Contractor shall include the information on the
plans. Contractor shall resolve any utility discrepancies. Contractor shall be liable for all
damage done to existing utilities in the performance of the Work.
C. If Contractor requests that utility companies relocate utilities for Contractor's
convenience, such relocation shall be at Contractor's expense.
D. The time of performance under the Contract shall not be extended to account for
repair of utilities which are damaged by Contractor.
E. Contractor shall engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary
service or connect to existing service, and arrange with the company for a time when
service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary service.
F. Contractor shall maintain utility services (including water, gas, sewer, cable,
electric, and telephone) to all abutting property. Any interruptions and the duration of
the interruption shall be approved by the Project Manager at least five (5) days prior to
interruption. All combined utility interruptions shall be limited to a maximum of six (6)
hours per day with any single utility service interrupted for a maximum of four (4) hours
per day. Contractor shall endeavor to best coordinate the utility disruptions with the
impacted businesses and residents. Contractor shall coordinate all disruptions in all
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
utilities with all Town departments, emergency service entities including the Fire
Department, Police Department, Vail Dispatch, alarm companies, and Village
businesses and residents.
G. Contractor shall provide and maintain, at its own expense, an adequate supply of
water and electricity required for the Work. Contractor shall install and maintain supply
connections and lines satisfactory to the Project Manager, and prior to Final Completion,
Contractor shall remove the supply lines at its expense.
3.23 WATER CONTROL:
A. Contractor shall take such precautions as necessary to construct the Work in a dry
condition, and Contractor shall provide for drainage, dewatering, and control of all surface
and subsurface water and shall erect any necessary temporary structures or other facilities
at its own expense.
B. Contractor, at its own expense, shall furnish all necessary equipment and materials
required to control the surface and subsurface water in all the areas from the
commencement of Work through Final Completion.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing, transporting, and installing all
materials and equipment, well points, pumping, channelization, diversion, damming, or
other means of controlling surface water and ground waters.
D. At least ten (10) days prior to the first anticipated date of discharge, Contractor
shall obtain a Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity Permit from
the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment ("CDPHE).
E. At least thirty (30) days prior to the first anticipated date of dewatering discharge,
Contractor shall obtain a Construction Dewatering Permit from the CDPHE.
3.24 EROSION CONTROL:
A. Contractor shall provide an erosion/sediment control plan for use during
construction. The plan shall include Site specific details showing the type, location, and
quantity of BMP's to be used. The erosion/sediment control plan shall be designed to
prevent sediment from leaving the construction area, and shall comply with all applicable
law, including without limitation the Urban Drainage and Flood Control "Erosion Control
Manual." Special attention shall be given to prevent sediment from entering into any
wetland area. The Project Manager may direct Contractor to modify the erosion and
sediment control plan during construction as conditions warrant.
B. Contractor shall furnish, install, clean, and maintain all erosion control measures
during the Work and vegetation establishment, and remove and dispose of all erosion
control measures upon completion of the Work.
C. Contractor shall clean any soil, dirt, or debris tracked onto any adjacent streets.
Within two (2) hours of notification by the Town that any adjacent streets require cleaning,
Contractor shall clean such streets or the Town may have the streets cleaned and deduct
the cost of such cleaning from the Contract Price.
D. Contractor shall assign an employee to serve as the Erosion Control Supervisor
(ECS). The ECS shall be experienced in all aspects of construction and have
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
satisfactorily completed an ECS training program authorized by the State of Colorado.
Proof that this requirement has been met shall be submitted to the Project Manager at
least ten (10) days prior to the beginning of any Work. A list of authorized ECS training
programs will be provided by the Project Manager upon request.
E. Riprap for check dam shall be 4-6" angular rock. All other materials, including
bales, silt bags, and sediment fencing shall be designated on the erosion and sediment
control plan.
F. Contractor shall remove sediment from upstream of check dams, silt fence and
sediment traps on an as needed basis as determined by the Project Manager. Sediment
removed shall be disposed of by Contractor.
G. The erosion and sediment control features shall be installed prior to clearing and
grubbing and shall remain in place throughout construction. Contractor shall clean
sediment deposited at the check dams during the Work, and that material shall be
removed and disposed of by Contractor.
H. Contractor shall provide mud traps, rugs, or other features to prevent the tracking
of dirt and mud into businesses and residences.
I. All erosion control materials shall be removed upon completion of the Project.
3.25 TRAFFIC CONTROL:
A. At the Pre-construction Conference, Contractor shall submit five (5) copies of a
Traffic Control Plan for review by the Town. The Traffic Control Plan shall discuss all
requirements of this Section.
B. Contractor shall furnish all necessary flagpersons; erect and maintain warning
lights, advance warning signs, detour signs, barricades, temporary fence, and sufficient
safeguards around all excavations, embankments, obstructions; and perform any other
Work necessary for the protection of all Work being performed, and for the safety of the
public and pedestrian traffic, as well as motor vehicles. All signs and barricades shall
conform to the current Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
C. Contractor shall at all times take proper precautions for the protection of and
replacement or restoration of landscaping, driveway culverts, street intersection culverts or
aprons, irrigation crossings and systems, mailboxes, driveway approaches, signs, existing
utilities, and all other public and private installations that may be encountered during the
Work.
D. No driveway or private alley shall be blocked without prior written permission from
the resident who would be affected by such blocking, with a copy to the Town.
E. No road shall be closed at any time.
F. Contractor shall advise the Police Department, school districts, trash services, and
homeowners of any lane closures, including dates and times.
G. It is anticipated that a large number of employees will use automobiles for
transportation to and from the Site. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to: maintain,
protect, and control traffic in the vicinity of and in the Site; restrict parking on streets near
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
the Site; and provide necessary parking areas for all employees in suitable locations as
approved by the Town.
H. Contractor shall be limited to existing roadways and streets for access to the
Project. All construction related equipment, material handling, and deliveries shall
access the project site by means identified by the Project Manager.
1. Contractor shall keep clean and free from debris all access roads and
streets at all times. This includes hauled materials and supplies, rubbish and
engine fluids.
2. Contractor is strongly encouraged to use diapers on all vehicles to prevent
engine and other fluid spills on the streets and roadways.
3. All spills of engine and other fluids on the streets and roadways shall be
cleaned by Contractor promptly.
I. Parking for construction equipment shall be set forth in the Traffic Control Plan.
J. Employees of Contractor and subcontractors shall park their personal vehicles in
designated area. Vanpooling from designated park and ride sites is encouraged. No
parking fees will be waived for this Project.
K. Parking of any vehicle or equipment is not permitted within the Site that has not
been approved in the Traffic Control Plan.
L. All Town bus stops shall be maintained and free of construction activity to allow
for public use and through bus traffic. If a bus stop or bus stop area must be under
construction, a temporary bus stop, including Town benches, trash receptacles and bus
stop sign post, shall be located within one hundred feet (100') of the existing bus stop
and be maintained for the duration of the Work. The bus stop location shall be
approved by the Project Manager. Bus Shelters need not be relocated or constructed
unless specifically noted in the Contract Documents.
3.26 INSTALLATION:
A. Contractor shall ensure that the subcontractor of each element of the Work
examines the conditions of the substrate to receive the Work, dimensions and spaces
adjacent, tolerances, interfacing with other elements and services, and the conditions
under which the Work will be performed. Contractor shall require each subcontractor to
notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper or timely completion of
the Work, and ensure that they do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the subcontractor.
B. Contractor shall inspect materials prior to installation, and reject damaged and
defective items. Contractor shall re-check measurements and dimensions before
starting each installation.
C. Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations, if those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or
stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
D. Contractor shall provide attachment and connection devices and methods
necessary for securing Work. Work shall be secured true to line and level, allowing for
expansion and building movement.
E. Contractor shall install each component during weather conditions that will
ensure the best possible results for quality and the Project schedule. Completed Work
shall be isolated from incompatible materials as necessary to prevent deterioration.
F.: Contractor shall provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work, and arrange joints
in exposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Contractor shall refer questionable
choices to the Project Manager for final decision.
G. Where mounting heights are not indicated, Contractor shall install individual
components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the
particular application indicated. Contractor shall refer questionable mounting height
decisions to the Project Manager for final decision.
H. The Contract Documents are diagrammatic, showing certain physical
relationships of the various elements and systems and their interfacing with other
elements and systems. Establishment and coordination of these relationships is the
exclusive responsibility of Contractor. Drawings shall not be scaled. Contractor shall
lay out and arrange all elements to contribute to safety, efficiency and to carry the
harmony of design throughout the Work. In case of conflict or un-dimensioned
locations, Contractor shall verify required positioning with the Project Manager.
I. Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, patching, and repairing
damage as a result of completing the Work or making its parts fit together properly.
3.27 COMMUNICATION:
A. Contractor shall direct all communications to the Town regarding the Work to the
attention of the Project Manager.
B. Contractor shall have at the Site at all times as its agent, a competent
superintendent capable of reading and thoroughly understanding the Contract Documents
and being thoroughly experienced in the type of Work being performed.
C. Progress reports and progress/manpower schedules shall be updated and
submitted to the Project Manager on a weekly basis, or at such other times as the Project
Manager may request. Contractor shall also forward to the Project Manager, at the end of
each month, an itemized report of the delivery status of major and critical items of
purchased equipment and material, including Drawings and the status of shop and field
fabricated Work. If the completion of any part of the Work or the delivery of materials is
behind the approved schedule, Contractor shall submit a plan acceptable to the Project
Manager for bringing the Work up to schedule. The Town shall have the right to withhold
progress payments for the Work if Contractor fails to update and submit the
progress/manpower schedule and reports as specified. Any changes to the approved
schedule shall be reviewed and approved by the Town.
3.28 MEETINGS, SCHEDULES AND COORDINATION:
A. General. All construction activities shall be coordinated with the Project Manager.
Contractor, Project Manager and other key design and project personnel shall have
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
coordination meetings at least weekly. Contractor shall, where necessary, prepare
memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining special procedures required
for coordination, including such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at
meetings. Contractor shall provide minutes of all meetings and submit to attendees for
review and record keeping.
B. Pre-Construction Conference.
1. Contractor shall coordinate the Pre-Construction Conference. Contractor's
designated supervisor(s) assigned to the Work and all necessary key design and
Project personnel shall attend this meeting. Contractor shall, at a minimum,
provide the following to the Town at the Pre-Construction Conference: the
construction schedules; a detailed estimate of partial payments for the Work; the
Traffic Control Plan; a detailed plan showing Site access and staging areas; and
names and contact phone numbers of all subcontractors.
2. The suggested agenda topics are as follows:
Tentative construction schedule
Work priorities
Critical Work sequencing
Designation of responsible personnel
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment
Distribution of Contract Documents
Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
Preparation of Record Documents
Use of the premises
Office, Work and storage areas
Equipment deliveries and priorities
Community impact mitigation: maintaining access, loading deliveries, etc
Public Information Program
Safety procedures
Security
Housekeeping
Working days and hours
Temporary construction facilities and utilities
3. Contractor shall submit to the Town for review and approval a construction
schedule including: proposed daily construction hours; details of all construction
items; start and finish dates; confirmation and dates for coordinating all utility
relocation and/or interruptions; installation and removal of temporary facilities,
preparation and timing of submittals; timing of progress meetings; Project close-out
activities; and the same information for all subcontractor(s). The schedule shall not
be changed without prior notification and review by the Town. The schedule shall
be in the form of a chart of suitable scale to indicate approximately the percentage
of Work scheduled for completion at any time. Contractor shall enter on the chart
the actual progress on a weekly basis and shall deliver said progress schedule to
the Town prior to the weekly Contractor/Project Manager coordination meetings.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
4. Contractor shall also submit a schedule of the anticipated manpower by title
and duty. The manpower proposed shall be adequate for orderly flow of Work and
completion within the time specified in the Contract Documents.
C. Space. Contractor shall administer the allocation of available space at the Site
equitably among entities needing access and space, so as to produce the best overall
efficiency in the performance of the Work. Contractor shall schedule deliveries so as to
minimize the space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment
within the Site, but shall not unduly risk delays in the Work. All equipment and material
shall be removed from the Site during No Construction Activity periods.
3.29 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
A. Within 10 days after the Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall prepare a separate
listing and schedule organized by related specification section number, showing the
principal submittals and initial submittal dates. The schedule shall be in chronological
order.
B. Contractor shall coordinate the preparation and processing of submittals with the
performance of Work items, and shall transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of
performance of related Work to avoid delay.
C. Contractor shall coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing,
delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. The
Project Manager may withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other
submittals until related submittals are received.
D. Contractor shall allow seven (7) days for processing of each submittal. No
extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals to the Project Manager at least seven (7) days in advance of the Work to
permit processing. A review of a submittal causing a resubmittal constitutes a new
submittal and consequently an additional seven (7) days for processing shall be
accommodated by Contractor with no extension of Contract Time.
E. Submittals are not Contract Documents. Contractor shall review all submittals for
compliance with the Contract Documents. The review by the Project Manager shall not
constitute a change to the Contract Documents or relieve Contractor from compliance to
any part of the Contract Documents.
F. Contractor shall package each submittal appropriately, and use a transmittal
form. Submittals received from sources other than Contractor will be returned without
action. The transmittal shall record relevant information and requests for data, and shall
note deviations from Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations.
G. Contractor shall review all submittals for compliance with the Contract
Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in
the Work. Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the
Contract Documents and approved by Contractor may be returned without action.
H. Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract
Documents require submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the
Project Manager.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
I. All submittals subject to review and approval by the Town of Vail Building
Department or other regulatory agency shall be submitted in a form as required by the
Town of Vail Building Department or regulatory agency.
3.30 SHOP DRAWINGS:
A. Contractor shall submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale,
highlighting deviations from the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not reproduce
Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings.
Shop Drawings shall include the following information:
Dimensions;
Identification of products and materials included;
Compliance with specified standards;
Notation of coordination requirements; and
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
B. Acceptance of Shop Drawings by the Project Manager is not meant to be a
review for completeness or accuracy of details, dimensions, quantities, installation or
construction means, methods, techniques, processes, sequences, procedures, safety
issues, nor performance, all of which remain the responsibility of Contractor.
C. Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of each Shop Drawing.
3.31 PRODUCT DATA:
A. Contractor shall assemble Product Data into a single submittal for each element
of Work. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed
data is not suitable for use, Contractor shall submit such data as Drawings. Where
applicable include maintenance manual.
B. Contractor shall mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where
printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not
required, Contractor shall mark copies to indicate the applicable information.
C. Product Data shall include the following information:
Manufacturer's printed recommendation;
Compliance with recognized trade association standards;
Application of testing agency labels and seals;
Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement; and
Notation of coordination requirements.
D. Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of Product Data.
3.32 SAMPLES:
A. Contractor shall submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as
specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed, including partial
sections of manufactured or fabricated components.
B. Samples shall include the following:
Generic description of the Sample;
Sample source;
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
Product name or name of manufacturer or supplier.
Compliance with recognized standards; and
Availability and delivery time.
C. Where variation in characteristics are inherent in the material or product
represented, Contractor shall submit multiple units (not less than three (3)), that show
approximate limits of the variations.
D. Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation and similar characteristics, Contractor shall submit
three (3) sets, and one (1) will be returned marked with the action taken. The
transmittal shall indicate special requests regarding disposition of Samples.
E. The Project Manager shall review Samples for a final check of elements, and for
a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual
component as delivered and installed.
F. Contractor shall maintain one (1) complete set of Samples, as returned, at the
Site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of Work.
3.33 RECORD DOCUMENTS:
A. Contractor shall maintain on a weekly basis, drawings and specifications for all
disciplines of Work that depict the details of all Work on the Project. Drawings shall be
marked in red pencil with any sketches attached, each with date of modification. The
as-built set shall be kept on Site and become the basis for the Record Documents.
B. Contractor shall maintain a clean, undamaged set of black line prints of
Drawings, and shall:
1. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies
substantially from the Work as originally shown;
2. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and
accurately;
3. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to
measure and record at a later date;
4. During construction, mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other
colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work;
5. Mark new information that is important to the Project Manager, but was
not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings;
6. Keep Record Documents current, by updating at least weekly, and avoid
permanently concealing any Work until required information has been recorded;
7. Include horizontal and vertical location of all underground utilities and
appurtenances, including storm sewer, referenced to permanent surface
improvements;
8. Include horizontal and vertical locations of underground irrigation and
electrical sleeving referenced to permanent surface improvements;
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
9. Provide the locations of both ends identified with locatable discs in the
field, on a reproducible mylar drawing with a field log of all survey data;
10. Provide the location of clean-outs and other items requiring access or
maintenance; and
11. At Substantial Completion, supply a digital computer file of the record
drawings and one hard copy to the Project Manager.
C. Contractor shall maintain on Site, separate from documents used for
construction, one complete set of Contract Documents, including all Change Orders,
correspondence and reports.
D. In addition to a hard copy, Record Drawings shall be provided in AutoCAD format
acceptable to the Project Manager.
3.34 PROJECT CLOSEOUT AND TRAINING
A. Documents. Upon completion of the Work and prior to Final Acceptance,
Contractor shall provide the following Closeout documents in hard copy and electronic
copy for review and approval:
1. As-Built Record Drawings.
2. Operating and Maintenance Manuals and documentation for all installed
equipment, systems and furnishes.
3. All Manufacturer Warranties as required within the Contract Documents
where they shall be held in the name of the Town.
4. Photo and video documentation as required by the Contract Documents.
5. All other documentation pertinent to the Work as required by the Contract
Documents and deemed pertinent by Contractor or Town.
B. Training. Contractor shall provide training on all systems constructed and installed
as part of the Work. The training shall be provided to the Town by a qualified
technician/trainer for each specific portion of the Work. The training sessions shall be
scheduled with the Project Manager and videotaped by Contractor for future use by the
Town. All operating and maintenance manuals and warranties shall be reviewed with the
Town at this time.
3.35 ARCHAEOLOGICAL AND HISTORICAL DISCOVERIES:
A. Contractor shall inform the Town of any evidence which might suggest to a
layperson that archaeological or historical materials may be present in the Site. Upon
making such a discovery, Contractor shall do whatever is necessary to avoid disturbing
the Site. This may require that Contractor's activities be redirected or stopped until the
Town determines how to proceed.
B. As a result of Contractor's efforts to preserve the potential discovery at the Site, if
Contractor's activities are delayed for longer than eight (8) normal Work hours, Contractor
shall prepare accounting information to support an adjustment to the Contract Price.
3.36 RESTORATION:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A. Contractor has field inspected the Site and fully understands that existing
landscaping and improvements are present within the Site. Such existing improvements
shall be protected. Any damage or disruption to the public right-of-way, drainage
easements, Town property, or private property related to the Work shall be restored to pre-
existing or better condition.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for replacing all existing improvements, including
irrigation systems and landscaping, damaged during Contractor's activities, except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
3.37 FINAL CLEANING:
Contractor shall be responsible for professionally cleaning all components of the Work
prior to turnover to the Town. All Work shall be turned over in a new and operational
condition, free from all dirt, debris, smudges, scratches, dents, dings, grease, oil,
discolorations and hazards. This includes all internal and external mechanical, electrical,
plumbing and special systems.
PART 4. TOWN'S RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
4.01 PROJECT MANAGER:
The Project Manager shall administer the Work, including the finalization of any change
orders, pay estimates and payments of such, acceptance of Work, and other matters as
stipulated in the Contract Documents. The Project Manager will issue with reasonable
promptness such written interpretations of the Contract Documents (in the form of
Drawings or otherwise) as the Project Manager determines necessary.
4.02 TESTING:
In addition to the materials testing performed by Contractor, the Town may conduct Quality
Assurance testing at its own discretion.
4.03 TOWN’S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK:
If Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the
Town to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence
and promptness, the Town may, without prejudice to other remedies the Town may
have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be
issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due Contractor the reasonable cost
of correcting such deficiencies, including the Town's expenses and compensation for
any additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. If payments
due Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Town.
4.04 STOP WORK ORDER:
If Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents, the Town may issue a written order to Contractor to stop the
Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
However, the right of the Town to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part
of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any other person.
4.05 OTHER CONTRACTS:
A. The Town reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with the Work.
Contractor shall cooperate with all other contractors so that their work is not impeded by
the Work, and Contractor shall give other contractors access to the Site necessary to
perform their contracts. Specifically, Contractor shall afford utility service companies and
other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials
and equipment and the execution of Work, and shall properly connect and coordinate its
Work with theirs, and shall conduct his operations as to minimize the interference with
theirs, as directed by the Project Manager. Contractor shall conduct its operations and
cooperate with the other parties so as to minimize interference with this other work.
B. If any part of the Work depends on proper execution or results upon the work of
another contractor or utility service company, Contractor shall inspect and promptly
report to the Project Manager in writing any patent or apparent defects or deficiencies in
such work. Contractor's failure so to report shall constitute an acceptance of the other
work as fit and proper for integration with the Work, and such acceptance by Contractor
shall render Contractor responsible for subsequent correction of any such work.
C. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the Work required to make it
come together properly and integrate with work by other contractors. Contractor shall
not cut, excavate or otherwise alter work of others without written consent of the Project
Manager.
D. Should a dispute arise as to the rights of Contractor and another, the Project
Manager shall be the sole decision maker and the Project Manager’s decision shall be
final and binding on Contractor.
4.07 PARTIAL UTILIZATION:
A. The Town may use completed portions of the Work may be accomplished prior to
Substantial Completion, subject to the following:
1. The Town may request permission to use any part of the Work which the
Town believes to be substantially complete and which may be so used without
significant interference with the Work. If Contractor agrees, Contractor will certify
to the Town that said part of the Work is substantially complete. The Town shall
thereafter have the right to exclude Contractor from any part of the Work which
the Town uses.
2. The Town may also take over operation of a facility constituting part of the
Work whether or not it is substantially complete if such facility is functionally and
separately useable; provided that prior to any such takeover, the Town and
Contractor have agreed as to the division of responsibilities between the Town
Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance, correction period, heat,
utilities and insurance with respect to such facility.
3. No occupancy of part of the Work or taking over of operations of a facility
will be accomplished prior to acknowledgment from the insurers providing the
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
property insurance on the Work that notice of such occupancy has been received
and that said insurers, in writing, have effected the changes in coverage
necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall
consent to such use or occupancy by endorsement on the policy or policies, but
the property insurance shall not be canceled or lapse on account of any such
partial use or occupancy.
B. Partial use or occupancy of the Project by the Town shall not constitute
acceptance of Work not in compliance with the Contract Documents.
PART 5. TERMINATION
5.01 LABOR DISPUTES:
Notwithstanding any other provision contained in this Contract, in the event of any picket
or other form of labor dispute at the Site, Contractor shall continue to perform the Work
without interruption or delay. If Contractor ceases performance of the Work because of
such picket or other form of labor dispute, the Town may terminate the services of
Contractor after giving forty-eight (48) hours' written notice of its intent to do so.
5.02 DEFAULT:
The Town may terminate this Contract upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor if
Contractor defaults in the timely performance of any provision of the Contract Documents,
or otherwise fails to perform the Work, or any part thereof, in accordance with the Contract
Documents. Termination of the Contract by the Town shall not be the Town's exclusive
remedy, and the Town may pursue such other remedies and actions lawfully available to
the Town including, but not limited to, an action at law for damages against Contractor or
any bonding agency issuing a bond hereunder, or an action in equity for injunctive relief.
5.03 CONVENIENCE:
The Town may terminate this Contract for convenience upon seven (7) days written notice
to Contractor. Contractor shall be paid for portions of Work completed, and if any portion
of the Work was suspended, the appropriate adjustments for increases in costs and time
caused by the suspension shall be made.
PART 6. WARRANTIES:
6.01 WARRANTY OF FITNESS OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS:
Contractor represents and warrants to the Town that all equipment and materials used in
the Work, and made a part of the Work, or placed permanently in the Work, shall be new
unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. All equipment and materials used
shall be of good quality, free of defects and in conformity with the Contract Documents. All
equipment and materials not in conformity with the Contract Documents shall be
considered defective.
6.02 GENERAL WARRANTY:
A. Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all material furnished and Work performed
by Contractor for a period of two (2) years from the date of Substantial Completion. Under
this warranty, Contractor agrees to repair or replace, at its own expense and under the
direction of the Project Manager, any portion of the Work which fails or is defective,
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
unsound, unsatisfactory because of materials or workmanship, or which is not in
conformity with the provisions of the Contract. Should Contractor fail to perform any such
Work within the warranty period after a request by the Town, the Town may withdraw from
the Payment and Performance Bond any and all amounts necessary to complete the
required Work. The expiration of the warranty period shall in no way limit the Town's legal
or equitable remedies, or the period in which such remedies may be asserted, for Work
negligently or defectively performed.
B. For any items of the Work not completed at Substantial Completion, the warranty
for such Work shall not begin until such Work has been completed. The Project Manager
shall note such items at Substantial Completion, and as they are completed, shall note the
commencement dates for the warranty on such items.
6.03 REINSTATED WARRANTY:
When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected, Contractor shall
reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal
to the original warranty.
6.04 MANUFACTURERS' WARRANTIES:
A. Written warranties made to the Town are in addition to implied warranties, and
shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the
law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Town
can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
B. The Town reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to
products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
C. The Town reserves the right to refuse to accept Work where a special warranty,
certification, or similar commitment is required, until evidence is presented that entities
required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
D. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve
Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it
relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special
warranties with Contractor.
E. When a special warranty is required to be executed by Contractor, or Contractor
and a Subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, Contractor shall prepare a written
document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the
required parties, and submit a draft to the Project Manager for approval prior to final
execution.
F. At Substantial Completion, Contractor shall compile each required warranty and
bond and include the warranty documents in the Record Documents.
PART 7. BONDS, INSURANCE AND INDEMNIFICATION
7.01 INDEMNIFICATION:
A. Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Town and its officers,
insurers, volunteers, representatives, agents, employees, heirs and assigns from and
against all claims, liability, damages, losses, expenses and demands, including attorney
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
fees, on account of injury, loss, or damage, including, without limitation, claims arising from
bodily injury, personal injury, sickness, disease, death, property loss or damage, or any
other loss of any kind whatsoever, which arise out of or are in any manner connected with
this Contract or the Contract Documents, to the extent that such injury, loss or damage is
attributable to the act, omission, error, professional error, mistake, negligence or other fault
of Contractor, any subcontractor of Contractor, or any officer, employee, representative, or
agent of Contractor or of any subcontractor of Contractor, or which arise out of any
worker's compensation claim of any employee of Contractor or of any employee of any
subcontractor of Contractor.
B. Contractor, to the fullest extent permitted by law, shall defend, investigate, handle,
respond and provide defense for and defend against any such liability, claims, damages,
losses, expenses or demands at the sole expense of Contractor, or at the option of the
Town, Contractor agrees to pay the Town or reimburse the Town for defense costs
incurred by the Town in connection with any such liability, claims, damages, losses,
expenses or demands. Contractor, to the fullest extent permitted by law, shall defend and
bear all other costs and expenses related thereto, including court costs and attorney fees,
whether or not such liability, claims or demands alleged are groundless, false or
fraudulent.
C. This indemnification provision is intended to comply with C.R.S. § 13-21-111.5(6),
as amended, and shall be read as broadly as permitted to satisfy that intent.
7.02 NOTICE OF CLAIM:
If Contractor receives any claim arising from the performance of the Work, Contractor shall
notify the Town in writing of the nature of the claim within twenty-four (24) hours of receipt
of the claim by Contractor. In this notice, Contractor shall provide evidence that Contractor
has notified Contractor's insurer of the claim. Contractor shall keep the Town apprised of
the disposition of the claim, and Contractor shall take all necessary action to resolve the
claim and make restitution, if required, as quickly as possible.
7.03 INSURANCE:
A. Contractor agrees to procure and maintain, at its own cost, a policy or policies of
insurance sufficient to insure against all liability, claims, demands, and other obligations
assumed by Contractor pursuant to this Contract. Such insurance shall be in addition to
any other insurance requirements imposed by law.
B. Contractor shall procure and maintain, and shall cause any subcontractor of
Contractor to procure and maintain, the minimum insurance coverages listed below. Such
coverages shall be procured and maintained with forms and insurers acceptable to the
Town. In the case of any claims-made policy, the necessary retroactive dates and
extended reporting periods shall be procured to maintain such continuous coverage.
1. Worker's compensation insurance to cover obligations imposed by
applicable law for any employee engaged in the performance of Work under this
Contract, and Employer's Liability insurance with minimum limits of one hundred
thousand dollars ($100,000) each accident, five hundred thousand dollars
($500,000) disease – policy limit, and one hundred thousand dollars ($100,000)
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
disease – each employee. Evidence of qualified self-insured status may be
substituted for the worker's compensation requirements of this paragraph.
2. Commercial general liability insurance with minimum combined single limits
of at least one million ($1,000,000) each occurrence and two million dollars
($2,000,000) general aggregate. The policy shall be applicable to all premises and
operations. The policy shall include coverage for premises-operations,
independent contractors protective, bodily injury, broad form property damage
(including completed operations), personal injury (including coverage for
contractual and employee acts), blanket contractual, products, and completed
operations. The policy shall contain a severability of interests provision, and, to the
extent that liability results from the acts or omissions of Contractor, the policy shall
be endorsed to include the Town and the Town's officers, employees, and
consultants as additional insureds. No additional insured endorsement shall
contain any exclusion for bodily injury or property damage arising from completed
operations.
3. Business Automobile liability insurance (including owned, non-owned and
hired vehicles) with minimum combined single limits for bodily injury and property
damage of at least one million dollars ($1,000,000) each person and one million
($1,000,000) each occurrence.
4. Umbrella insurance to protect Contractor against all claims in excess of the
limits provided under the primary insurance policies. The liability limits of the
umbrella liability policy shall not be less than two million dollars ($2,000,000). The
umbrella liability should be written on an "Occurrence Form," with no more than ten
thousand dollars ($10,000) retention for self-insured hazards, each occurrence.
C. Any insurance carried by the Town, its officers, its employees, or its consultants
shall be excess and not contributory insurance to that provided by Contractor.
D. Contractor shall provide to the Town a certificate of insurance as evidence that
policies providing the required coverages, conditions, and minimum limits are in full force
and effect. Contractor shall not cancel, terminate or materially change the coverages
afforded under the policies until at least thirty (30) days prior written notice has been given
to the Town. The Town reserves the right to request and receive a certified copy of any
policy and any endorsement thereto.
E. Contractor shall name the following list as additional insureds under its
Comprehensive or Commercial General Liability insurance: Town of Vail; Pierce
Architects, Boyle Engineering, Architectural Engineering Consultants, Shaner
Engineering and Peak Land Consultants.
7.04 SURETY BONDS:
Contractor shall furnish a Payment and Performance Bond in the full amount of the
Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's
obligations under the Contract Documents, including the warranty. This bond shall remain
in effect for the duration of the Project. After Final Completion and Acceptance, Contractor
shall provide the Town with a Warranty Bond in the amount of thirty-three percent(33%) of
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
the Contract Price, and this bond shall remain in effect for the full extent of the warranty
period. The form and substance of all Surety Bonds shall be satisfactory to the Town.
PART 8. PAYMENT
8.01 GENERAL PAYMENT REQUIREMENTS:
A. Bid prices, as quoted in the Bid Schedule, shall constitute full compensation for
labor, materials, equipment, rentals, overhead, profit and incidentals to complete all
Work for each pay item and for all risk, loss, damage, or expense of whatever nature
arising from the nature of the Work or prosecution thereof.
B. Work or materials that are essential to the Work, but for which there are no pay
items, will not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be included in other items
of Work.
C. Payment for Work listed as lump sum Bid items shall be paid for on a lump sum
fixed price basis. A schedule of values shall be provided to the Project Manager for
approvalupon execution of the Contract. The schedule of values shall be the basis for
reviewing Contractor’s applications for Payment.
D. Total overhead and profit on Contractor self-performed Work shall not exceed ten
percent (10%). Total overhead and markup by Subcontractors shall not exceed ten
percent (10%). Total overhead and markup for Contractor on Work performed by the
Subcontractor shall not exceed five percent (5%).
8.02 MEASUREMENT:
A. All measurements and payments will be based on Work completed in strict
accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The method of measurement and basis of payment described are for the Work
itemized in the Bid Form and in the Specifications.
C. The determination of quantities of Work acceptably completed under the terms of
the Contract Documents will be made by the Project Manager. Measurements will be
taken according to the United States standard measure. Unless otherwise specified, all
longitudinal measurements will be made horizontally, and computations will be based
on the dimensions shown on drawings and details. Quantities will be rounded off to the
nearest whole number. Measurement by cubic dimension using mean length, width and
height or thickness. Measurements by area shall be measured by square dimensions
using mean length and width or radius, measured horizontally. Linear measurements
shall be measured by linear dimension at the item centerline or mean chord. Lump sum
or per each measurements shall be made as specified by the Bid description.
Measurements by weight shall be measured by certified scales at the source of material
or by certified truck tickets. When base course, topsoil, surface course, or any materials
are measured by the cubic yard in the vehicle, such measurement shall be taken at the
point of delivery.
D. Contractor shall, in the presence of the Project Manager, verify all measurements
and quantities required for payment by the unit price method. Contractor shall provide
necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required for measurements.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
E. The capacity of all vehicles shall be plainly marked on said vehicle and the
capacity or marking shall not be changed without permission of the Project Manager.
The Project Manager may require all vehicles to have uniform capacity.
F. The determination of payment for lump sum or fixed fee Work shall be made
based on the approved schedule of values and percentages of Work completed within
the timeframe of the pay application.
8.03 PROGRESS PAYMENTS:
A. The Town shall make periodic progress payments to Contractor within thirty (30)
days following the Project Manager's approval of the Work completed and pay application.
1. A progress payment shall be made only after Contractor has submitted an
application for a progress payment on a form approved by the Project Manager,
and if requested by the Project Manager, Contractor shall submit copies of invoices
from subcontractors or supplies and partial waivers executed by each.
2. Each application for progress payment shall include an affidavit of
Contractor stating that all previous progress payments have been applied to
discharge in full all of Contractor's obligations reflected in prior Applications for
Partial Payment.
3. Applications for progress payments may not include request for payment
for portions of the Work for which Contractor does not intend to pay to a
Subcontractor, unless such Work has been performed by another that Contractor
intends to pay.
4. The Project Manager may request additional information to support the progress
payment application.B. Progress payments shall be in an amount equal to ninety-five
percent (95%) of the Work actually completed as determined by the Project Manager. The
remaining five percent (5%) shall be held as retainage. Upon Final Acceptance,
Contractor may request the release of retainage.
C. If Contractor fails to complete any required Work within the time period agreed
between Contractor and the Project Manager, or within any time period set forth in the
Contract Documents, as modified or extended, the Town is expressly authorized to
withhold any progress payment for such Work until such Work is completed. The Town
may also refuse to make any progress payment because of subsequently discovered
evidence of defective Work.
D. No progress payment except final payment will be made for a sum of less than
one thousand dollars ($1,000.00).
8.04 FINAL PAYMENT:
A. Final payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the
actual measurements and quantities accepted by the Town multiplied by the unit price for
Work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work.
B. Upon final acceptance, Contractor may apply for final payment. The application
shall include valid releases or waivers of all claims in connection with the Work.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C. If the Town is satisfied that the Work has been completed in compliance with the
Contract Documents, the Town shall cause publication to commence of Notice of Final
Settlement pursuant to C.R.S. § 38-26-107. If no claims are made, the Town shall
make final payment, including any retainage, by the Owner’s Representative in
accordance with the Notice of Final Settlement. If any claim is made, the Town may
withhold up to twice the amount of any asserted claim against Contractor until said
claim has been resolved.
8.05 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES:
A. Because time is of the essence and delayed performance constitutes a
compensable inconvenience to the Town and its residents, the liquidated damages
established in this Section shall be enforced. Such damages are not a penalty. For each
day Final Completion is delayed after the Final Completion date stated in the Construction
Contract, as modified through approved change orders, Contractor shall be assessed the
following amounts:
$750.00 per calendar day for the first 7 days
$1500.00 per calendar day for the next 7 days
$2000.00 per day thereafter
B. Allowing Contractor to continue and finish the Work or any part thereof after the
Final Completion date shall not operate as a waiver on the part of the Town of any of its
rights under the Contract Documents. Any liquidated damages assessed shall not relieve
Contractor from liability for any damages or costs of other contractors caused by a failure
of Contractor to complete the Work in the Contract Time. Liquidated damages may be
deducted from any payment due Contractor or the retainage. If the liquidated damages
exceed the amount owed to Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse the Town.
8.06 ORAL AGREEMENTS PROHIBITED:
This Contract is expressly subject to the provisions of C.R.S. § 29-1-110(1), and
Contractor acknowledges that neither the Town nor any employee or agent thereof is
authorized to expend or contract for the expenditure of any monies in excess of those
appropriated by the Vail Town Council. The Town acknowledges that sufficient funds
have been appropriated to pay the Contract Price, but Contractor shall not rely upon the
appropriation of any funds in addition to those already appropriated unless and until the
same are lawfully appropriated by the Vail Town Council.
8.07 ITEMS NOT INCLUDED IN BID:
No additional compensation shall be paid for any costs or services listed in the Contract
Documents, but not specifically listed in the Bid as a Bid item.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
8.08 CHANGES IN QUANTITY:
A. Except as otherwise provided in this Part 8, the unit Bid price shown in the Bid
Schedule shall be used to determine the payment owed Contractor for any changes in
quantity.
B. The actual quantity placed, as determined by the Project Manager, shall be used to
calculate the payment due to Contractor.
C. Prior to any Work being performed in excess of any of the Bid Schedule quantities,
Contractor shall notify the Town, in writing, of every quantity that will exceed one hundred
five percent (105%) of the quantity listed on the Bid Schedule.
D. Except as otherwise provided in this Part 8, Contractor shall not be entitled to
compensation for any increased expense, loss of expected reimbursement or loss of
anticipated profits, directly or indirectly caused by any changes in quantity.
8.09 BID PRICE ADJUSTMENTS:
When a Major Item is increased to more than one hundred thirty-three percent (133%) or
decreased to less than sixty-seven percent (67%) of the original quantity stated on the Bid
Schedule, the unit Bid price shall be modified by written change order. Payment for major
items shall be calculated by multiplying the actual quantity placed by the modified Bid
price.
8.10 ELIMINATED ITEMS:
Should any items contained in the Bid Schedule be found unnecessary for completion of
the Work, the items shall be eliminated. The Contract Price shall be modified by Change
Order, and the amount of the change order shall be the eliminated quantity multiplied by
the unit Bid price stated in the Bid Schedule, minus any reasonable costs incurred by
Contractor for the eliminated items. Reasonable costs shall be determined by the Project
Manager based on information provided by Contractor, and may include mobilization of
eliminated materials and equipment mobilization costs if the sole purpose of the
equipment was to place the eliminated material. In no case shall the costs exceed the
amount of the eliminated items.
8.11 MATERIALS STORED BUT NOT INCORPORATED:
Payments may be made to Contractor for materials stored on the Site but not incorporated
into the Work as evidenced by invoices or cost analyses of material produced, if the
material has been fabricated or processed and is ready for installation into the Work and
conforms with the Contract Documents. Payments shall not exceed eighty-five percent
(85%) of the price shown in the Bid Schedule or one hundred percent (100%) of the
certified invoice cost of the stockpiled material, whichever is less. Payment for stockpiled
materials shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for loss or damage to the material.
Payment for living plant materials or perishable materials shall not be made until the living
or perishable material is made an integral part of the finished Work.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
8.12 COST RECORDS:
Contractor shall make cost records available to the Town if the Town deems it necessary
to determine the validity and amount of any item claimed.
PART 9. MISCELLANEOUS
9.01 PUBLICATIONS:
Any and all publications relating to the Work and authored by Contractor or any of its
subcontractors shall be submitted to the Town for its prior written approval of the content
of the publication. If the Town disapproves of the content of the publication, the author
shall withdraw it from publication. The term "publication" as used herein shall include
articles or letters to be published in any newspaper, magazine, trade journal or other
periodical.
9.02 CONFIDENTIALITY:
Any and all reports, information, date, statistics, forms, designs, plans, procedures,
systems, studies and any other communication form of knowledge given to or prepared or
assembled by Contractor under this Contract shall, to the extent authorized and permitted
by law, be kept as confidential and not be made available by Contractor to any individual,
company or organization without the prior written consent of the Town. Notwithstanding
the foregoing, Contractor shall not be restricted from releasing information in response to a
subpoena, court order, or legal process, but Contractor shall notify the Town in writing
before responding.
9.03 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR:
Contractor, for all purposes arising out of this Contract, is an independent contractor and
not an employee of the Town. It is expressly understood and agreed that Contractor shall
not be entitled to any benefits to which the Town's employees are entitled, such as
overtime, retirement benefits, worker's compensation, injury leave or other leave benefits.
9.04 INTERPRETATION AND CONFLICTS:
A. When words, which have a technical or trade meaning are used to describe
Work, materials or equipment, such words shall be interpreted in accordance with such
meaning. Reference to standard specifications, manuals or codes of any technical
society, organization or association, or to the code of any governmental authority,
whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard
specification, manual or code in effect at the time of opening of Bids, unless otherwise
specifically stated. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification
manual or code (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract
Documents) shall change the duties and responsibilities of Contractor from those set
forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract
Documents shall be issued by the Town.
B. Should a conflict occur in or between Drawings and Specifications, Contractor is
deemed to have estimated on the more expensive way of doing the Work unless
Contractor obtained a written decision from the Town before submission of the Bid as to
which method or materials will be required.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
9.05 REFERENCES
The following abbreviations, which may be used in the Contract Documents, refer to the
organizations and specifications of the organizations listed below:
AA Aluminum Association
900 19th Street, NW, Suite 300
Washington, D.C. 20006-2168
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
1518 K Street, NW, Suite 503
Washington, D.C. 20005
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association
1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 104
Schaumberg, Illinois 60173-4268
AAN see ANLA
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
444 North Capitol Street, NW, Suite 249
Washington, D.C. 20001
AATSA American Traffic Safety Services Association
15 Riverside Parkway Suite 100
Fredericksburg, VA 22406-1717
ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association
950 N. Glebe Road, Suite 160
Arlington, Virginia 22203-1824
ACI American Concrete Institute
P.O. Box 9094
Farmington Hills, Michigan 48333-9094
ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association
222 West Las Colinas Boulevard, Suite 641
Irving, Texas 75039-5423
ADC Air Diffusion Council
11 South LaSalle Street, Suite 1400
Chicago, Illinois 60603
AFPA American Forest and Paper Association
1111 19th Street, NW, Suite 800
Washington, D.C. 20036
AGA American Gas Association
1515 Wilson Boulevard
Arlington, Virginia 22209
AHA American Hardboard Association
1210 W. Northwest Highway
Palatine, Illinois 60067-1897
AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
20 N. Wacker Drive, Suite 1500
Chicago, Illinois 60606
AI Asphalt Institute
Research Park Drive
P.O. Box 14052
Lexington, Kentucky 40512-4052
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
AIA American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20006-5292
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
1 East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100
Chicago, Illinois 60601-2001
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
1101 17th Street, NW
Washington, D.C. 20036-4700
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
7012 S. Revere Parkway, Suite 140
Englewood, Colorado 80112
ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee
P.O. Box 210
Germantown, Maryland 20875
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
30 W. University Drive
Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004-1893
ANLA American Nursery and Landscape Association
1250 I Street, NW, Suite 500
Washington, D.C. 20005
ANSI American National Standards Institute
11 West 42nd Street, 13th Floor
New York, New York 10036
APA American Plywood Association (See EWA)
APWA American Public Works Association
106 West 11th Street, Suite 1800
Kansas City, Missouri 64105-1806
ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
4301 Fairfax Drive, Suite 425
Arlington, Virginia 22203
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association
Center Park, 4041 Powder Mill Road, Suite 404
Calverton, Maryland 20705
ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council
1627 K Street, NW, Suite 1000
Washington, D.C. 20006-1707
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
1801 Alexander Bell Drive
Reston, Virginia 20191-4400
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers
1791 Tullie Circle, NE
Atlanta, Georgia 30329-2305
ASLA American Society of Landscape Architects
4401 Connecticut Avenue, NW
Fifth Floor
Washington, D.C. 20008-2369
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
345 East 47th Street
New York, New York 10017
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers
3617 Thousand Oaks Boulevard, Suite 210
Westlake, California 91362-3649
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering
28901 Clemens Road, Suite 100
Westlake, Ohio 44145
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
100 Barr Harbor Drive
West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania 19428-2959
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
1952 Isaac Newton Square
Reston, Virginia 20190
AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association
3246 Fall Creek Highway, Suite 1900
Granbury, Texas 76049-7979
AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute
1945 Old Gallows Road, Suite 550
Vienna, Virginia 22182
AWS American Welding Society, Inc.
550 NW LeJeune Road
Miami, Florida 33126
AWWA American Water Works Association
6666 W. Quincy Avenue
Denver, Colorado 80235
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.
355 Lexington Avenue, 17th Floor
New York, New York 10017-6603
BIA Brick Institute of America
11490 Commerce Park Drive
Reston, Virginia 22091-1525
BOCA Building Officials Code Administrators
4051 W. Flossmoor Road
Country Club Hills, Illinois 60478-5795
CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers
1422 Euclid Avenue, Suite 402
Cleveland, Ohio 44115-2851
CDA Copper Development Association, Inc.
260 Madison Avenue, 16th Floor
New York, New York 10016-2401
CDOT Colorado Department of Transportation
4201 Arkansas Avenue
Denver, CO 80222
CE Corps of Engineers
20 Massachusetts Avenue, NW
Washington, D.C. 20314
CID Commercial Item Description
See contract clauses
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
5959 Shallowford Road, Suite 419
Chattanooga, Tennessee 37421
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
9891 Broken Land Parkway, Suite 300
Columbia, Maryland 21046
CRA California Redwood Association
405 Enfrente Drive, Suite 200
Novato, California 94949
CRI Carpet and Rug Institute
310 S. Holiday Avenue
Dalton, Georgia 30722-2048
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
933 N. Plum Grove Road
Schaumburg, Illinois 60173-4758
CS Commercial Standard of NBS
(U.S. Department of Commerce)
Government Printing Office
Washington, D.C. 20402
CSSB Cedar Shingle and Shake Bureau
515 116th Avenue, NE, Suite 275
Bellevue, Washington 98004-5294
DHI Door and Hardware Institute
14170 Newbrook Drive
Chantilly, Virginia 22021-2223
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
401 M Street, SW
Washington, D.C. 20460
EWA APA- The Engineered Wood Association
P.O. Box 11700
Tacoma, Washington 98411-0700
FHA Federal Housing Administration
(U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development)
451 7th Street, SW
Washington, D.C. 20410
FHVA Fine Hardwood Veneer Association
260 S. First Street, Suite 2
Zionsville, Indiana 46077
FHWA Federal Highway Administration
555 Zang Street
Lakewood, CO 80228
FM Factory Mutual System
1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike
P.O. Box 9102
Norwood, Massachusetts 02062-9102
FS Federal Specifications
See contract clauses
GA Gypsum Association
810 First Street, NE, Suite 510
Washington, D.C. 20002
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GANA Glass Association of North America
3310 SW Harrison Street
Topeka, Kansas 66611-2279
HI Hydronics Institute
35 Russo Place
P.O. Box 218
Berkeley Heights, New Jersey 07922
HMA Hardwood Manufacturers Association
400 Penn Center Boulevard, Suite 530
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15235-5605
HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association
P.O. Box 2789
Reston, Virginia 22090-2789
IA
IBC
Irrigation Association
1911 N. Fort Myer Drive, Suite 1009
Arlington, Virginia 22209-1630
International Building Code
(International Code Council)
5203 Leesburg Pike, Suite 600
Falls Church, VA 22041
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials
5360 S. Workman Mill Road
Whittier, California 90601
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
P.O. Box 440
South Yarmouth, Massachusetts 02664
IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
345 E. 47th Street
New York, New York 10017-2394
IES Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
120 Wall Street, 17th Floor
New York, New York 10005-4001
IGCC See ITS
ILIA Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.
Stone City Bank Building, Suite 400
Bedford, Indiana 47421
ITS Internek Testing Services
3393 Route 11
P.O. Box 2040
Cortland, New York 13045-7902
KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association
1899 Preston White Drive
Reston, Virginia 22091-4326
LIA Lead Industries Association, Inc.
295 Madison Avenue
New York, New York 10017
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer’s Association
c/o Thomas Associates, Inc.
1300 Sumner Avenue
Cleveland, Ohio 44115-2851
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association
60 Revere Drive, Suite 500
Northbrook, Illinois 60062
MIA Marble Institute of America
30 Eden Alley, Suite 201
Columbus, Ohio 43215
MIMA Mineral Insulation Manufacturers Association
1420 King Street
Alexandria, Virginia 22314
MLSFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association - A Division of NAAMM
8 South Michigan Avenue, Suite 1000
Chicago, Illinois 60603
MS Military Standardization Documents
See contract clauses
MSHA Mine Safety and Health Administration
4015 Wilson Boulevard, Room 601
Arlington, Virginia 22203
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry
127 Park Street, NE
Vienna, Virginia 22180-4602
NAAMM The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
8 South Michigan Avenue, Suite 1000
Chicago, Illinois 60603
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
1440 South Creek Drive
P.O. Box 218340
Houston, Texas 77218-8340
NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association
44 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 310
Alexandria, Virginia 22314
NAPA National Asphalt Pavement Association
NAPA Building
5100 Forbes Boulevard
Lanham, Maryland 20706-4413
NAPCA National Association of Pipe Coating Applicators
8th Floor, Commercial National Bank Building
333 Texas Street, Suite 800
Shreveport, Louisiana 71101-3673
NBS National Bureau of Standards
(U.S. Department of Commerce)(See NIST)
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association
2302 Horse Pen Road
Herndon, Virginia 20171-3499
NEC National Electrical Code (by NFPA)
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
3 Bethesda Metro Center, Suite 1100
Bethesda, Maryland 20814
NELM Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
272 Tuttle Road
P.O. Box 87A
Cumberland Center, Maine 04021-0687
NEII National Elevator Industry, Inc.
185 Bridge Plaza North, Suite 310
Fort Lee, New Jersey 07024
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
1300 N. 17th Street, Suite 1847
Rosslyn, Virginia 22209
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
1 Batterymarch Park
P.O. Box 9101
Quincy, Massachusetts 02269-9101
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association
P.O. Box 34518
Memphis, Tennessee 38184-0518
NHPMA Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturers Association, Inc.,
c/o Northern Softwood Lumber Bureau
Box 217
Dear River, Minnesota 56636
NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
NIOSH Building 1, Room 3007
1600 Clifton Road, NE
Atlanta, Georgia 30333
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
(US Department of Commerce)
Building 101, #A1134
Route I-270 and Quince Orchard Road
Gaithersburg, Maryland 20899
Send requests for publications to:
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington, D.C. 20402
NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association
P.O. Box 3009
Memphis, Tennessee 38173-0009
NPA National Particleboard Association
18928 Premiere Court
Gaithersburg, Maryland 20879-1569
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
O'Hare International Center
10255 W. Higgins Road, Suite 600
Rosemont, Illinois 60018-5607
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
NSF NSF International
(Formerly National Sanitation Foundation)
3475 Plymouth Road
P.O. Box 130140
Ann Arbor, Michigan 48113-0140
NTMA The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association
3166 Des Plaines Avenue, Suite 121
Des Plaines, Illinois 60018
NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association
1400 East Touhy Avenue, Suite G-54
Des Plaines, Illinois 60018
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, NW
Washington, D.C. 20210
PCA Portland Cement Association
5420 Old Orchard Road
Skokie, Illinois 60077-1083
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
175 W. Jackson Boulevard
Chicago, Illinois 60604
PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
45 Briston Drive, Suite 101
South Euston, Massachusetts 02375
PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute, Inc.
4004 Hillsboro Pike, Suite 224-B
Nashville, Tennessee 37215
PI Perlite Institute, Inc.
88 New Dorp Plaza
Staten Island, New York 10306
PS Product Standard of NBS (U.S. Department of Commerce)
Government Printing Office
Washington, D.C. 20402
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute
966 Hungerford Drive, Suite 12-B
Rockville, Maryland 20850-1714
RIS Redwood Inspection Service (Grading Rules)
405 Enfrente Drive, Suite 200
Novato, California 94949
RMMI Rocky Mountain Masonry Institute
1780 South Bellaire Street, No. 602
Denver, Colorado 80222
SCMA Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association
400 Penn Center Blvd., Suite 530
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15235
SDI Steel Deck Institute
P.O. Box 25
Fox River Grove, Illinois 60021
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SDI Steel Door Institute
30200 Detroit Road
Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967
SFPA Southern Forest Products Association
P.O. Box 52468
New Orleans, Louisiana 70152
SGCC See ITS
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
401 N. Michigan Avenue
Chicago, Illinois 60611-4267
SJI Steel Joist Institute
3127 10th Avenue, North Ext.
Myrtle Beach, South Carolina 29577-6760
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc.
4201 Lafayette Center Drive
P.O. Box 221230
Chantilly, Virginia 20151-1209
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (Grading Rules)
4709 Scenic Highway
Pensacola, Florida 32504-9094
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
40 24th Street, 6th Floor
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222-4643
SWI Steel Window Institute
c/o Thomas Associates, Inc.
1300 Sumner Avenue
Cleveland, Ohio 44115-2851
TCA Tile Council of America
100 Clemson Research Boulevard
Anderson, South Carolina 29625
TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (See NAIMA)
TPI Truss Plate Institute
583 D'Onofrio Drive, Suite 200
Madison, Wisconsin 53719
UBC Uniform Building Code (by ICBO)
UDFCD Urban Drainage and Flood Control District
2480 West 26th Avenue, Suite 156-B
Denver, CO 80211
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
333 Pfingsten Road
Northbrook, Illinois 60062
USDA U.S. Department of Agriculture
14th Street and Independence Avenue, SW
Washington, D.C. 20250
WCLB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (Grading Rules)
P.O. Box 23145
Portland, Oregon 97281-3145
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
WIC Woodwork Institute of California
P.O. Box 980247
West Sacramento, California 95798-0247
WMMPA Wood Moulding and Millwork Producers Association
507 First Street
Woodland, California 95695
WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc.
203 Loudoun Street, SW
Leesburg, Virginia 20175-2718
WSFI Wood and Synthetic Flooring Institute (See MFMA)
WWPA Western Wood Products Association (Grading Rules)
Yeon Building
522 SW 5th Avenue
Portland, Oregon 97204-2122
WWPA Woven Wire Products Association
2515 Nordica Avenue
Chicago, Illinois 60635
WWPI Western Wood Preservers Institute
7017 NE Highway 99 #108
Vancouver, Washington 98665
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ALLOWANCES 01210 - 1
SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the following:
1. Lump-sum allowances.
2. Unit-cost allowances.
1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final
selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed
to avoid delaying the Work.
B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections.
Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form
specified for Change Orders.
B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for
use in fulfillment of each allowance.
C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of
the Work.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to
coordinate installation.
1.5 LUMP-SUM UNIT-COST ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner
under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site.
B. Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and
profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ALLOWANCES 01210 - 2
shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. Note, some
Allowances include labor to install
1.6 UNUSED MATERIALS
A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to
Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.
1. If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not
economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver
unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is
Contractor's responsibility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return
damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and
installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with
related work.
3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance No 1 (Division 9) for Wall and Floor Tile for Public Restroom Duty Quarters and
Office Restrooms (Amount: $20,000 (twenty thousand dollars)). This Allowance includes
Labor for installation.
B. Allowance No 2 (Division 11) Appliances for Duty Quarters (Amount: $7,500 (seven thousand
five hundred dollars))
C. Allowance No. 3 (Division 10) Bath and Toilet Accessories and Partitions (including corner
guards) (Amount: $3,000 (three thousand dollars))
D. Allowance No. 4 (Division 6) Cabinets for Kitchen and Bathrooms and lockers for Apparatus
Room and Duty Quarters (Amount: $10,000 (ten thousand dollars))
E. Allowance No. 5 (Division 9) Carpet and Resilient Flooring (including stair treads and vinyl
base) (Amount $9,000 (nine thousand dollars))
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ALLOWANCES 01210 - 3
F. Allowance No. 6 (Division 9) Countertops at Public Restrooms, Kitchen and
Bathrooms(Amount $3,500 (three thousand five hundred dollars))
G. Flagpole (Division 10) Flagpole (Amount $5,000 (five thousand dollars)). This Allowance
includes Labor for installation.
H. Dedication Plaque (Division 10) (Amount $1,000 (one thousand dollars)). This Allowance
includes Labor for installation.
I. Building Envelope Review and Quality Assurance Consultation (Amount $5,000 (five
thousand dollars))
J. Building Signage, Interior and Exterior (Division 10) (Amount $4,000 (four thousand dollars).
This Allowance includes Labor for installation.
END OF SECTION 01210
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule.
C. See Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and
for mockup requirements.
D. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.
E. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
F. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
G. See Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive
action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2
B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of
related construction activities.
C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of
the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time
if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title
block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
06100.01.A).
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
l.
Other necessary identification.
E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract
Documents on submittals.
F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal
may serve as final submittal.
1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will[ not] be marked with action
taken and will be returned.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3
G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals,
without review, received from sources other than Contractor.
1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810.
H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating " approval notation from
Architect's action stamp>" taken by Architect.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES
A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to
Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions:
1. <Approval by Architect.>
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
f. Printed performance curves.
g. Operational range diagrams.
h.
Compliance with specified referenced standards.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4
i. Testing by recognized testing agency.
4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless
submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings is otherwise permitted.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
c. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and
control wiring.
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
i. Notation of coordination requirements.
j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
l. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by
40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).
3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will
return one copy.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 5
4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two
Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample
set as a Project Record Sample.
E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written
summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.
1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies.
F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation."
G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies.
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 6
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Quality Requirements."
B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project
Management and Coordination."
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include
names of firms and personnel certified.
F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project.
M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 7
N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in
Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer.
S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
U. Construction Photographs : Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Photographic Documentation."
V. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to
Architect.
1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for
resubmittal.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 8
2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or
certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with
approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 9
END OF SECTION 01330
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1
SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
C. See Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire-rated
construction.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least [10] <Insert
number> days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to
proceed. Include the following information:
1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate
why they cannot be avoided.
2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance
and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be
relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long
services/systems will be disrupted.
6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to
structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of
reinforcement with original structure.
7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting
and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of
unsatisfactory work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
1. <Insert list of elements that might otherwise be overlooked as structural elements
and that require Architect's approval of a cutting and patching proposal.>
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 2
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.[ Operating elements include the
following:]
1. <Insert list of operating elements and systems.>
C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components
in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their
capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased
operational life or safety.[ Miscellaneous elements include the following:]
1. <Insert list of miscellaneous elements.>
D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 3
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to [minimize] [prevent] interruption to occupied areas.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. [Concrete] [Masonry]: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 4
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence
of patching and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
END OF SECTION 01731
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 1
SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management" for disposal of demolished
materials.
C. See Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade
improvements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition
and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility
services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
B. Predemolition Photographs or Videotapes: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction
and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 1 Section "Photographic
Documentation." Submit before Work begins.
C. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1. Comply with submittal requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste
Management."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification
program.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
E. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove all items to be retained:
B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under
a separate contract.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under
a separate contract.
E. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively
demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use.
Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.
1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials
except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 3
G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing
any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of
structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.
F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
photographs or preconstruction videotapes.
G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 4
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before
proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass
area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other
parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain[ fire watch and] portable fire-
suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly
B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for
reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is
indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 5
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition[ and cleaned] and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be[ recycled,] reused, salvaged, reinstalled,
or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste
Management."
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 01732
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 1
SECTION 02080 - UTILITY MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following utility materials and methods to complement other Division 2
Sections:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Concrete base construction requirements.
3. Equipment nameplate data requirements.
4. Nonshrink grout for equipment installations.
5. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports.
6. Utility piping demolition.
7. Cutting and patching.
8. Touchup painting and finishing.
B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 2 piping Sections.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials used should meet or exceed the requirements of the individual utility provider and the Town of
Vail, Colorado. In case of conflict, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and
weather conditions.
B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical
contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include
installations within unheated shelters.
C. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride.
3. PE: Polyethylene.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.
B. Samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification material
and device.
C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports, and anchorage for utility
piping materials and equipment.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 2
D. Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of utility equipment and
materials in relation to other systems, installations, and building components. Show space requirements
for installation and access. Indicate whether sequence and coordination of installations are important to
efficient flow of the Work. Include the following:
1. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem movement.
2. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
3. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties, including space
for disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
4. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.
5. Building, exterior wall, and foundation penetrations.
6. Sizes and location of required concrete bases.
7. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment during construction.
8. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors and walls, and their
relationship to other penetrations and installations.
E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating compliance of welding procedures and personnel
with requirements specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article of this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel."
B. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and
that certification is current.
C. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices.
D. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be
furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and
electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. If larger
equipment is approved, no additional costs will be approved for these increases. If minimum energy
ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet design requirements and
commissioning requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe-end damage and entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural
capacity of floor, if stored inside.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 3
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate equipment installation with other components.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and
other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of materials and equipment for efficient flow of the
Work.
D. Coordinate connection of piping systems with other exterior underground and overhead utilities and
services. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, franchised service companies, and
controlling agencies.
E. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are
applied to surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 2 Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 2 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness, unless
otherwise indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125 cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250 cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32.
1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10 percent
lead content.
2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent maximum lead
content.
3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 4
4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.
5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead content.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.
2. BAg1: Silver alloy.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness
and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following:
1. ABS Plastic Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Plastic Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Plastic Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. ABS to PVC Plastic Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
I. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.
J. Flanged, Ductile-Iron-Pipe Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon-steel bolts
and nuts.
K. Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes.
1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.
2. Followers: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron.
3. Gaskets: Rubber.
4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
5. Finish: Enamel paint.
2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to
prevent galvanic action and to stop corrosion.
1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end
types; and matching piping system materials.
2. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
3. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum
working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
4. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035-
or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
5. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly; full-face or ring
type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or PE bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or
2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
6.
Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling; with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F
(107 deg C).
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 5
7. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple; with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225
deg F (107 deg C).
B. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations through exterior building walls are specified in Division 15
Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
C. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
4. PVC Plastic: Manufactured, permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
5. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
6. PE Plastic: Manufactured, reusable, tapered, cup-shaped, smooth outer surface; with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.4 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as
referenced in other Division 2 Sections. If more than one type is specified for application, selection is
Installer's option, but provide one selection for each product category.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped; permanently
fastened to equipment.
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power
characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data.
2. Location: An accessible and visible location.
C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes complying with
recommendations of ASME A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but at least 1-1/4-inch- (30-mm-)
high letters for ductwork and at least 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) high letters for access door signs and similar
operational instructions.
1. Material: Fiberboard.
2. Material: Brass.
3. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior-type stenciling enamel; black, unless otherwise indicated; either
brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade.
4. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated for piping systems, comply with ASME A13.1 for colors.
D. Snap-On Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap on, color-coded,
complying with ASME A13.1.
E. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent-adhesive, color-coded,
pressure-sensitive vinyl, complying with ASME A13.1.
F. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard color-coded laminated plastic. Comply with the
following color-codes:
1. Green: Cold air.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 6
2. Yellow: Hot air.
3. Yellow/Green or Green: Supply air.
4. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
5. For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
6. Nomenclature: Include the following:
a. Direction of airflow.
b. Duct service.
c. Duct origin.
d. Duct destination.
e. Design cubic feet/minute (Liters/second).
G. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate
engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Fabricate in sizes required for message.
2. Engraved with engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with wording to match equipment
identification.
3. Punch for mechanical fastening.
4. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
5. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
6. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), for units up to 20 sq. in. (130 sq. cm) or 8 inches (200 mm) long;
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for larger units.
7. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.
H. Plastic Equipment Markers: Color-coded laminated plastic. Comply with the following color-codes:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.
2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3. Yellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components.
4. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
5. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any criteria above.
6. For hazardous equipment, use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
7. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and
revolutions/minute.
8. Size: Approximate 2-1/2 by 4 inches (65 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves;
and 4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.
I. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical
identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, lettering, and wording indicated
for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: If multiple systems of same generic name are indicated, provide identification
that indicates individual system number and service.
2.5 GROUT
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 7
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout; nonstaining;
noncorrosive; nongaseous; and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000 psig (34.5 MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual
Division 2 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.
B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location
and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as
indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping at indicated slopes.
D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
E. Install piping free of sags and bends.
F. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are
prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes.
K. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE plastic removable sleeves.
L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Division 2 Sections for roughing-in requirements.
N. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual
piping Sections:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside pipe and fittings before assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The
Soldering of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
4. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The
Soldering of Pipe and Tube."
5. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 8
6. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
7. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or
wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal
threading is specified.
c. Align threads at point of assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded.
e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with corroded or damaged threads. Do
not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
8. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended Practices and
Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified processes and welding operators
according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
9. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and
thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by
sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as
possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using
torque wrench.
10. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth
or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
b. ABS Plastic Piping: ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661.
c. CPVC Plastic Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493.
d. PVC Plastic, Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672.
e. PVC Plastic, Nonpressure Piping: ASTM D 2855.
f. ABS to PVC Plastic, Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Procedure and solvent cement
according to ASTM D 3138.
11. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657 procedures and manufacturer's written
instructions.
a. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
b. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
O. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS (DN50) or smaller threaded pipe
connection.
2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar
metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 9
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in
diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Owner’s Representative.
B. Install equipment level and plumb.
C. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components.
Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.
D. Install equipment giving right of way to piping systems installed at required slope.
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.
1. Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1.
2. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot
noninsulated piping.
3. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units. Mark each
pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious.
c. Near locations if pipes pass through walls or floors, or enter inaccessible enclosures.
d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of
equipment.
1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance
is less than 24 inches (610 mm), 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) high for distances up to 72 inches (1800 mm),
and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to
three-fourths of size of principal lettering.
2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between multiple units,
inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of
hazards and improper operations.
C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions.
3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING
A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, and application of paint.
B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2 finish coats over rust-inhibitive
metal primer.
2. Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2 finish coats over
galvanized metal primer.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 10
3. Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include 2 finish coats over rust-
inhibitive metal primer.
C. Do not paint piping specialties with factory-applied finish.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (150 mm) larger in both
directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor
bolt and tie locations. Use 3000 psig (20.7 MPa), 28-day compressive strength concrete and
reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section, "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports in location, alignment, and elevation to support and
anchor utility piping materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor utility materials
and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will
receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting
wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.8 DEMOLITION
A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove work specified in Division 2 Sections.
B. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove damaged portions and install
new products of equal capacity and quality.
C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe in its entirety.
D. Work Abandoned in Place: Cut and remove underground pipe a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) beyond
face of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish.
E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from Project site.
F. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational equipment
indicated for relocation.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UTILITY MATERIALS 02080 - 11
3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for utility
piping installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
3.10 GROUTING
A. Install nonmetallic, nonshrink grout for equipment-support bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
support plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.
E. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
F. Place grout around anchors.
G. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 02080
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SITE CLEARING 02230 - 1
SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain.
2. Removing trees and other vegetation.
3. Clearing and grubbing.
4. Topsoil stripping.
5. Removing above-grade site improvements.
6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place.
7. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.
B. Related Sections: Division 2 Section “Earthwork”
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay
particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil;
reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter;
and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials.
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall
become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining
construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.
B. Record drawings according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and
mechanical conditions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Project Meetings."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities during site-clearing operations.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SITE CLEARING 02230 - 2
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without
permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises
as directed by Owner.
C. Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. Make notification
more than 48 hours prior to beginning work described in this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 2
Section "Earthwork."
1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available
on-site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.
B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or
airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 TREE PROTECTION
A. Erect and maintain a temporary fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of
groups of trees to remain. Remove fence when construction is complete.
1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within drip line of remaining
trees.
2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within drip line of remaining trees.
B. Do not excavate within drip line of trees, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and excavate to
minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly
cut roots as close to excavation as possible.
1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.
2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and
covered with soil.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SITE CLEARING 02230 - 3
3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with emulsified asphalt or other
approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues.
4. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. Backfill with soil as soon
as possible.
D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in
a manner approved by Architect.
1. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of
proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs.
2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by the
qualified arborist.
3.3 UTILITIES
A. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before
site clearing when requested by Contractor.
1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.
B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
1. Owner will shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
E. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 15 mechanical or Division 16 electrical
Sections.
3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.
Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots.
1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.
2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where
such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
3. Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches
below exposed subgrade.
4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further
excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch loose depth, and compact each layer to
a density equal to adjacent original ground.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SITE CLEARING 02230 - 4
3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying
subsoil or other waste materials.
1. Strip surface soil of unsuitable topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste
materials.
C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and
shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches.
2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees.
3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal.
4. Stockpile surplus topsoil and allow for respreading deeper topsoil.
3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new
construction.
B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing
pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically to full depth.
3.7 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste
materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02230
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 02240 - DEWATERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes construction dewatering.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering system
of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control ground-water flow into excavations and permit
construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades.
1. Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and constructed
slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades and permanent structures is
prevented.
2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.
3. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings adjacent to excavation.
4. Remove dewatering system if no longer needed.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings for Information: For dewatering system. Show arrangement, locations, and details of
wells and well points; locations of headers and discharge lines; and means of discharge and disposal of
water.
1. Include layouts of piezometers and flow-measuring devices for monitoring performance of
dewatering system.
2. Include a written report outlining control procedures to be adopted if dewatering problems arise.
3. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
B. Qualification Data: For Installer and professional engineer.
C. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by dewatering operations.
D. Record drawings at Project closeout identifying and locating capped utilities and other subsurface
structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions performed during dewatering.
1. Note locations and capping depth of wells and well points.
E. Field Test Reports: Before starting excavation, submit test results and computations demonstrating that
dewatering system is capable of meeting performance requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with water disposal requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
DEWATERING 02240 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Coordination."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted in writing by Contractor and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services
according to requirements indicated.
B. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for
information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent
interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer.
Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data.
1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for dewatering.
2. The geotechnical report is referenced elsewhere in the Project Manual.
C. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a qualified professional engineer or land
surveyor, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks
and record existing elevations.
1. During dewatering, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed
elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Contractor if changes in
elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement,
lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations.
1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on
prepared subgrades, and from flooding site and surrounding area.
2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation.
B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without
permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed
or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump equipment,
standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface-
water controls.
DEWATERING 02240 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
B. Before excavating below ground-water level, place system into operation to lower water to specified
levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill
materials have been placed, or until dewatering is no longer required.
C. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of
structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to
drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.
1. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade softening, and
slope instability.
D. Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foundations, drains, sewers,
and other excavations.
1. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) below surface of excavation.
E. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property,
and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a manner that avoids
inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain
dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering
requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged
structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner.
1. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well holes
with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches (900 mm) below overlying
construction.
G. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations.
3.3 OBSERVATION WELLS
A. Provide, take measurements, and maintain at least the minimum number of observation wells or
piezometers indicated and additional observation wells as may be required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometric water levels in observation wells.
C. Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive, damaged, or destroyed.
Suspend construction activities in areas where observation wells are not functioning properly until
reliable observations can be made. Add or remove water from observation-well risers to demonstrate that
observation wells are functioning properly.
1. Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering is completed.
END OF SECTION 02240
DEWATERING 02240 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260 - 1
SECTION 02260 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes excavation support and protection systems.
B. Related Section: Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating and backfilling.
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, provide, monitor, and maintain an anchored and braced excavation support and protection system
capable of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and supporting sidewalls of excavations.
1. Work includes removing excavation support and protection systems when no longer needed.
2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.
3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, pave-
ments, and other improvements adjacent to excavation.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals not required for typical open-cut excavations, provided that these excavations meet require-
ments of authority having jurisdiction.
1. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer for ex-
cavation support and protection systems. System design and calculations must be acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and ad-
dresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
3. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction
and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by excavation support and
protection systems.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and per-
form work of this Section who has specialized in installing excavation support and protection systems
similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the
jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services for de-
signing excavation support and protection systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project in
material, design, and extent.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare or supervise the
preparation of data for the excavation support and protection system including drawings and com-
prehensive engineering analysis that shows the system's compliance with specified requirements.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others unless
permitted in writing by the Owner’s Representative and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260 - 2
B. Project Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for in-
formation only. The report is not part of the Contract Documents. The opinions expressed in this report
are those of the geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of the subsoil conditions, tests, and re-
sults of analyses conducted by the geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpreta-
tions or conclusions drawn from this data by Contractor.
1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations as necessary.
2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual.
C. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a qualified professional engineer or surveyor;
establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record
existing elevations.
1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey benchmarks,
maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations.
Promptly notify Owner’s Representative if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other
damage is evident in adjacent construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials need not be new but must be in serviceable condition.
B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M).
C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328 (ASTM A 328M) or ASTM A 572 (ASTM A 572M)
D. Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of 3 inches (75 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement,
lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support
and protection system operations.
1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered.
B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,
walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without per-
mission from Owner’s Representative and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes
around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.
C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction and to permit forming
and finishing of concrete surfaces.
D. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as
excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure
excavation support and protection systems remain stable.
E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection sys-
tems.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260 - 3
3.02 SOLDIER BEAMS AND LAGGING
A. Install steel soldier piles before stating excavation. Space soldier piles at intervals indicated. Accurately
align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from a horizontal line and not
more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment.
B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as required
to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact.
C. Install wales horizontally at centers indicated and secure to soldier piles.
3.03 SHEET PILING
A. Install one-piece sheet piling and tightly interlock to form a continuous barrier. Accurately align exposed
faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from a horizontal line and not more than
1:120 out of vertical alignment. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation.
3.04 TIEBACKS
A. Tiebacks: Drill for, install, tension, and grout tiebacks into position. Test load-carrying capacity of each
tieback and replace and retest deficient tiebacks.
3.05 BRACING
A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If nec-
essary to move a brace, install new bracing before removing original brace.
1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work, unless
otherwise approved by Owner’s Representative.
2. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames.
3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until permanent con-
struction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.
3.06 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS
A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to sup-
port excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying
soils and damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities.
1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth as recommended by the
Civil Engineer below overlying construction and abandon remainder.
2. Repair or replace, as approved by Owner’s Representative, adjacent work damaged or displaced
by removing excavation support and protection systems.
END OF SECTION 02260
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Sub-base course for concrete walks and pavements.
5. Base course for concrete paving.
6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
7. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines.
8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for
buried utility structures.
9. Rock excavation.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support
sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
C. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
D. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water.
E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect.
Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions
for changes in the Work.
2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet in width and pits more than 30 feet in either
length or width.
3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions
without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by
Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
G. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of
rock material exceeding 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation
that cannot in Architect’s opinion be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following
in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when
permitted:
EARTHWORK 02300 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator;
equipped with a 42-inch- wide, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 120-hp
flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 25,000 lbf and stick-crowd force of not
less than 18,700 lbf; measured according to SAE J-1179.
2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp flywheel power
and developing a minimum of 45,000-lbf breakout force; measured according to SAE J-732.
H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of
rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that when tested by an independent geotechnical testing
agency, according to ASTM D 1586, exceeds a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches.
I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground
surface.
J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill
immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
K. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services
within buildings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Each type of plastic warning tape.
2. Drainage fabric.
3. Separation fabric.
B. Samples: For the following:
1. 30-lb samples, sealed in airtight containers, of each proposed soil material from on-site or borrow
sources.
2. 12-by-12-inch sample of drainage fabric.
3. 12-by-12-inch sample of separation fabric.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for
compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill
and backfill.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
3. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site or borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to
ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
B. Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services
according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed.
Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from
excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: As approved by the Soil’s Engineer for intended use and specifically for the required
location or purpose, reference the Geotechnical report prepared by Koechlein Consulting Engineers, Inc.
on December 2005 per ASTM D 698.
C. Foundation Wall Backfill: On site soil materials as approved by the Soil’s Engineer.
D. Over-excavation and Recommendation Zone: As specified for structural fill
E. Drainage Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
reasonably uniform size, with maximum size of 1.5 inches and not more than 5% passing a No. 200 sieve,
as acceptable to the Soils Engineer.
F. Bedding: The pipe shall be carefully bedded as shown in the bedding details. Provide Class “B” minimum
bedding for PVC sanitary sewer pipe Class “C” minimum bedding for all other pipe except for ductile
iron water pipe
1. Class B Bedding (Granular Foundation): Defined as the method of bedding in which the pipe is set
on compacted granular material supporting the lower ½ of the pipe barrel.
a. Compacted Granular Material: Shall be a well graded gravelly material meeting the
following requirements and compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density as determined
by ASTM D698
U.S. Standard Sieve
Size
Percent Weight by
passing Type I
Square Mesh Sieves
Type II
3” - 90-100
1.5” - -
0.75” - 20-90
0.375” 100 -
EARTHWORK 02300 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
#4 95-100 0-20
#16 45-80 -
#50 10-30 -
#100 2-10 -
#200 0-2 0-3-
2. Class C Bedding (Granular Foundation): Defined as the method of bedding in which the pipe is set
on compacted granular material supporting the lower quadrant of the pipe barrel using uniform
graded material as specified below
.
U.S. Standard Sieve
Size
Percent Weight by
passing Type I
Square Mesh Sieves
Type II
3” - 90-100
1.5” - -
0.75” - 20-90
0.375” 100 -
#4 95-100 0-20
#16 45-80 -
#50 10-30 -
#100 2-10 -
#200 0-2 0-3
3. Ductile Iron Pipe Bedding: Provide either well graded sand as specified below or squeegee sand as
specified below
a. Well Graded Sand
U.S. Standard Sieve
Size
Total Passing Weight
by Percent
3/8” 100
No 4 70-100
No 8 36-93
No 16 20-80
No. 30 8-65
No. 50 2-30
No. 100 1-10
No. 200 0-3
b. Well Graded Sand
U.S. Standard Sieve
Size
Total Passing Weight
by Percent
3/8” 100
No. 200 0-3
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously
inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion
protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:
EARTHWORK 02300 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Red: Electric.
2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4. Blue: Water systems.
5. Green: Sewer systems.
B. Geotextile Fabric: As shown on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement,
lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective
insulating materials as necessary.
C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-
bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades,
and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in
excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from
excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
3.3 EXPLOSIVES
A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
B. Unclassified Excavation: All excavation is to be considered “unclassified” when using heavy duty earth-
moving equipment except where rock is encountered at utility trenches (either inside or outside of
building line)
C. Classified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations classified as rock excavation.
1. Intermittent drilling or ripping performed to increase production and not necessary to permit
excavation of material encountered will classified as unclassified excavation.
D. Rock Payment lines are limited to the following:.
1. In pipe trenches, 6” below invert elevation of pipe and 2’ wider than inside perimeter of pipe but
not less than 3’ minimum trench width.
2. Assume no rock excavation is required for the work. If rock excavation is required at utility
trenches, such work will be paid in accordance with provisions relative to changes in the work and
will paid on the basis of bid unit prices.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Extend
excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for
installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by
hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and
grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures:
Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do
not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface.
3. Over excavation and Recompaction Zone: Over-excavate existing soils from all areas of the over
excavation and replacement zone as defined in subsection 2.1C, for the interior and exterior slabs-
on-grades, ramps and accessible walks adjacent to the building, to a minimum depth of 4’ below
bottom elevations of the slabs-on-grade. Moisture condition and recompact per the requirements
of this sections.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades.
3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit.
Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 12 inches on each side of pipe or conduit or as shown on drawings.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding
course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.
1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing
material to allow for bedding course.
3.7 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions
for changes in the Work.
C. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess
yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction
activities, as directed by Architect.
3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill
may be used when approved by Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect.
3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without
intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.10 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and
perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
B. Backfill Placement:
1. At areas not subject to structural loads, provide unclassified backfill around structures beyond 5’
from foundation wall and for embankments and landscape areas with top 6” being topsoil
stockpiled on site
2. For Foundation wall backfill within 5’ of the building line, use over-excavated moisture
conditioned and recompacted soil.
3. Under walks, steps and pavements beyond 5’ from the building line, use unclassified backfill or
borrow material where additional fill is required. Under walks, steps and pavements within 5’ of
building line, use over-excavated moisture conditioned and recompacted soil.
3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to
provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of
conduits.
B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings; fill with concrete
to elevation of bottom of footings.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 7
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch or bedding
material as shown on the details and required by the Owner, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe
or conduit.
1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and
along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system.
D. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
E. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed.
F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.
G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below
subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.12 FILL
A. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,
waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.13 MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to
within optimum as determined by ASTM D698 as follows:
Over-excavation/Recompaction Zone
a. Under interior slabs-on-grades
b Under exterior slab-on-grade ADA
ramp and accessible walks
immediately adjacent east and south
of the building.
+2 to +4
Upto 5’ Beyond Building under
pavements, Walks, Steps and Strutures
not included in the Over-Excavation and
Replacement Zones.
-1 to +3
Foundation Backfill: Non-Structural
Areas
-3 to +3
1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds
optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 8
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3.14 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by
heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by
hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly
along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 1557:
D. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of Standard Proctor density according to
ASTM D 698:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300
mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent.
3.15 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with
compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch to ½ inch.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot
straightedge.
3.16 DRAINAGE COURSE
A. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows:
1. Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
2. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer.
3. When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers,
with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted.
3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
EARTHWORK 02300 - 9
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to
perform field quality-control testing.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify
design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based
on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.
D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, ASTM D1557, ASTM D698, as applicable. Tests will be performed
at the following locations and frequencies:
1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least
one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three
tests.
2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet or
less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.
3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer and every 2’ above top of pipe,
at least one test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.
E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction
specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and
retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.18 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces
become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations
or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and
recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with
additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and
eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3.19 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile
or spread soil as directed by Architect.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 10
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it
off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK 02300 - 11
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 02370 - SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Temporary measures needed to control erosion and water pollution by use of berms,
dikes, darns, sediment basins and/or traps, geotextiles, stone checks, hay bales, silt
fences, surface roughing, mats and nets, aggregate, mulch, grasses, slope drains, and
other approved measures at the locations necessary to control erosion and water
pollution.
Coordinate temporary pollution controls with the permanent erosion control features
specified and with Stormwater Management Plan provided by the Owner.
B. Related Work:
1. Site Clearing: Section 02110
2. Drainage Structures, Pipes, and Fittings: Section 02430
3. Earthwork: Section 02200
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: If requested, furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing
laboratory
1. Silt Fence
2. Jute Netting
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SILT FENCE
A. Silt Fence Fabric: The fabric shall meet the following specifications:
Fabric Properties Minimum Acceptable Value Test Method
Grab Tensile Strength (lbs) 90 ASTM D1682
Elongation at Failure (%) 50 ASTM D1682
Mullen Burst Strength (PSI) 190 ASTM D3786
Puncture Strength (lbs) 40 ASTM D751 (modified)
Slurry Flow Rate (gal/min/sf) 0.3
Equivalent Opening Size 40-80 US Sieve CW-02215
Ultraviolet Radiation Stability (%) 90 ASTM-G-26
B. Fence Posts (for fabricated units): The length shall be a minimum of 36 inches long.
Wood posts will be of sound quality hardwood with a minimum cross sectional area of
3.0 square inches. Steel posts will be standard T and U section weighing not less than
1.00 per linear foot.
C. Wire Fence (for fabricated units): Wire fencing shall be a minimum 14-1/4 gage with a
maximum 6” mesh opening , or as approved.
SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL 02370 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
D. Prefabricated Units: Envirofence or approved equal may be used in lieu of the above
method providing the unit is installed per manufacturer’s instructions.
2.02 JUTE NETTING
A. Heavy-woven jute mesh of a rugged construction. Made of undyed and unbleached,
twisted jute fibers, having smolder resistant treatment. Provide in rolls 225’ by 4’ wide
containing 100 square yards weighing approximately 90 pounds.
2.03 VEHICLE TRACKING GRAVEL
A. Provide gravel (2” crushed screened rock) suitable for controlling dirt and debris from
leaving the site at locations as shown on the drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WATER BARS/INTERCEPTOR TRENCHES
Construct ditch in accordance with drawings. Flow line of water bar not steeper than 1%.
Discharge on existing vegetated slope alternately to avoid erosion.
3.02 STRAW BALE SEDIMENT BARRIER
Use straw bale barriers at storm drain inlets, across minor swales and ditches, and other
applications where barrier is of temporary nature. Bind straw bales with nylon or bailing wire, not
twine. Anchor bales to ground with two posts per bale.
3.03 JUTE NETTING
Start jute roll at top of slope or channel and unroll down grade. Lay second strip parallel to first
and allow 2” overlap. Bury top end of roll in trench, minimum 4” deep. Anchor jute roll to earth
surface with stakes of 8 gauge steel, 8” long, approximately 12” apart. Staple outside edges 4’ to
10’ apart and along overlap edges. Overlap end rolls by 4” and anchor securely.
3.04 VEHICLE TRACKING GRAVEL
Install 2” crushed screened rock to not less than 6” in depth over the area indicated for access to
the site with length and width as required, length not less than 50 feet. Filter cloth shall be placed
over the entire area prior to placement of stone.
3.05 CHECK DAMS
Install bottom of check dam at least 6” below depth of newly graded channel. Extend to 6” above
maximum design water depth. Install materials in accordance with drawings.
3.06 FILTER BERMS/SEDIMENT POND
Field construct berms as directed by Engineer. Place washed 1” to 1-1/2” aggregate with 2’ top
and 3:1 side slopes extending to bottom of channel. Berm to retain sediments by retarding and
filtering runoff. Place sand on face of berm for future replacement of filter material. Construct in
accordance with drawings.
3.07 SILT FENCE
Install silt fence in accordance with drawings.
SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL 02370 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3.08 MAINTENANCE
Maintain, repair, and supplement all slope protection and erosion control measures as stated in all
applicable permits and as directed by the Owner.
END SECTION 02370
SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL 02370 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 02510 - WATER DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and specialties outside the building for the following:
1. Water services.
2. Fire-service mains.
3. Combined water service and fire-service mains.
4. Aboveground water piping for applications other than water-service piping.
B. Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation.
C. Related Sections
1. Division 2 Section “Earthwork.”
2. Division 2 Section “Concrete Paving.”
3. Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete.”
4. Division 15 Section “Plumbing Systems.”
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials and methods used should meet or exceed the requirements of the Eagle River Water and
Sanitation District and the Town of Vail, Colorado. In case of conflict, the more restrictive
requirements shall govern.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Fire-Service Main: Exterior fire-suppression-water piping.
B. Fire-Suppression-Water Piping: Interior fire-suppression-water piping.
C. Water-Distribution Piping: Interior domestic-water piping.
D. Water Service: Exterior domestic-water piping.
E. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. PA: Polyamide (nylon) plastic.
2. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
3. PEX: Crosslinked polyethylene plastic.
4. PP: Polypropylene plastic.
5. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
6. RTRF: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) fittings.
7. RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) pipe.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Piping specialties.
B. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same area.
Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations.
C. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor. Submit pressure and leakage reports, from
chlorination and bacteriologic acceptance tests
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance
manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the
following:
1. Valves.
2. Backflow preventers.
3. Protective enclosures.
4. Drinking fountains.
E. Record drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed water system piping and
production in accordance w/ Division 1 requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer’s qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with
water works similar to that required for project.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of piping and
specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains
and backflow prevention.
2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping,
including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.
3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service piping,
including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.
D. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
E. Comply with FM's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-
main products.
F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve
supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.
G. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic water.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, according to the following:
WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, according to the following:
1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.
2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-point
temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is
necessary.
C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid
damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling
to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of
floor when storing inside.
F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.
G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate connection to water main with Eagle River Water and Sanitation District.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers
specified.
a. American Cast iron Pipe
b. Griffen Pipe Products Company
c. Pacific States
d. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Co.
WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.
2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, working pressure 150psi, Class 50, minimum wall
thickness of 0.25, cement mortar lining, seal casted AWWA C104,with push-on-joint, bell- and plain-
spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or
AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
B. Ductile-Iron Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and
mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include two gasketed ball-joint
sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset and expansion
indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
C. Ductile-Iron or Cast-iron Deflection Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron or cast-iron fitting complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel
bolts. All fittings cement mortar lined, AWWA C104. Bituminous outside coating one mil thick. Rating
of 250psi with mechanical or push joint.
2.4 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K, water tube, annealed temper, with flared connections.
1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-
joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
B. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required
to match piping.
C. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-
metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
2.5 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for commonly used joining materials.
B. Transition Couplings:
1. Underground Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AWWA C219, metal, sleeve-type coupling
same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
2. Aboveground Piping: Pipe fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends
compatible with, piping to be joined.
C. Soldering Flux: ASTM B 813, water-flushable type.
D. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, lead-free type with 0.20 percent maximum lead content.
WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Flexible Connectors:
1. Nonferrous-Metal Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid; with copper-tube,
pressure-type, solder-joint ends or bronze flanged ends brazed to hose.
2. Ferrous Piping: Stainless-steel hose covered with stainless-steel wire braid; with ASME B1.20.1,
threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B16.5, steel pipe flanges welded to hose.
2.7 CORROSION-PROTECTION ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING
A. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: AWWA C105, PE film, 0.008-inch minimum thickness,
tube.
2.8 HOSE-CONNECTION, BACKFLOW-PREVENTION DEVICES
A. General: ASSE standard, nonremovable-type, backflow-prevention devices with ASME B1.20.7, garden-
hose threads on outlet.
B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with manual drain feature. Units
attached to rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.
C. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1052, suitable for at least 3-gpm flow and applications
with up to 10-foot head of water back pressure. Include two check valves and intermediate atmospheric
vent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following
applications.
B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may
be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Do not use flanges, unions, or keyed couplings for underground piping.
D. Flanges, unions, keyed couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on
aboveground piping and piping in vaults.
E. Underground Water-Service Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range:
1. NPS 3/4 to NPS 2: Soft copper tube, Type K; wrought-copper fittings; and soldered joints.
2. NPS 5 and NPS 6): Use NPS 6 (DN 150) ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-on-
joint fittings; and gasketed joints.
WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. See Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for basic piping joint construction.
B. Make pipe joints according to the following:
1. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.
2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194.
3. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD,
and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for joining
piping of dissimilar metals.
3.4 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. See Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for piping-system common requirements.
3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water
main.
B. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.
1. Install PE corrosion-protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
C. Install copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
D. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 54 inches.
E. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building water piping systems at
outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.
1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building water piping systems are installed.
Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections
to building water piping systems when those systems are installed.
F. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use
restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.
G. Anchor service-entry piping to building wall.
H. See Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for potable-water piping inside the building.
I. See Division 13 Sections for fire-suppression water piping inside the building.
J. Install trap below frost line on drain outlet of each drinking fountain.
3.6 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION
A. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include
anchorages for the following piping systems:
WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
B. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous
anchorage devices.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 2 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping and specialties. Pothole ahead of work to Electrician exact horizontal and vertical
location of existing utilities at planned connections points. Notify Engineer of conflicts.
B. Connect water-distribution piping to existing water service and new fire service line per Eagle River
Water and Sanitation District requirements.
C. Connect water-distribution piping to interior domestic-water and fire-suppression piping.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have hardened
sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only
potable water.
B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours.
1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test
pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more
hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints
with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.
C. Prepare reports of testing activities.
3.9 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground
water-service piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. See Division 2 Section
"Earthwork" for underground warning tapes.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:
1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before use.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method
is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for
flushing of fire service line piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water
does not appear at points of outlet.
WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 7
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method
is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or as
described below:
a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of
chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution
containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in
water coming from system.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure
if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.
B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C. After completing drinking fountain installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,
and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 02510
WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 8
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530 - 1
SECTION 02530 - SANITARY SEWERAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sanitary sewerage outside the building.
B. Related Sections
1. Division 2 Section “Excavation Support and Protection.”
2. Division 2 Section “Earthwork.”
3. Division 2 Section “Concrete Paving.”
4. Division 15 Section “Plumbing Systems.”
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer rubber.
B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure. Materials
and methods used should meet or exceed the requirements of the Eagle River Water and Sanitation
District and the Town of Vail, Colorado. In case of conflict, the more restrictive requirements shall
govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Sewer System materials and products
B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout submit record drawings of installed sanitary sewer piping and
products, in accordance with Division 1 requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store plastic structures, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.
B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written rigging
instructions.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530 - 2
A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations.
Posthole ahead of planned crossing and connections to determine exact horizontal and vertical location of
existing utilities. Notify Engineer of conflict.
B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned.
C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials.
2.2
PIPES AND FITTINGS.
A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: According to the following:
1. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN375) and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for
gasketed joints.
a.
Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
2.3 MANHOLES
A. Normal-Traffic Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced
concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for rubber gasketed joints.
1. Diameter: 48 inches) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required
to prevent flotation.
3. Base Section: 8-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 5-inch minimum thickness for walls
and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor.
4. Riser Sections: 5-inch minimum thickness and lengths to provide depth indicated.
5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top
of cone of size that matches grade rings.
6. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber.
7. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch total thickness, that
match 24-inch- diameter frame and cover.
8. Steps: ASTM C 478, individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches
deep.
9. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base
section.
B. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile-iron castings designed for heavy-
duty service. Include 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch minimum width flange, and 26-inch-
(660-mm-) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering "SANITARY SEWER" cast into
cover.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530 - 3
2.4 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4. Water: Potable.
B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials
ratio.
1. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed steel.
C. Structure Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix,
4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and
benches in manholes.
1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical
sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and
slope.
a. Invert Slope: minimum 2 percent through manhole.
2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.
a. Slope: 4 percent.
D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water-
cementitious materials ratio.
1. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 400), deformed steel.
2.5 PROTECTIVE COATINGS
A. Description: One- or two-coat, coal-tar epoxy; 15-mil minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated;
factory or field applied to the following surfaces:
1. Concrete Manholes: On interior surface.
2. Concrete Manholes: On exterior surface.
3. Concrete Manholes: On exterior and interior surfaces.
4. Manhole Frames and Covers: On entire surfaces.
5. Manhole Frames and Covers: On surfaces that will be exposed to sewer gases.
2.6 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Gray-Iron Backwater Valves: ASME A112.14.1, gray-iron body and bolted cover, with bronze seat.
1. Horizontal Type: With swing check valve and hub-and-spigot ends.
2. Combination Horizontal and Manual Gate-Valve Type: With swing check valve, integral gate
valve, and hub-and-spigot ends.
3. Terminal Type: With bronze seat, swing check valve, and hub inlet.
B. PVC Backwater Valves: Similar to ASME A112.14.1, horizontal type; with PVC body, PVC removable
cover, and PVC swing check valve.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530 - 4
2.7 CLEANOUTS
A. Provide as indicated, pipe extension to grade with ferrule and countersunk cleanout plug. Provide round
cast-iron access frame and cover with heavy duty secured scoriated cover with lifting device.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installing
green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures.
1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.
3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. General: Include watertight joints.
B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use
pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to applications indicated.
C. Gravity-Flow Piping: Use the following:
1. NPS 4 and NPS 6: PVC sewer pipe and fittings gaskets and gasketed joints.
2. NPS 8 and NPS 10: PVC sewer pipe and fittings gaskets and gasketed joints.
3.4 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLING AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Special Pipe Couplings: Use where required to join piping and no other appropriate method is specified.
Do not use instead of specified joining methods.
1. Use the following pipe couplings for nonpressure applications:
a. Sleeve type to join piping, of same size, or with small difference in OD.
b. Increaser/reducer-pattern, sleeve type to join piping of different sizes.
3.5 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take
design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of
invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according
to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is completed.
C. Use manholes for changes in direction, unless cleanouts are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530 - 5
D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings
are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. Install gravity-flow piping, of sizes and in locations indicated.
1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, for 4” diameter
service line and minimum of 1.0% for 6” diameter service line. Terminate 5’ from building line
shown on drawings. Place 2x4 wood marker painted green, at terminus extending form sewer
invert to 2’ above finishing grade. Place water tight plug in end of each service line.
2. Install piping with 54-inch (1372-mm) minimum cover.
3.6 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated.
B. Refer to Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for basic piping joint construction and installation.
C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: As follows:
1. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321.
2. Join profile sewer pipe fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Install according to ASTM D 2321.
3.7 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
B. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.
C. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.
D. Install precast concrete manhole sections with gaskets according to ASTM C 891.
3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318 and ACI 350R.
3.9 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Install piping so cleanouts
open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, as shown on drawings deep. Set
with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade.
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM 02530 - 6
3.10 CLOSING ABANDONED SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS
A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place.
Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of
abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:
1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch- (200-mm-) thick, brick masonry bulkheads.
2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods
suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.
3. Fill all abandoned piping with slurry mixture designed to fill holes and breaks. “Flow-fill”
or approved equal.
B. Abandoned Structures: Excavate around structure as required and use one procedure below:
1. Remove structure and close open ends of remaining piping.
2. Remove top of structure down to at least 36 inches (1000 mm) below final grade. Fill to within 12
inches (300 mm) of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete.
3. Backfill to grade according to Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab
or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed.
1. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.
2. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect
after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size
not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within
allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
5. Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C 969 (ASTM C 969M).
6. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
END OF SECTION 02530
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 02552 - GROUND-LOOP, HEAT-PUMP PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping for horizontal, direct-buried, ground-loop, heat-pump systems that operate
between 23 and 104 deg F (minus 5 and plus 40 deg C).
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ground-Loop, Heat-Pump Piping: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Pipe and fittings.
2. Joining method and equipment.
3. Propylene glycol solution.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2239, SIDR Numbers 5.3, 7, 9, or 11.5; with PE compound number required to
achieve required system working pressure.
1. Molded PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683 or ASTM D 3261, PE resin, socket- or butt-fusion type, made
to match PE pipe dimensions and class.
B. U-Bend Assembly: Factory fabricated with embossed depth stamp every 24 inches (600 mm) from U-
bend.
2.2 ANTIFREEZE SOLUTION
A. Propylene Glycol: Minimum 99 percent propylene glycol with corrosion inhibitors and environmental
stabilizer additives to be mixed with water to protect the piping circuit and connected equipment from
physical damage from freezing or corrosion.
B. Quantity: Sufficient solution for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one year from
date of Substantial Completion.
GROUND-LOOP, HEAT-PUMP PIPING 02552 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C. Dilution Water: Chloride content shall be less than 25 ppm, sulfate less than 25 ppm, and hardness less
than 100 ppm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, warning tape, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.2 HORIZONTAL PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Separate trenches by 10 feet (3 m) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Remove rocks in trenches that
could contact pipe.
B. Backfill to 24 inches (600 mm) above pipe with mud developed from excavated rock-free soil or with
sand, pea gravel, or fly ash. Backfill from slurry level to grade with excavated soil, compacting as
specified for pipe burial in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
C. Install PE piping in trenches according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM F 645.
1. Clean PE pipe and fittings and make heat-fusion joints according to ASTM D 2657. Minimize
number of joints.
D. Purge, flush, and pressure test piping before backfilling trenches.
E. Install continuous detectable warning tape for underground piping. Locate tape a minimum of 24 inches
(600 mm) below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in
Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
F. Common piping installation requirements are specified in Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic
Materials and Methods."
3.3 ANTIFREEZE SOLUTION FILL
A. Fill system with required quantity of propylene glycol and water to provide minus 30 deg F (minus 23
deg C) freezing temperature.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Piping Tests: Fill piping 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize piping. Use potable
water only.
B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times the pipe working-pressure rating.
GROUND-LOOP, HEAT-PUMP PIPING 02552 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Increase pressure in 50-psig (345-kPa) increments and inspect each joint between increments.
Hold at test pressure for 30 minutes. Slowly increase to next test pressure increment and hold for
30 minutes. After testing at maximum test pressure, reduce pressure to 30 psig (207 kPa). Hold
for 90 minutes, and measure pressure at 30-minute intervals. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks
exist.
C. Prepare reports of testing activity.
END OF SECTION 02552
GROUND-LOOP, HEAT-PUMP PIPING 02552 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 02620 - SUBDRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes subdrainage systems for the following:
1. Foundations.
2. Underslab areas.
3. Retaining walls.
4. Landscaped areas.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene.
B. HDPE: High-density polyethylene.
C. PE: Polyethylene.
D. PP: Polypropylene.
E. PS: Polystyrene.
F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For drainage conduit, drainage panels, and geotextile fabrics.
1. Perforated pipe.
2. Solid pipe.
3. Pipe with open joints.
4. Drainage conduits.
5. Drainage panels.
6. Geotextile fabrics.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Drainage panel materials and installation shall be compatible with dampproofing and waterproofing of
walls below grade.
SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers
specified.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to various application articles in Part 3 for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.
2.3 UNDERSLAB HEADERS
A. ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2751.
1. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235.
2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
B. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra-Heavy classes, hub-and-spigot ends,
gray, for gasketed joints.
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber, of thickness matching class of pipe.
C. PE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway, for
coupled joints.
1. Couplings: AASHTO M 252, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings.
D. PE Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294, Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway, for coupled joints.
1. Couplings: AASHTO M 294, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings.
E. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, bell-and-spigot ends, for gasketed joints.
1. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
2.4 DRAINAGE PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Perforated, PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 405, corrugated, for coupled joints.
1. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type.
B. Perforated, PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 667, corrugated, for coupled joints.
1. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type.
C. Perforated, PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729, bell-and-spigot ends, for loose joints.
SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
D. Perforated, Clay Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 700, Standard-Strength and Extra-Strength classes,
unglazed, socket-and-spigot ends, for closed joints.
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 425, rubber.
E. Perforated, Concrete Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 444/C 444M, Type 1, and applicable requirements of
ASTM C 14/C 14M, Class 2, socket-and-spigot fittings.
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 443/C 443M, rubber.
F. Clay Drain Tile: ASTM C 4; Standard, Extra-Quality, and Heavy-Duty classes, for open joints.
G. Concrete Drain Tile: ASTM C 412/C 412M; Standard-Quality; Extra-Quality; and Heavy-Duty, Extra-
Quality classes, for open joints.
H. Open-Joint Screening: ASTM D 226, Type I, asphalt-saturated roofing felt.
I. Open-Joint Screening: ASTM D 227, coal-tar-saturated roofing felt.
J. Open-Joint Screening: Copper-mesh screening.
K. Open-Joint Screening: Corrosion-resistant metal clips made for this application.
L. Open-Joint Screening: Woven geotextile filter fabric, for a minimum total weight of 3 oz./sq. yd. (0.10
kg/sq. m).
2.5 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Description: ASTM C 1173. Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly fabricated to match
outside diameters of pipes to be joined.
2.6 CLEANOUTS
A. Cast-Iron Pipe: ASME A112.36.2M; with round-flanged, cast-iron housing; and secured, scoriated,
Medium-Duty Loading class, cast-iron cover. Include cast-iron ferrule and countersunk, brass cleanout
plug.
B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 3034, PVC cleanout threaded plug and threaded pipe hub.
2.7 DRAINAGE CONDUIT
A. Pipe and Fittings: Perforated and corrugated, molded from HDPE complying with ASTM D 3350, with
fittings and geotextile filter fabric jacket.
1. Size: 12 inches (305 mm) high by approximately 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick with a minimum flow
rate of 30 gpm per foot (62 L/s per 1000 mm).
2. Size: 18 inches (457 mm) high by approximately 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick with a minimum flow
rate of 45 gpm per foot (93 L/s per 1000 mm) when tested according to ASTM D 4716.
3. Fittings: HDPE with combination NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150) outlet connection.
4. Couplings: Corrugated HDPE band.
SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
B. Pipe and Fittings: Perforated, molded from HDPE complying with ASTM D 1248 into shape of
interconnected corrugated pipes, with fittings and geotextile filter fabric jacket.
1. Size: 6 inches (152 mm) high by approximately 1-1/4 inches (31 mm) thick with a flow rate of 15
gpm per foot (3.1 L/s per 1000 mm) when tested according to ASTM D 4716.
2. Size: 12 inches (305 mm) high by approximately 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) thick with a flow rate of
30 gpm per foot (6.2 L/s per 1000 mm) when tested according to ASTM D 4716.
3. Size: 18 inches (457 mm) high by approximately 3-3/4 inches (95 mm) thick with a flow rate of
45 gpm per foot (9.3 L/s per 1000 mm) when tested according to ASTM D 4716.
4. Fittings: HDPE with combination NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150) outlet connection.
5. Couplings: HDPE.
C. Pipe and Fittings: Perforated, smooth PVC complying with ASTM D 4216 and ASTM D 2729.
1. Size: 8 inches (203 mm) high by approximately 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) thick with a minimum flow
rate equal to NPS 4 (DN 100) pipe.
2. Fittings: PVC with NPS 4 (DN 100) outlet connection.
3. Couplings: PVC.
2.8 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Wick Drain Corporation.
2. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Construction Products Div.
3. GREENSTREAK/Western Textile Products.
4. Ling Industrial Fabrics, Inc.
5. TC Mirafi.
B. Molded-sheet drainage panels are specified in various Division 7 waterproofing Sections.
C. Description: Prefabricated, composite panels, 36 to 60 inches (915 to 1525 mm) wide, and manufactured
with geotextile facing laminated to molded-plastic drainage core.
D. Drainage Core: Three-dimensional, nonbiodegradable, molded PP or PS.
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 15,000 lbf/sq. ft. (718 kPa)] [18,000 lbf/sq. ft. (862 kPa) when
tested according to ASTM D 1621.
2. Minimum Flow Rate: 7 gpm per foot (87 L/min. per m) at hydraulic gradient of 0.1 and
compressive stress of 25 psig (172 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 4716.
E. Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage, made from
polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with the following
properties determined according to AASHTO M 288:
1. Survivability: Class 2.
2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve, maximum.
3. Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum.
F. Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for subsurface drainage, made from polyolefins or
polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with the following properties determined
according to AASHTO M 288:
SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Survivability: Class 2.
2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve, maximum.
3. Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum.
G. Film Backing: Polymeric film bonded to drainage core surface.
2.9 FABRIC DRAINAGE PANELS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Akzo Nobel Geosynthetics Co.
2. GSE Lining Technology, Inc.
3. JDR Enterprises, Inc.
4. Strata Systems, Inc.
5. Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc.
B. Description: Prefabricated, composite drainage panels, made with drainage core and filter fabric, for use
as part of foundation, and retaining-wall drainage system.
C. Drainage Core: Open-construction, resilient, 0.8-inch- (20-mm-) thick, nylon-filament mesh.
1. Minimum Flow Rate: 2.4 gpm per foot (30 L/min. per m) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and normal
pressure of 3600 psig (172 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 4716.
D. Drainage Core: 3-dimensional, PE strand, 0.25-inch- (6.3-mm-) thick, nonwoven net.
1. Minimum Flow Rate: 5 gpm per foot (62 L/min. per m) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and normal
pressure of 3600 psig (172 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 4716.
E. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile filter fabric of PP or polyester fibers, or combination of both. Flow
rates range from 120 to 200 gpm per sq. ft. (81 to 136 L/s per sq. m) when tested according to
ASTM D 4491.
2.10 INSULATION DRAINAGE PANELS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Diversifoam Products.
2. Dow Chemical Company (The).
3. Owens Corning.
4. Tenneco Building Products.
C. Insulation drainage panels are specified in various Division 7 waterproofing Sections.
D. Description: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578; fabricated with
shiplap or tongue-and-groove edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels, faced with
manufacturer's standard, nonwoven geotextile filter fabric.
SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Type IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m) minimum density and 25-psig (173-kPa) minimum
compressive strength.
2.11 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Impervious Fill: Clay, gravel, and sand mixture.
B. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel,
ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate, Size No. 57, with 100 percent passing 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and
not more than 5 percent passing No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
2.12 ROOFING FELTS
A. ASTM D 226, Type I, asphalt-saturated roofing felt.
B. ASTM D 227, coal-tar-saturated roofing felt.
2.13 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS
A. Woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric of PP or polyester fibers, or combination of both. Flow rates
range from 110 to 330 gpm per sq. ft. (4480 to 13 440 L/min. per sq. m) when tested according to
ASTM D 4491. Available styles are flat and sock.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be installed.
B. If subdrainage is required for landscaping, locate and mark existing utilities, underground structures, and
aboveground obstructions before beginning installation and avoid disruption and damage of services.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.3 SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. NPS 4 (DN 100) Piping:
1. Perforated, PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
2. Perforated, PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell-and-spigot joints.
3. Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra-Strength class; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
4. Clay drain tile, Extra-Quality class; and open joints.
5. Concrete drain tile, Extra-Quality class; and open joints.
SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
B. NPS 6 (DN 150) Piping:
1. Perforated, PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
2. Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra-Strength class; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
3. Clay drain tile, Extra-Quality class; and open joints.
4. Concrete drain tile, Extra-Quality class; and open joints.
C. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250) Piping:
1. Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra-Strength class; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Clay drain tile, Extra-Quality class; and open joints.
3. Concrete drain tile, Extra-Quality class; and open joints.
3.4 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. NPS 4 (DN 100) Piping:
1. Perforated, PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
2. Perforated, PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell-and-spigot joints.
3. Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra-Strength class; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
4. Perforated, concrete pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.
B. NPS 6 (DN 150) Piping:
1. Perforated, PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
2. Perforated, PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell-and-spigot joints.
3. Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra-Strength class; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
4. Perforated, concrete pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.
C. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250) Piping:
1. Perforated, clay pipe and fittings, Extra-Strength class; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Perforated, concrete pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.
3.5 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE SYSTEM HEADER APPLICATIONS
A. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150) Piping:
1. ABS pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
2. Cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, Service class; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
3. PE drainage tubing and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
4. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
B. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250) Piping:
1. ABS pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
2. Cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, Service class; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
3. PE drainage tubing and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
4. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
C. NPS 12 (DN 300) Piping:
1. ABS pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 7
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2. Cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, Service class; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
3. PE drainage tubing and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
4. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
D. NPS 15 (DN 375) Piping:
1. Cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, Service class; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. PE drainage tubing and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
3. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installation
of green warning tapes directly over piping.
1. Install warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.
2. Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.
3.7 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
A. Bottom Impervious Fill: Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after
concrete footings have been cured and forms removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions
indicated, but not less than 6 inches (150 mm) deep and 12 inches (300 mm) wide.
B. Drainage Fill: Place supporting layer of drainage fill over compacted subgrade to compacted depth of not
less than 4 inches (100 mm). After installing drainage piping, add drainage fill to width of at least 6
inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests. After satisfactory testing,
cover piping to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from footing and above top of pipe to
within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. Place drainage fill in layers not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm)
in loose depth; compact each layer placed.
1. Before installing drainage fill, lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench
sides. After installing drainage fill, wrap top of drainage fill with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.
2. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections
with electrical tape.
3. After installing drainage fill, place one layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of
drainage fill, overlapping edges at least 4 inches (100 mm).
C. Install vertical drainage panel as follows:
1. Coordinate placement with other drainage materials.
2. Lay perforated, PE or PVC drainage pipe at base of footing as described elsewhere in this
Specification. Do not install aggregate.
3. Mark horizontal calk line on wall at a point 6 inches (150 mm) less than panel width above footing
bottom. Before marking wall, subtract footing width.
4. Separate 4 inches (100 mm) of fabric at beginning of roll and cut away 4 inches (100 mm) of core.
Wrap fabric around end of remaining core.
5. Wrap bottom of panel around drainage pipe.
6. Attach panel to wall at horizontal mark and at beginning of pipe. Place core side of panel against
wall. Use concrete nails with washers through product cylinders to attach panel to wall. Place
nails from 2 to 6 inches (50 to 150 mm) below top of panel, approximately 48 inches (1200 mm)
apart. Some manufacturers use construction adhesives, metal stick pins, or double-sided tape. Do
not penetrate waterproofing. Before using adhesives, discuss with waterproofing manufacturer.
SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 8
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
7. If another panel is required on the same row, cut away 4 inches (100 mm) of installed panel core
and wrap fabric over new panel.
8. If additional rows of panel are required, overlap lower panel with 4 inches (100 mm) of fabric.
9. Cut panel as necessary to keep top 12 inches (300 mm) below finish grade.
10. For inside corners, bend panel. For outside corners, cut core to provide 3 inches (75 mm) for
overlap.
11. Do not use drainage panels as protection over waterproof membrane, unless otherwise approved
by waterproofing membrane manufacturer.
D. Fill to Grade: Place native fill material over compacted drainage fill. Place material in loose-depth layers
not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish elevations and slope
away from building.
3.8 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
A. Excavate for underslab drainage system after subgrade material has been compacted, but before drainage
fill has been placed. Include horizontal distance of at least 6 inches (150 mm) between drainage pipe and
trench walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope and compact to firm, solid bed for
drainage system.
B. Drainage Fill: Place supporting layer of drainage fill over compacted subgrade to compacted depth of not
less than 4 inches (100 mm). After installing drainage piping, add drainage fill to top of pipe to perform
tests. After satisfactory testing, cover piping with drainage fill to elevation of bottom of slab and compact
drainage material.
1. Before installing drainage fill, lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench
sides. After installing drainage fill, wrap top of drainage fill with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.
2. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections
with electrical tape.
C. Install horizontal drainage panels as follows:
1. Coordinate placement with other drainage materials.
2. Lay perforated, PE or PVC drainage pipe at inside edge of footings.
3. Place drainage panel over drainage pipe with core side up. Peel back fabric and wrap fabric
around pipe. Locate top of core at bottom elevation of floor slab.
4. Butt additional panels against other installed panels. If panels have plastic flanges, overlap
installed panel with flange.
3.9 RETAINING-WALL DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
A. Drainage Fill: Place supporting layer of drainage fill over compacted subgrade to compacted depth of not
less than 4 inches (100 mm). After installing drainage piping, add drainage fill to width of at least 6
inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests. After satisfactory testing,
cover piping to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from footing and above top of pipe to
within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. Place drainage fill in layers not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm)
in loose depth; compact each layer placed.
1. Before installing drainage fill, lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench
sides. After installing drainage fill, wrap top of drainage fill with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.
2. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections
with electrical tape.
SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 9
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3. After installing drainage fill, place one layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of
drainage fill, overlapping edges at least 4 inches (100 mm).
B. Install vertical drainage panels as follows:
1. Coordinate placement with other drainage materials.
2. Lay perforated, PE or PVC drainage pipe at base of footing as described elsewhere in this
Specification. Do not install aggregate.
3. If weep holes are used in lieu of drainage pipe, cut 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter holes on core side
at weep-hole locations. Do not cut fabric.
4. Mark horizontal calk line on wall at a point 6 inches (150 mm) less than panel width above footing
bottom. Before marking wall, subtract footing width.
5. Separate 4 inches (100 mm) of fabric at beginning of roll and cut away 4 inches (100 mm) of core.
Wrap fabric around end of remaining core.
6. Wrap bottom of panel around drainage pipe.
7. Attach panel to wall at horizontal mark and at beginning of wall corner. Place core side of panel
against wall. Use concrete nails with washers through product. Use nails from 2 to 6 inches (50
to 150 mm) below top of panel, approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) apart. Do not penetrate
waterproofing. Before using adhesives, discuss with waterproofing manufacturer.
8. If another panel is required on the same row, cut away 4 inches (100 mm) of installed panel core
and wrap fabric over new panel.
9. If additional rows of panel are required, overlap lower panel with 4 inches (100 mm) of fabric.
10. Cut panel as necessary to keep top 12 inches (300 mm) below finish grade.
11. For inside corners, bend panel. For outside corners, cut core to provide 3 inches (75 mm) for
overlap.
12. Do not use drainage panels as protection over waterproof membrane, unless otherwise approved
by waterproofing membrane manufacturer.
C. Fill to Grade: Place native fill material over compacted drainage fill. Place material in loose-depth layers
not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish grade.
3.10 LANDSCAPING DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
A. Install drainage pipe with a horizontal distance of at least 6 inches (150 mm) between pipe and trench
walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage
system.
B. Drainage Fill: Place supporting layer of drainage fill over trench bottom to compacted depth of not less
than 4 inches (100 mm). After installing drainage piping, add drainage fill to top of pipe to perform tests.
After satisfactory testing, cover piping to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. Place drainage fill
in layers not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) in loose depth; compact each layer placed.
1. After installing drainage fill, place one layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of
drainage fill, overlapping edges at least 4 inches (100 mm).
2. Before installing drainage fill, lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench
sides. After installing drainage fill, wrap top of drainage fill with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.
3. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections
with electrical tape.
C. Drainage Conduit: Provide trench width to allow installation of drainage conduit. Grade bottom of
trench excavations to required slope and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system.
D. Fill to Grade: Place native fill material over drainage [fill] [conduit]. Place material in loose-depth layers
not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish grade.
SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 10
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3.11 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken
continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and
couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated.
1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of
0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2. Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of
0.5 percent.
3. Retaining-Wall Subdrainage: When water discharges at end of wall into stormwater piping
system, install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and
with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise indicated. However, when water
discharges through wall weep holes, pipe may be installed with a minimum slope of zero percent.
4. Landscaping Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope
of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
5. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down.
6. Lay open-joint pipe spaced as indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, with 1/4-inch (6-mm)
space between ends. Cover top two-thirds of joint opening with open-joint screening material and
tie with corrosion-resistant wire.
7. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing upslope and
with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell.
B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being
connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.
C. Install PE piping according to ASTM D 2321.
D. Install PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.
E. Install clay piping according to ASTM C 12 and NCPI's "Clay Pipe Engineering Manual."
F. Install concrete piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Handbook."
3.12 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: Hub and spigot, with rubber compression gaskets according to CISPI's
"Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook." Use gaskets that match class of pipe and fittings.
B. Join PE pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for soiltight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard
Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties."
C. Join perforated, PE pipe and fittings with couplings for soiltight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard
Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties"; or according to
ASTM D 2321.
D. Join PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3034 with elastomeric seal gaskets according to
ASTM D 2321.
E. Join perforated, PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2729, with loose, bell-and-spigot joints.
F. Join perforated, clay pipe and fittings with gaskets according to ASTM C 425.
G. Lay clay pipe and fittings with open joints and open-joint screening material.
SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 11
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
H. Join perforated, concrete pipe and fittings with gaskets according to ASTM C 443/C 443M.
I. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special couplings
made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both pipe materials and
dimensions.
3.13 FOUNDATION, RETAINING-WALL AND LANDSCAPING SUBDRAINAGE CLEANOUT
INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts from subdrainage piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at
changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping.
B. In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for subdrainage piping
branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout plug. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place
concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) in depth. Set top of cleanout plug flush
with grade. Cast-iron pipe may also be used for cleanouts in nonvehicular-traffic areas.
C. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) PVC pipe and fittings for subdrainage piping branch
fittings and riser extensions to cleanout plug. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete
anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches (300 by 300 by 100 mm) in depth. Set top of cleanout plug 1 inch (25 mm)
above grade.
3.14 UNDERSLAB SUBDRAINAGE CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from subdrainage piping to top of slab. Locate cleanouts at
beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow
in piping.
B. Use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for subdrainage piping branch fittings and riser
extensions to cleanout plug flush with top of slab.
3.15 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to solid building storm drainage system.
C. Where required, connect low elevations of foundation subdrainage to stormwater sump pumps.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: After installing drainage fill to top of pipe, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow
before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are
satisfactory.
SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 12
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3.17 CLEANING
A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses.
Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of
uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 02620
SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 13
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 02630 - STORM DRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes storm drainage outside the building.
B. Related Sections: Division 2 Section "Subdrainage" for foundation drains connecting to storm drainage.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. HDPE: High Density Polyethylene plastic.
B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure.
B. Materials used should meet or exceed the requirements of the Town of Vail, Colorado. In case of
conflict, these requirements shall govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Polymer-concrete, channel drainage systems.
2. Stormwater disposal systems.
B. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed storm drainage system piping
and products, in accordance with requirements of Division 1
C. Design Mix Reports and Calculations: For each class of cast-in-place concrete.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store plastic structures, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.
B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written rigging
instructions.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations.
B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned. Pothole ahead of installation to
determine exact horizontal and vertical location of existing utilities at planned crossings. Notify Engineer
of conflicts.
C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Polymer-Concrete, Channel Drainage Systems:
a. ABT, Inc.
b. ACO Polymer Products, Inc.
2. NyloPlant Area Drains: As Shown on plan
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials.
2.3 PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Corrugated HDPE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S, with smooth waterway for
coupling joints, 6” diameter
1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that
mates with tube and fittings to form silttight joints.
B. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints,
12” diameter.
1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that
mates with pipe and fittings to form silttight joints.
C. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76, Class III and V, for gasketed joints.
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber.
2.4 MANHOLES
A. Normal-Traffic Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced
concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for rubber gasketed joints.
STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required
to prevent flotation.
3. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 5-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness
for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor.
4. Riser Sections: 5-inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated.
5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top
of cone of size that matches grade rings.
6. Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber.
7. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch total thickness, that
match 24-inch- diameter frame and cover.
8. Steps: Fiberglass, individual steps or ladder. Include width that allows worker to place both feet
on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor into base, riser, and
top section sidewalls with steps at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps for manholes less than 60
inches deep.
9. Steps: ASTM C 478, individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches
deep.
10. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base
section.
2.5 CATCH BASINS
A. Normal-Traffic, Catch Basins: as shown on drawings.
B. Frames and Grates: as shown on drawings
2.6 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4. Water: Potable.
B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious ratio.
1. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed steel.
C. Structure Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix,
4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious ratio.
1. Include channels and benches in manholes.
a. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of
vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth,
uniform radius and slope.
1) Invert Slope: 2 percent through manhole.
b. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.
1) Slope: 4 percent.
D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with 0.58
maximum water-cementitious ratio.
STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed steel.
2.7 POLYMER-CONCRETE, CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. General: Modular system of precast, polymer-concrete channel sections, grates, and appurtenances;
designed so grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or rattling. Include number of units required
to form total lengths indicated.
B. Sloped-Invert, Polymer-Concrete Systems: as shown on drawings:
1. Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 4-inch inside
width and deep, rounded bottom, with built-in invert slope of 0.6 percent and with outlets in
number, sizes, and locations indicated. Include extension sections necessary for required depth.
a. Frame: Include gray-iron or steel frame for grate, as shown on drawings
2. Grates with manufacturer's designation "Heavy Duty," as shown on drawings.
2.8 PIPE OUTLETS
A. Riprap Basins: Broken, irregular size and shape, graded stone, as shown on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for installing
green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures.
1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.
3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. General: Include watertight, silttight, or soiltight joints, unless watertight or silttight joints are indicated.
B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use
pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to applications indicated.
C. Gravity-Flow Piping: Use the following:
1. NPS 4 and NPS 6: Corrugated PE drainage tubing and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled
joints.
2. NPS 8 to NPS 15 (DN200 to DN375): Corrugated PE drainage tubing and fittings, silttight
couplings, and coupled joints in NPS 8 and NPS 10. Use corrugated PE pipe and fittings, silttight
couplings, and coupled joints in NPS 12 and NPS 15.
3. NPS 15 reinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints Class III and V.
Do not use nonreinforced pipe instead of reinforced concrete pipe.
STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take
design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of
invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according
to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, and other installation requirements. Maintain
swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is completed.
C. Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings or cleanouts are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings
are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. Install gravity-flow piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated.
Terminate piping as indicated.
F. Extend storm drainage piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated.
B. Refer to Division 2 Section "Utility Materials" for basic piping joint construction and installation.
C. HDPE Pipe and Fittings: As follows:
1. Join pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for soiltight joints according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
2. Install according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Install corrugated piping according to the Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association's
"Recommended Installation Practices for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings."
D. Concrete Pipe and Fittings: Install according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual." Use the
following seals:
1. Round Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber gaskets.
E. System Piping Joints: Make joints using system manufacturer's couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use
couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials and dimensions.
3.6 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
B. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.
STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished grade surface of manholes.
D. Install precast concrete manhole sections with gaskets according to ASTM C 891.
3.7 CATCH-BASIN INSTALLATION
A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.
B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.
3.8 STORM DRAINAGE INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION
A. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.
B. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.
3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318 and ACI 350R.
3.10 DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface.
C. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives, fasteners,
and other materials recommended by system manufacturer.
D. Embed channel sections and drainage specialties in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides.
E. Fasten grates to channel sections if indicated.
3.11 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Install piping so cleanouts
open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, as shown on drawings. Set with
tops 1 inch above surrounding earth grade.
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab
or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed.
1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning.
STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.
3. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect
after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size
not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within
allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
C. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired in
accordance with Vail, Colorado requirements.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance
notice.
4. Submit separate reports for each test.
5. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
6. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances
specified.
END OF SECTION 02630
STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 7
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 02732 -ROADWAY BASE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: Preparing surface of subgrade prior to paving and after utility contractors
have completed installation of all utilities, and furnish and place one or more courses of
aggregate in conformance with lines, grades, and typical sections shown on drawings. All
work shall be in accordance with Town of Vail requirements, Standards and
Specifications.
B. Related Work:
1. Storm Drainage: Section 02630
2. Water Distribution: Section 02510
3. Sanitary Sewerage: Section 02530
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: If requested, furnish proposed source of materials and copies of tests from
certified and acceptable testing laboratory:
1. Sieve analysis – ASTM C136
2. Wear Abrasion – ASTM C131
3. Liquid Limit – AASHTO T89, T90
4. Moisture Density Curves – AASHTO T99
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 AGGREGATE
A. Aggregate shall conform to following gradation:
Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing square Mesh Sieves
Size
Class 1 Class 2 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6
4” 100 - - -
3” 100 95-100 - - -
2” 95-100 - 100 - -
1-1/2” - 90-100 - -
1” - - 100 -
¾” - 50-90 - 100
No. 4 30-65 - 30-50 30-70 30-65
No. 8 - - - 25-55
No. 200 3-15 3-15 3-12 3-15 3-12
Liquid Limit not greater than 35 for Class 2; 30 for Class 4, 5, or 6.
Plasticity Index not exceeding 6.
B. Requirements for this Project:
Furnish Class 6 aggregate for this Project.
ROADWAY BASE 02732 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Subgrade Preparation: Shape and compact to crown, line, grades, and typical cross
section shown on drawings before placing base material. Compact to 95% ASTM-698
3.02 MIXING
The Contractor shall mix the aggregate by methods that insure a thorough and homogenous
mixture.
3.03 PLACEMENT
If required compacted depth of aggregate base course exceeds 6”, construct in two or more layers
of approximately equal thickness. Maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not
exceed 6”. When vibratory or other approved types of special compacting equipment are used,
compacted depth of single layer may be increased to 8” upon approval of Engineer.
3.04 SHAPING AND COMPACTION
Compact each layer to 95% ASTM-698. Maintain surface of each layer during compaction so that
uniform texture is produced and aggregates are firmly keyed. Apply water uniformly during
compaction so moisture content is within 2% of optimum.
END OF SECTION 02732
ROADWAY BASE 02732 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 02741 – HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Furnishing, laying, and compacting hot-mixed asphaltic concrete
pavement in conformance with lines, grades, and typical cross-sections shown on the
drawings.
B. Related Work:
1. Roadway Base: Section 2732
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source: Engineer shall have access to batching plant at all times work is in progress.
B. Record of Work: Contractor shall keep record of time and date of placement,
temperature, and weather conditions. Retain until completion and furnish copy to
Engineer.
C. Contractor will arrange and pay for all field tests to determine compliance of base course
and pavement materials and compaction with the specification and the approved design
mix formula.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: If requested, provide samples of proposed materials.
B. Test Reports: If requested furnish copies of tests from certified and acceptable testing
laboratory:
1. Aggregate – AASHTO T96
2. Tar – AASHTO M52 Grade RTC B-5, M118.
3. Liquid Asphalt – AASHTO M81, M82; ASTM D2026
4. Emulsified Asphalt – AASHTO M140
5. Compaction – AASHTO T230
6. Stability and Flow – AASHTO T245
C. Job Mix Formula: Provide Engineer proposed mix design based upon aggregates to be
used.
1. Submit design mix to Engineer for approval along with Marshall series
performed by an independent laboratory.
2. Stability per ASTM D1559: 1500 lb. minimum
3. Flow per ASTM D1559: .08 to .16 inch
4. Air Voids percentage per ASTM D1559: 3 to 5 percent
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
5. Use an anti-stripping additive form the approved list of additives in Chapter 400
of the Colorado Department of Highways Field Materials Manual
6. Minimum Asphalt content:
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Transport mixtures form mixing plant in trucks having tight, clean, non-sticking
compartments. When transporting, provide covers to protect from weather and prevent
loss of heat when temperature is below 50 degrees F. During temperatures below 50
degrees F on long distance deliveries, provide insulation around entire truck bed surfaces.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not place asphaltic concrete on wet surfaces, or when
temperature is below 40 degrees F, unless agreed to by Engineer.
B. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphaltic concrete
pavement until cooled and hardened. Provide barricades, flagmen, and warning devices
as required to protect pavement. Maintain pedestrian and vehicular traffic as required.
Cover openings of structures in paving until permanent coverings are placed.
D. Confirm in writing, aggregate base course constructed by others has been compacted to
requirements of these specifications. Use any means necessary to proof roll or test to
confirm aggregate base is satisfactory to receive asphaltic concrete. Notify in writing to
Owner any deficient areas so they may be brought into conformance with specifications
prior to placement of asphaltic concrete.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 AGGREGATE
Clean, hard, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed gravel, natural gravel, or crushed slag with
not more than 45% of wear, AASHTO T96.
Sizes #8 and larger, tolerances + 8%; #30 + 3%; where 100% passing, no tolerance.
Sieve Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves
Grading Grading Grading Grading
G C CX F
1-1/2” 100 - - -
1” 90-100 100 - 100
¾” 63-85 90-100 100 -
½” 46-78 70-89 90-100 -
3/8” - 60-88 74-89 -
#4 22-54 44-72 50-78 -
#8 13-47 30-62 32-64 45-85
#30 4-26 12-38 12-38 -
#200 1-7 3-7 3-7 7-13
Use Grading CX for this project.
2.02 ASPHALTIC CEMENT
AASHTO M226, Penetration Grade 85-100. Use AC-10 for all paving.
2.03 TACK COAT
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
One of the following, grade and type as recommended by supplier:
A. Emulsified asphalt, AASHTO M140
B. Cationic emulsified asphalt, AASHTO M208
2.04 MIX DESIGN
A. Determine design mix based upon aggregates to be used.
1. Submit design mix to engineer for approval along with Marshall series
performed by an independent laboratory.
2. Stability per ASTM D1559: 1500 lb. minimum
3. Flow per ASTM D1559: .08 to .16 in.
4. Air voids percentage per ASTM D1559: 3 to 5%
5. Use an anti-stripping additive form the approved lists of additives in Chapter
400 of the Colorado Department of Highways Field Materials Manual.
6. Minimum Asphalt content: 5.8%
B. Furnish aggregate gradation.
C. Accepted design mix shall meet compaction requirements of these specifications.
2.06 MIXING
A. General: Comply with ASTM D995 for material storage, control, mixing, and plant
equipment and operation.
B. Aggregates: Keep each component of various-sized combined aggregates in separate
stockpiles. Maintain so separate aggregate sizes will not be intermixed and to prevent
segregation. Heat-dry aggregates to reduce moisture content to not more than 2%.
Deliver dry aggregate mixer at recommended temperature to suit penetration, grade, and
viscosity characteristics of asphaltic cement, ambient temperature, and workability of
mixture.
C. Asphaltic Cement: Heat bitumen to viscosity at which it can be uniformly distributed
throughout mixture. Select temperature range of 275 degrees F to 350 degrees F to suit
temperature – viscosity characteristics of asphalt. Do not exceed 350 degrees F.
E. Mixing: Accurately weigh or measure dry aggregates and weigh or meter asphaltic
cement to comply with job-mix formula requirements. Mix aggregate and asphaltic
cement to achieve 90-95% coated particles for surface mixtures when tested in
accordance with ASTM D2489.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
A. Base Course: Blade, shape, and smooth aggregate base course to uniform section.
Remove loose materials. Clean the surface to be paved by mechanical sweepers,
blowers, or hand brooms, until surface is free from dust.
If time lapse from final shaping to placement is longer than 24 hours, reshape, wet and
compact surface, or apply prime coat. When prime coat is used, apply at rate of 0.3
gallons per square yard as soon as practicable after surface has been prepared and is
sufficiently dry. Calibrate distributor and furnish calibration to Engineer. Adjust spray
nozzles and spray bar to provide uniform distribution of prime coat. Cease immediately
upon clogging or interference of any nozzle and correct before distribution is resumed.
Protect adjacent surfaces from prime coat material. Remove prime oat from adjacent
surfaces. Return to same condition prior to work beginning. Maintain prime coat and/or
base course surface until covered by asphaltic concrete. Where prime coat has been
applied for 48 hours, and has not dried sufficiently, materials may be blotted with
aggregate in manner agreed to by Engineer. Clean any damaged area of all loose
material, and repair base course to satisfaction of Engineer. Reapply prime coat.
B. Existing Surfaces: Clean of all foreign materials. Fill holes and low places with leveling
courses and compact prior to surface placement. Tack coat existing surface at 0.1 gallon
per square yard. Apply only to areas on which surfacing is to be placed immediately. Do
not extend more than 2000’ ahead of paving equipment. Prevent traffic from travelling
on tack coat.
3.02 FRAME ADJUSTMENTS
Set frames of structures to final grade. Place compacted asphaltic concrete to top of frame. If
permanent covers are not in place, provide temporary covers over openings until compaction is
complete. Where frames and covers are paved over, mark so crews can find on an emergency
basis until cut out and adjusted to final surfacing.
3.03 PLACEMENT
A. Place at temperatures of not less than 280 degrees F, or more than 350 degrees F. If
temperature is below 50 degrees F and falling, asphaltic concrete mix shall not be less
than 300 degrees F, while on trucks just prior to laydown. Mechanical, self-powered
pavers shall be capable of spreading mix within specified tolerances, true to line, grade,
and crown as indicated on drawings. Road grader equipped with automatic blade control
may be used for leveling courses. Pavers shall be equipped with hoppers and distribution
screws which place mix evenly in front of adjustable screeds. Screeds shall be adjustable
for height and crown, equipped with controlled heating device for use as required.
Screed shall strike off mix without tearing, shaving or gouging surface, to depth and
cross-section specified, without aid of manual adjustment during operation. Pavers shall
be capable of placing courses in thickness’ from ½” to 4” and from widths of 8’ to 15’.
Extensions and cut-off shall permit changes in widths by increments of 6”.
B. Strike finish surface smooth; true to cross section; uniform in density and texture; free
form hollows, transverse corrugations, and other irregularities. Paint contact surfaces
between gutters, manhole rings, catch basins, and other similar structures with thin,
uniform coating of tack coat. Final surface shall be ¼” above all structures and gutters
sloping away from paving, flush with gutters sloping towards paving.
C. Hand Placement: Where certain areas because of irregularity, inaccessibility, or
unavoidable obstacles, do not lend themselves to machine placement, Engineer may
agree to hand placement. Spread and compact to same finish and compaction tolerances
of these specifications.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
D. Joints: make joints between old and new pavement, or between successive day’s work, to
insure thorough bond between old and new surfaces. Clean surfaces free of sand, dirt,
dust, or other materials, and apply tack coat. Construction joints must have same texture,
density, and smoothness tolerances as other surfacing.
1. Construct transverse joints to existing material by cutting material back to
expose full depth edge. Paint thin uniform tack coat on joint and place new
asphaltic concrete.
2. Prepare longitudinal joints overlapping screed 1” on existing surface. Deposit
sufficient material to complete joint. Push excess by hand rake1/2” on new mat
leaving vertical uncompacted face approximately1” high. Compact against joint
by rolling equipment. No depression allowed exceeding 1/8” for width of 6”,
after final compaction.
E. Finish Tolerance: Place leveling courses within ½” of design grade. Finished surfaces
will be tested with 10’ straight edge, parallel to center line at location of wheel paths for
each lane. Straight edge will be advanced 5’ and space under straight edge shall not
exceed ¼”. Correct areas deficient in smoothness by completely removing surface
material and replacing. Overlay corrections may be made only if approved by Owner.
F. Thickness Tolerance: Compacted thickness shall be no less than that shown on drawings.
Any surfacing which does not meet minimum thickness shall be removed and replaced.
3.04 COMPACTION
A. General: Provide one pneumatic-tired and one steel-wheel roller to obtain required
density, surface texture, and rideability. Begin rolling operations immediately following
placement of asphaltic concrete. Do not permit heavy equipment, rollers, etc. to stand on
finished surface where deformation may occur. End each pass of roller in different place.
B. Rollers
1. Steel-wheel rollers self-propelled, developing contact pressure under
compression wheels of 250 to 350 psi per inch of width of roller wheel. Rollers
equipped with adjustable scrapers and means for keeping wheel wet to prevent
mix from sticking.
2. Pneumatic-tired rollers self-propelled, developing contact pressure under each
tire of 85 to 110 psi. Wheels so spaced that one pass will accomplish on e
complete coverage equal to rolling width of machine. Wheels oscillate but not
wobble. Remove and replace immediately any tires picking up fines.
C. Compaction Procedures
1. Compact longitudinal joints and edges first, starting at outside edge and
gradually progress towards center of pavement. Begin superelevated curves
rolling on low side on previously transversely compacted material. Successive
passes should overlap by one half width of roller. Mat temperatures must not be
below 150 degrees F.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2. Immediately follow rolling of longitudinal joint and edges with breakdown
rolling. Place drive wheel nearest paver and pull roller towards paver. Return
roller to existing surface and make gradual shift to overlap previous pass by half
roller width. Operate pneumatic-tired rollers as close to paver as necessary to
obtain density required. Make enough passes for reasonably smooth surface.
3. Final rolling by combination of steel and pneumatic rollers to obtain density,
surface texture, and surface tolerances required.
D. Compact to minimum of 95% Marshall Design method data submitted, or from field
samples taken by the Engineer, and prepared in accordance with ASTM D1550. Re-
compact asphaltic concrete not conforming to density standards to these specifications.
Cut out compaction test plugs as directed by Engineer. Contractor shall cut test plugs,
fill, and repair test holes at his expense.
3.05 PATCHING
Cut out and fill with fresh, hot asphaltic concrete. Remove deficient areas for full depth of surface
and base course. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel, and perpendicular to direction of traffic to
extent of failure. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new pavement. Compact
and finish to specification.
3.06 CLEAN UP
After completing operations, clean surfaces, pick up excess paving materials, and clean work area.
END OF SECTION 02741
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02741 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENTT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:
1. Driveways and roadways on grade
2. Curbs and gutters.
3. Walkways.
4. Site walks / stairs.
B. Related Sections: Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of
concrete.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials and installation methods used should meet or exceed the requirements of the Town of
Vail.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic
cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant
adjustments.
C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for
compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current
materials:
1. Aggregates.Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete
due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.
E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies
with requirements:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
3. Fiber reinforcement.
4. Admixtures.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
5. Curing compounds.
6. Applied finish materials.
7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive.
8. Joint fillers.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
1. All reports shall be provided to Civil and Geotechnical Engineers.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who complies with
ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and
ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician,
Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.
C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation
tests and to design concrete mixtures per requirements specified on Drawings.
E. Mockups: Cast mockups of full-size sections of concrete pavement to demonstrate typical joints, surface
finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship.
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting construction.
4. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed pavement.
5. Demolish and remove approved mockups from the site when directed by Architect.
6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete pavement mixture design and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials and concrete pavement construction
practices. Require representatives, including the following, of each entity directly concerned with
concrete pavement, to attend conference:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete producer.
d. Concrete pavement subcontractor.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction
activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work.
2.2 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to
provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet (30.5 m) or less.
B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or
adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat
sheets.
B. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
C. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, plain steel.
D. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed.
E. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and bending; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) deformed bars.
F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M; with
ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) deformed bars.
G. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed
bars; assembled with clips.
H. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.
I. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496.
J. Epoxy-Coated-Steel Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, plain.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
K. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
L. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60
(Grade 420), plain steel bars.
M. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
N. uring concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.
O. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to
CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive
strength than concrete, and as follows:
1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not
support chair legs.
2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar
supports.
P. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid two-part epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on
reinforcement.
Q. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use one of the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source throughout the Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II white Supplement with the following:
a. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, TypeI (PM), pozzolan-modified portland cement.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4M coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide
aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory
service in similar pavement applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious
materials.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious
material.
1. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
2. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2.5 FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament or Fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in
concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long.
1. Available Products:
a. Monofilament Fibers:
1) Axim Concrete Technologies; Fibrasol IIP.
2) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Fiberstrand 100.
3) FORTA Corporation; Forta Mono.
4) Grace, W. R. & Co.--Conn.; Grace MicroFiber.
5) Metalcrete Industries; Polystrand 1000.
6) SI Concrete Systems; Fibermix Stealth.
b. Fibrillated Fibers:
1) Axim Concrete Technologies; Fibrasol F.
2) FORTA Corporation; Forta.
3) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Fiberstrand F.
4) Grace, W. R. & Co.--Conn.; Grace Fibers.
5) SI Concrete Systems; Fibermesh.
2.6 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh
concrete.
1. Available Products:
a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Cimfilm.
b. Burke by Edeco; BurkeFilm.
c. ChemMasters; Spray-Film.
d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Aquafilm.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film.
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar.
g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid.
h. Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin.
i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con.
j. MBT Protection and Repair, ChemRex Inc.; Confilm.
k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre.
l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.
m. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofilm.
n. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm.
o. Symons Corporation; Finishing Aid.
p. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 5
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2.7 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or
ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
B. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of
fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery with emery aggregate containing not less than 50
percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and
cleaning materials.
C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and
bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to requirements, and
as follows:
1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened
concrete.
2.8 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with
FS TT-P-115, Type I or AASHTO M 248, Type F
1. Color: As indicated..
B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying
with FS TT-P-1952, with drying time of less than 45 minutes.
1. Color: As indicated.
C. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1.
2.9 WHEEL STOPS
A. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi (17.2-MPa) minimum compressive strength, 4-1/2
inches (115 mm) high by 9 inches (225 mm) wide by 72 inches (1820 mm) long. Provide chamfered
corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate.
1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch (19-mm) diameter, 10-inch (254-mm) minimum length.
B. Wheel Stops: Solid, integrally colored, 96 percent recycled HDPE or commingled postconsumer and
postindustrial recycled plastic; UV stabilized; [4 inches (100 mm) high by 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 72
inches (1820 mm) long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for
anchoring to substrate.
1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch (19-mm) diameter, 10-inch (254-mm) minimum length.
2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight
concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 6
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete mixture
designs for the trial batch method.
B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete to meet the Colorado Department of
Transportation Class P with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.5.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.
D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or
other adverse placement conditions.
E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland
cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals, as follows:
1. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.
F. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less
than 1.5 lb/cu. yd. (0.90 kg/cu. M).
G. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions
and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.
2.11 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M[ and ASTM C 1116]. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used
in the Work.
1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C),
reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.
1. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project
identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, and amount of water
added.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional,
grading, and elevation tolerances.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 7
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to
identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.
1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit
vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6
tonnes).
3. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm)
require correction according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and
subgrade is ready to receive pavement.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required
lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain
in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without
damage.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting
reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.
C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete
placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full
mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either
direction.
E. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Use galvanized steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated reinforcement. Repair
cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material.
F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated reinforcement.
Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M.
G. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of
distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before
placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) overlap of adjacent mats.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 8
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces
perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations
where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement terminates at
isolation joints.
1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not
continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated.
3. Butt Joints: Use epoxy bonding adhesive at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless
otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.
5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or
asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch
basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet (15.25 m), unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished
surface.
4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated.
5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip
joint-filler sections together.
6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary
preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.
D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated.
Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows to
match jointing of existing adjacent concrete pavement:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge
of joint with grooving tool to a 3/8-inch (10-mm) radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints
after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or
diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will
not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.
3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.
Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an
edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.
Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 9
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement,
and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades (like snowmelt) to permit installation of their
work.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not
place concrete on frozen surfaces. Take every precaution to prevent snow and ice build up on sub-base
surface.
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place
concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.
D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site.
F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.
G. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag
concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
H. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand
spading, rodding, or tamping.
1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal
vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only
square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent
dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.
I. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required
depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in final position.
Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed.
1. Remove and replace concrete that has been placed for more than 15 minutes without being
covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by Architect.
J. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.
K. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface
plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete
surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
L. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit
revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and
gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If
results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete.
M. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised mix design
and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to required thickness,
lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement.
1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of paver
machine during operations.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 10
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
N. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until
pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.
O. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical
damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly
heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than
50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
P. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at
time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,
provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid
nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient
air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade
moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.7 FLOAT FINISHING
A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete
surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand
floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high
spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.
1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished concrete, perpendicular
to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.
2. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete
surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
3. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished
concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm) deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to
line of traffic.
3.8 SPECIAL FINISHES
A. Seeded Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Immediately after initial floating, spread a single layer of aggregate
uniformly on pavement surface. Tamp aggregate into plastic concrete, and float finish to entirely embed
aggregate with mortar cover of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
1. Spray-apply chemical surface retarder to pavement according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Cover pavement surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove sheeting when
ready to continue finishing operations.
3. Without dislodging aggregate, remove excess mortar by lightly brushing surface with a stiff,
nylon-bristle broom.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 11
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
4. Fine-spray surface with water and brush. Repeat water flushing and brushing cycle until cement
film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required.
B. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, spread slip-resistive aggregate finish on pavement
surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Uniformly spread [40 lb/100 sq. ft. (19.5 kg/10 sq. m) dampened slip-resistive aggregate over
pavement surface in 2 applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do
not force below surface.
2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of slip-resistive aggregate over pavement surface
with mechanical spreader, allow to absorb moisture, and embed by power floating. Follow power
floating with a second slip-resistive aggregate application, uniformly distributing remainder of
material at right angles to first application to ensure uniform coverage, and embed by power
floating.
3. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip-resistive aggregate manufacturer.
Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing.
4. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or abrasive stone and water to expose
nonslip aggregate.
3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.
C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions
cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations.
Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or
darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.
E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound,
or a combination of these as follows:
1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following
materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and
edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for
curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches
(300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears
during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound (to be used as indicated in soil Engineers report): Apply uniformly in
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions, at
a minimum rate of 1 gallon per 150 square feet. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within
three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during
curing period.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 12
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3.10 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm).
4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm).
5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of dowel
1/4 inch per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm).
8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm).
9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.
10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.
3.11 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with
Architect and Landscape Architect
B. Allow concrete pavement to cure for 28 days and be dry before starting pavement marking.
C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated with
uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film
thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm).
1. Spread glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. (0.72 kg/L).
3.12 WHEEL STOPS
A. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels embedded in
holes drilled or cast into wheel stops at one-quarter to one-third points. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel
stop and to pavement. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of
dowel beneath top of wheel stop.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172
shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction
thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each
concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or
from each batch if fewer than five are used.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 13
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when
concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less
than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4
deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite
sample.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three
standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2 specimens at
28 days.
a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2 specimens
obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.
C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive-strength
tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below
specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48
hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and
number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete
batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials,
compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by
Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results
indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as
directed by Architect.
G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.14 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply
with requirements in this Section.
B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or
defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete
bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When
construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and
spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete
pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 14
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
END OF SECTION 02751
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 15
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 02764 - PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Expansion and contraction joints within portland cement concrete pavement.
2. Joints between portland cement concrete and asphalt pavement.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: If required, for each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint-
sealant samples in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of
material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply
with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar
in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-
sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following
conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant
manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less
than that allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable
of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this
characteristic.
2.2 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Premoulded joint filler for expansion joints shall meet ASTM D1751 or ASTM D1752. Per City
Standards.
B. Type NS Silicone Sealant for Concrete: Single-component, low-modulus, neutral-curing, nonsag silicone
sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type NS.
C. Type SL Silicone Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single-component, low-modulus, neutral-curing,
self-leveling silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type SL.
D. Multicomponent Low-Modulus Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Proprietary formulation consisting of
reactive petropolymer and activator components producing a pourable, self-leveling sealant.
E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cold-applied joint sealants that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Type NS Silicone Sealant for Concrete:
a. Roadsaver Silicone-SL; Crafco Inc.
b. 888; Dow Corning.
2. Type SL Silicone Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt:
a. 890-SL; Dow Corning.
3. Multicomponent Low-Modulus Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt:
a. SOF-SEAL; W.R. Meadows, Inc.
2.3 HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Joint sealer shall meet requirements of ASTM D1190. Per City Standards.
B. Elastomeric Sealant for Concrete: Single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3406.
C. Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3405.
D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, hot-applied joint sealants that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
1. Elastomeric Sealant for Concrete:
a. Superseal 444/777; Crafco, Inc.
b. POLY-JET 3406; W.R. Meadows, Inc.
2. Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt:
a. ROADSAVER 221; Crafco Inc.
b. Product #9005; Koch Materials Company.
c. Product #9030; Koch Materials Company.
d. SEALTIGHT HI-SPEC; W.R. Meadows, Inc.
2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates,
sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Round Backer Rod for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density
required to control sealant depths and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.
C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width
required to control sealant depths, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint
opening under sealant.
D. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required
to control sealant depths and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.
2.5 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Product recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint- sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant
performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant
bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials.
3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace
them with dry materials.
D. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are
installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins,
tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless
otherwise indicated.
G. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired
areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
END OF SECTION 02764
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 4
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTION 02780 - UNIT PAVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Pavers set in aggregate setting beds.
2. Aluminum edge restraints.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02552 – Ground-Loop Heat Pump Piping.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.
B. Samples of pavers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups for each form and pattern of unit paver.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or build on frozen subgrade or setting beds.
B. Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed: Install bituminous setting bed only when ambient
temperature is above 40 deg F (4 deg C) and when base is dry.
C. Cold-Weather Requirements for Mortar and Grout: Heat materials to provide mortar and grout
temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Protect unit paver work against freezing for 24
hours after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 UNIT PAVERS
A. Unit Pavers: To be selected by Architect.
UNIT PAVERS 02780 - 1
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Aluminum Edge Restraints: Straight, 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick by 4-inch- (100-mm-) high extruded-
aluminum edging with loops pressed from face to receive stakes at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c., and
aluminum stakes 12 inches (300 mm) long for each loop.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BRICKSTOP Corporation.
b. Curv-Rite, Inc.
c. Permaloc Corporation.
d. Sure-Loc Edging Corporation.
B. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
C. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.
2.3 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No.8.
B. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with
gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.
C. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16
(1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
D. Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile made from polyolefins or polyesters; with
elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following:
1. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
2. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and
textures.
B. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide pattern indicated and to fit
adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible.
C. Joint Pattern: Random, with long edges running parallel to foot traffic.
D. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 24
inches (3 mm in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for
finished surface of paving.
E. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide foam filler as backing for sealant-filled joints. Install joint filler
before setting pavers.
UNIT PAVERS 02780 - 2
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
F. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated. Install joint filler
before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers.
G. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers or sand in setting
bed.
3.2 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 698 laboratory density.
B. Place aggregate base, compact by tamping with plate vibrator, and screed to depth indicated.
C. Place drainage geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300
mm).
D. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm), taking care that
moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted.
E. Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.
F. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3 mm), being
careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer
bars.
G. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf
(16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz.
H. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers
and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand
on the surface for joint filling.
END OF SECTION 02780
UNIT PAVERS 02780 - 3
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 1
SECTION 02920 - LAWNS AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sodding.
B. This section includes installation of 12” wide washed gravel 1around base of building where
pavement does not exist
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
B. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand
with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
C. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to
become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.
D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface
of a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product certificates.
C. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor
on Project site when planting is in progress.
B. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in TPI's "Specifications
for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and
Installation" in its "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 2
1.6 LAWN MAINTENANCE
A. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is
established, but for not less than the following periods:
1. Sodded Lawns: 30 days from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Mow lawn as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Remove no more than 40 percent of
grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TURFGRASS SOD
A. Turfgrass Sod: Certified and Approved including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases,
nematodes, and insects, complying with TPI's "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in its
"Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color,
and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.
B. Turfgrass Species: Bluegrass
2.2 PLANTING MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 6 percent organic material
content; free of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials
harmful to plant growth.
1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site and supplement with imported or
manufactured topsoil from off-site sources when quantities are insufficient. Verify
suitability of stockpiled surface soil to produce topsoil.
B. Inorganic Soil Amendments:
1. Lime: ASTM C 602, Class T or O, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80
percent calcium carbonate equivalent.
C. Fertilizer:
1. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 1 percent
nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid.
2.3 PLANTING SOIL MIX
A. Planting Soil Mix: Mix topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the
following quantities:
1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LAWN PREPARATION
A. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100 mm).
Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and
other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1. Thoroughly blend planting soil mix off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil
amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil mix.
2. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm) but not less than required to
meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil
or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly
fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish elevation. Roll and rake,
remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be
planted in the immediate future.
C. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface
to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
D. Restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.
3.2 SODDING
A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or
muddy.
B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch
or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to
subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade,
eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor
cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.
1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3.
2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs or steel staples spaced as
recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent
slippage.
C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week, water daily
or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) below sod.
D. See Section 02930 for permanent irrigation
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 4
3.3 SATISFACTORY LAWNS
A. Satisfactory Sodded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored,
viable lawn has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface
irregularities.
B. Reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until lawns
are satisfactory.
C. Install 12” wide washed gravel , 4” deep with metal edging over weed protection fabric at base
of building where pavement does not exist.
END OF SECTION 02920
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 1
SECTION 02930 - EXTERIOR PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Trees.
2. Shrubs.
3. Ground cover.
4. Plants.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
B. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand
with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
C. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to
become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.
D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface
of a fill or backfill, before placing planting soil.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: Mineral mulch.
C. Product certificates.
D. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants.
E. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for
maintenance of exterior plants during a calendar year.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer who maintains an experienced full-time
supervisor on Project site when exterior planting is in progress.
B. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 2
C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying with
applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock."
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from
sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or
bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective
covering of exterior plants during delivery. Do not drop exterior plants during delivery.
B. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install
immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants trees
in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Warrant the following exterior plants, for the warranty period indicated,
against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack
of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's
control.
1. Warranty Period for Trees and Shrubs: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Ground Cover and Plants: twelve months from date of Substantial
Completion.
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Trees and Shrubs: Maintain during warranty period by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding,
fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and
resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings.
Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.
B. Ground Cover and Plants: Maintain during warranty period by watering, weeding, fertilizing,
and other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTERIOR PLANTS
A. Tree and Shrub Material: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1,
with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped,
fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as
knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
1. Provide balled and burlapped or balled and potted or container-grown trees and shrubs.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 3
B. Ground Cover: Provide ground cover of species indicated, established and well rooted in pots
or similar containers, and complying with ANSI Z60.1.
C. Annuals: By Owner
D. Perennials: By Owner.
2.2 PLANTING MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 6 percent organic material
content; free of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials
harmful to plant growth.
1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site and supplement with imported or
manufactured topsoil from off-site sources when quantities are insufficient. Verify
suitability of stockpiled surface soil to produce topsoil.
B. Organic Soil Amendments:
1. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste;
of uniform texture, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
C. Fertilizer:
1. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of [1] [4] percent
nitrogen and [10] [20] percent phosphoric acid.
D. Mulches:
1. Organic Mulch: Shredded hardwood or softwood
E. Weed-Control Barriers:
1. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a
nonwoven polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd. (162 g/sq. m).
2.3 PLANTING SOIL MIX
A. Planting Soil Mix: Mix topsoil with the following soil amendments in the following quantities:
1. Remove and dispose of existing unsuitable substrate to a depth of at least 24 inches innall
planting areas
2. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXTERIOR PLANTING
A. Bed Establishment:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 4
1. Loosen subgrade of planting beds to a minimum depth of 8 inches (200 mm).
2. Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish,
and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
3. Thoroughly blend planting soil mix off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil
amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil mix.
4. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of as needed but not less than required to meet finish
grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen,
muddy, or excessively wet.
5. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose,
uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish
grades.
B. Trees and Shrubs:
1. Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Trim base leaving
center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage. Do not further
disturb base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. Excavate
approximately three times as wide as ball diameter.
2. Set trees and shrubs plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 1 inch
(25 mm) above adjacent finish grades.
a. Balled and Burlapped: Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of root balls
and partially from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets,
if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken
before or during planting operation.
b. Balled and Potted and Container Grown: Carefully remove root ball from
container without damaging root ball or plant.
c. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and
eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled,
water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no
more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of
planting soil mix.
3. Organic Mulching: Apply 2-inch (50-mm) average thickness of organic mulch extending
12 inches (300 mm) beyond edge of planting pit or trench. Do not place mulch within 3
inches (75 mm) of trunks or stems.
C. Tree and Shrub Pruning: Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs according to standard
horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Do not cut tree leaders;
remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees. Prune shrubs to retain natural
character. Shrub sizes indicated are sizes after pruning.
D. Planting Bed Mulching:
1.
Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6
inches (150 mm).
2. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting beds and other areas indicated. Apply 2-inch (50-
mm) average thickness of mulch, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not
place mulch against plant stems.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 5
E. Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other
contractors and trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance
periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged exterior planting.
F. Install permanent irrigation ( coordinate with Architect locations of controls) to provide ongoing
Irrigation of plant installation. Sleeve under adjacent hard surface walkways.
G. Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02930
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. See Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
C. Shop Drawings: For steel reinforcement.
D. Material test reports
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2
B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded, 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum
coarse-aggregate size.
1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
F. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for
use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to
38 mm) long.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended
adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
2.6 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic
fiber .
2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to
100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture,
plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: 5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-
mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
6. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended
rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m) .
2.8 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.9 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M[ and ASTM C 1116], and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643
and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints
after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete
when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
concrete develops random contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces [not exposed to public view] <Insert locations>.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view,.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where
indicated:
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform
color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing
process.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small
or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish
C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces
2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and
placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm)
D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry
tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic,
slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.
E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-
weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after
placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7
at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less
than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging
concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer[ unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not
interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project].
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301.
END OF SECTION 03300
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 - 1
SECTION 03532 - CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Emery-aggregate concrete floor topping.
2. Iron-aggregate concrete floor topping.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Emery-Aggregate Concrete Floor Topping:
a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; A-H Emery A-1 Premix.
b. Dayton Superior Corporation; Emery Tuff Top.
c. Emeri-Crete, Inc.; Emeri-Crete.
d. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Emerytop 400.
e. Metalcrete Industries; Met-Top E.
f. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Emeri-Crete SH.
2.2 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPINGS
A. Emery-Aggregate Concrete Floor Topping: Factory-prepared and dry-packaged mixture of
graded, crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide, not less
than 24 percent ferric oxide, and not more than 8 percent silica; portland cement or blended
hydraulic cement; plasticizers; and other admixtures to which only water needs to be added at
Project site.
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 7000 psi (48 MPa) ASTM C 109/C 109M.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 - 2
2.3 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 25
percent solids content, minimum.
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Type A Shore durometer hardness of 80 or [aromatic polyurea with a Type A Shore durometer
hardness range of 90 to 95 per ASTM D 2240.
B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
D. Sand: ASTM C 404, fine aggregate passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
E. Water: Potable.
F. Acrylic-Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
2.5 MIXING
A. Bonding Slurry: Mix portland cement with water to a thick paint consistency.
B. Bonding Slurry: Mix 1 part portland cement and 2 parts sand with water and an acrylic-bonding
agent according to manufacturer's written instructions to a thick paint consistency.
C. Floor Topping: Mix concrete floor topping materials and water in appropriate drum-type batch
machine mixer or truck mixer according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and unsound concrete.
Mechanically abrade base slabs to produce a heavily scarified surface profile with an amplitude
of 1/4 inch (6 mm.)
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 - 3
1. Prepare and clean existing base slabs according to concrete floor topping manufacturer's
written instructions. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base slabs.
2. Saw cut contraction and construction joints in existing concrete to a depth of 1/2 inch (13
mm) and fill with semirigid joint filler.
B. Install joint-filler strips where topping abuts vertical surfaces.
3.2 FLOOR TOPPING APPLICATION
A. Start floor topping application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
B. Monolithic Floor Topping: After textured-float finish is applied to fresh concrete of base slabs
specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete," place concrete floor topping while
concrete is still plastic.
C. Deferred Floor Topping: Within 72 hours of placing base slabs, mix and scrub bonding slurry
into dampened concrete to a thickness of 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm), without puddling.
Place floor topping while slurry is still tacky.
D. Existing Concrete: Apply epoxy-bonding adhesive, mixed according to manufacturer's written
instructions, and scrub into dry base slabs to a thickness of 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm),
without puddling. Place floor topping while adhesive is still tacky.
E. Place concrete floor topping continuously in a single layer, tamping and consolidating to
achieve tight contact with bonding surface. Do not permit cold joints or seams to develop
within pour strip.
1. Screed surface with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
2. Slope surfaces uniformly where indicated.
3. Begin initial floating using bull floats to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane
free of humps or hollows.
F. Finishing: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats as soon as concrete floor topping can
support equipment and operator. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat
float passes and restraightening until concrete floor topping surface has a uniform, smooth,
granular texture.
1. Hard Trowel Finish: After floating surface, apply first trowel finish and consolidate
concrete floor topping by power-driven trowel without allowing blisters to develop.
Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is smooth and uniform in
texture.
2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between surface and an unleveled
freestanding 10-foot- (3-m-) long straightedge, resting on 2 high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface, does not exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm).
G.
Construction Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
concrete floor topping, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
H. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 - 4
concrete floor topping when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface
and before random contraction cracks develop.
1. Form joints in concrete floor topping over contraction joints in base slabs, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Construct contraction joints for a combined depth equal to topping thickness and not less
than one-fourth of base-slab thickness.
3. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one-half of concrete floor topping
thickness, but not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) deep.
4. Prepare and clean contraction joints and install semirigid joint filler, according to
manufacturer's written instructions, once topping has fully cured.
3.3 PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete floor topping from premature drying and excessive
cold or hot temperatures.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete floor topping surfaces in hot, dry,
or windy conditions before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's
written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying floor topping, but
before float finishing.
C. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete floor topping. Cure by one or a combination
of the following methods, according to concrete floor topping manufacturer's written
instructions:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with water
or absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover topping surfaces
and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped
at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less
than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in two coats in continuous operations by power
spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to
heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating
and repair damage during curing period.
3.4 REPAIRS
A. Defective Topping: Repair and patch defective concrete floor topping areas, including areas
that have not bonded to concrete substrate.
END OF SECTION 03532
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 1
SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).
B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for unit
masonry.
C. See Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured reglets
installed in masonry joints for metal flashing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry
reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete
Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.
C. Samples for each type and color of exposed masonry units
D. Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated. Include statements of material
properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and
type designations within standards.
1. For masonry units include material test reports substantiating compliance with
requirements.
E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to
perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by
Owner.
1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 67.
2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 140.
3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, per ASTM C 780
4. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, per ASTM C 1019.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 2
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those
of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and
inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects.
1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction] in sizes
approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)
A. Shapes: Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa).
2. Weight Classification: Normal weight.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 3
2.3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS
A. General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, at Contractor's option, complying with
requirements below.
B. Concrete Lintels: Precast units matching concrete masonry units and with reinforcing bars
indicated or required to support loads indicated.
C. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements in
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D. Masonry Lintels: Made from bond beam concrete masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as
indicated and filled with coarse grout.
2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
1. Available Products:
a. Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement.
b. Essroc, Italcementi Group; .
c. Holcim (US) Inc.; .
d. Lafarge North America Inc.; Lafarge Masonry Cement.
e. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Masonry Cement.
f. National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement.
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent
passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce
required mortar color.
E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
F. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as
pointing mortar for structural-clay tile facing units.
G. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar
of composition indicated.
1. Available Products:
a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Kick.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 4
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.
c. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset.
d. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA.
H. Water: Potable.
2.5 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 .
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 951; mill galvanized, carbon-steel wire for interior
walls and hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for exterior walls.
1. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch (4.8-mm) diameter.
2. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W2.8 or 0.188-inch (4.8-mm) diameter.
3. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.
4. Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.
5. Multiwythe Masonry:
a. Ladder type : Dur-O-Wal #8
2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where
indicated, complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
1. Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into
wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and
hemmed.
2. Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75
mm) into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back
on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm) and down into joint 3/8 inch (10 mm) to form a stop for
retaining sealant backer rod.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene urethane or PVC.
B. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches (9
by 38 by 89 mm) long.
2. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant
polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm)
less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.
a. Available Products:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 5
2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents.
3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent.
4) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent.
5) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.
b. INSULATION
C. Loose-Granular Fill Insulation: Perlite complying with ASTM C 549, Type II (surface treated
for water repellency and limited moisture absorption) or Type IV (surface treated for water
repellency and to limit dust generation).
2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing
mortar/grout stains from new masonry without damaging masonry. Use product approved for
intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
b. EaCo Chem, Inc.
c. ProSoCo, Inc.
2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar for exterior and reinforced masonry to portland
cement and lime.
3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M .
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S orN.
3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S or N.
4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other
applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with [ASTM C 476] [UBC Standard 21-19].
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 6
2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required, cut units with motor-driven
saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of
units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.
(30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they
are damp but not wet at time of laying.
D. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3
mm in 3 m) maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), maximum.
3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Where patching of existing openings is required patch to match exactly existing conditions on
all sides of patch including thickness of finish assemblies
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 7
3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint), unless otherwise indicated.
E. MASONRY-CELL INSULATION
F. Pour granular insulation into cavities to fill void spaces. Maintain inspection ports to show
presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close the ports after filling has been
confirmed. Limit the fall of insulation to 1 story in height, but not more than 20 feet (6 m).
3.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls,
1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.5 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to
comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] in width
between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and
attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36
inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 8
3.6 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated
B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on
sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into
masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and
turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.
3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to
top of metal drip edge.
C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately
above embedded flashing and as follows:
1. Use specified weep/vent products or open head joints to form weep holes.
2. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with
loose-fill insulation.
3.7 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as
indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,
tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of
reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on
them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than [60 inches (1520 mm)]
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 9
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and
prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform
inspections.
1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades,
sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports:
1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.
C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) of wall area or portion
thereof.
D. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 67.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140.
F. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 780.
G. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.
3.9 PARGING
A. Parge masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch (19
mm) with a steel-trowel finish. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. Damp-
cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.
3.10 CLEANING
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes.
2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner.
3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-
contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill
material as fill is placed.
1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 10
2. Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and
other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 04810
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes structural steel and grout.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents
to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand ASD-service loads
indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.
1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC's "Manual
of Steel Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design," Volume 2, Part 9 AISC's
"Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design," Part 4
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Mill test reports.
E. Source quality-control test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality
Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Sbd.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel."
C. Comply with applicable provisions of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings
and Bridges."
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992 Grade 50 (345)].
B. Channels, Angles, M , S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M .
D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B structural tubing.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E .
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex
steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and
ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain.
B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex
steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends;
ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436
(ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers, plain.
C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished
carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.
D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Finish: Plain
2.3 PRIMER
A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type II, iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd.
B. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer.
2.4 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic
aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's
"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design]."
B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear
connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.
2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,
appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.
2.7 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
5. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and
standards:
1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints,
corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and
inspections and prepare test reports. Comply with testing and inspection requirements of Part 3,
Article "Field Quality Control."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4
B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
C. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected
according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Examination: Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of
anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance
with requirements.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's
"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural
Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."
C. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing
materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface
of base and bearing plates.
1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as
required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate.
3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or
bearing plate before packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no
voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply
with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
D. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
3.2 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,
appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5
1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and
"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design
" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on
surfaces adjacent to field welds.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.
B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.
1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the
following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 05120
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL STAIRS 05511 - 1
SECTION 05511 - METAL STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs and to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
2. Alternating Tread Stair (Lapeyre carbon steel stair (galvanized) with railings and
guardrails to conform to 2009 IBC, (or equal)
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m).
2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm).
3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition
to loads specified above.
5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4
mm), whichever is less.
B. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
3. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
(0.093 sq. m).
C. Seismic Performance: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL STAIRS 05511 - 2
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For metal stairs.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on
required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn).
D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
E. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).
F. Iron Castings: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, or malleable iron,
ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B,
or structural steel, Grade 40
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL STAIRS 05511 - 3
H. Expanded Metal, Carbon Steel: ASTM F 1267, Class 1 (uncoated).
I. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, 2-inch (50-mm) woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135-
inch (3.5-mm) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510 .
J. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls.
B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79.
C. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated.
D. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm)--W1.4 by W1.4, unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Precast Concrete Treads: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for normal-weight concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 5000 psi
(35 MPa) and a total air content of not less than 4 percent or more than 6 percent. Reinforce
with galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm) by 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-)
diameter wire.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Lapeyre or approved equal
B. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips,
brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and
platforms on supporting structure.
1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. Use materials and methods that
minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain
fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed
connections, finish exposed welds smooth and blended.
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
3. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges, unless
otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
4. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work.
5. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL STAIRS 05511 - 4
C. Abrasive-Coating-Finished, Formed-Metal Stairs: Form risers, treads, and platforms from steel
sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.0966
inch (2.5 mm). Finish tread and platform surfaces with manufacturer's standard epoxy-bonded
abrasive finish.
D. Steel Tube Railings (Interior Only): Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated
for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post
spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.
1. Configuration: 1-1/2-inch diameter- (38-mm-) round top and bottom rails and posts with
infill panels made from woven wire mesh in steel channel frames.
2. Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide
close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose.
3. Form changes in direction of railings by bending or by inserting prefabricated fittings.
4. Form curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling.
5. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
6. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails.
7. Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for
interconnecting components and for attaching to other work.
8. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed products:
1. Interior Stairs (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components. Comply with SSPC-PA 1,
"Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for
shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into
concrete, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have
been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
D. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL STAIRS 05511 - 5
1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
E. Adjusting and Cleaning:
1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting.
2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05511
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 1
SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel pipe and tube railings for exterior guardrails.
B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
3. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
(0.093 sq. m).
B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For mechanically connected railings, grout, anchoring cement, and paint
products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 2
C. Samples: For each exposed finish required.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:
a. Pisor Industries, Inc.
b. Sharpe Products.
c. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.
d. Shop fabricated
e. Wire Cloth: McNichols
f. Gratings: McNichols
2.2 METALS
A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel and Iron:
1. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn).
2. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40),
unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
3. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
4. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or
required by structural loads.
b. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.
5. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type (expanded and flattened), Class 1 (uncoated).
6. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, 2-inch woven-wire mesh, made from 3/8-inch
nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510
7. Grating: McNichols GW 75-2, HD Galvanized, Serrated
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners, unless unavoidable or standard for railings indicated.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 3
1. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for
electrodeposited zinc coating.
B. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six
times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed
when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488.
C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
D. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.
E. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79.
F. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying with
ASTM C 1107; or water-resistant, nonshrink anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer
for exterior use.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with design, dimensions, and details indicated, but not
less than that required to support structural loads.
B. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
C. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
D. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
E. Form curves by bending in jigs to produce uniform curvature; maintain cross section of member
throughout bend without cracking or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces.
F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Woven-Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from woven-wire mesh crimped into -
1/2-metal channel frames wide enough to accept Woven Wire Mesh.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Steel and Iron:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 4
1. Woven Wire Mesh Railings: Powder coated (80 – 100 microns thick), color selection by
Architect
2. Shop-Primed Steel Finish: Prepare to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning" and apply primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation.
1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/32 inch in 3 feet
2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5
mm in 3 m).
B. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into preset steel pipe sleeves or formed or core-drilled
holes and grouting annular space.
C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges.
D. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and
anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts.
E. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets.
1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt
2. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs.
F. Adjusting and Cleaning:
1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting.
2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05521
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ORNAMENTAL METAL 05700 - 1
SECTION 05700 - ORNAMENTAL METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes custom ornamental metal items:
1. Extension of fireman’s pole
2. Miscellaneous metal trim for siding
B. See Section 05521 for Pipe and Tube railings"Ornamental Railings" for ornamental metal
railings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation. Indicate materials, finishes,
fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
C. Patterns, Models, or Plaster Castings: For each custom casting required.
D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Ornamental Mechanical Grilles:
a. Architectural Grille; Div. of Giumenta Corporation.
b. Harrington & King Perforating Co.
c. Reggio Registers Co., Inc.
d. Register & Grille Manufacturing Co., Inc.
e. Shop fabticated
2. Metal-Clad Doors:
a. Dawson Metal Co., Inc.
b. InKan Limited.
c. Krieger Steel Products Co.
d. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ORNAMENTAL METAL 05700 - 2
3. Ornamental Castings and Forgings:
a. Allen Architectural Metals.
b. Alloy Casting Co., Inc.
c. Architectural Iron Company, Inc.
d. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc.
e. Braun, J. G. Company; a division of the Wagner Companies.
f. Classic Iron Supply/Craft.
g. Colonial Castings, Inc.
h. Cullar/La Cuesta.
i. Dempsey, Inc.
j. Historical Arts & Casting, Inc.
k. Indital USA.
l. Lawler Foundry Corporation.
m. Morrow, Frank Company.
n. Olin Wrought Iron.
o. OMC Industries, Inc.
p. Robinson Iron.
q. Tennessee Fabricating Co.
r. Texas Metal Industries, Inc.
s. TT Triebenbacher - Bavarian Iron Works Co.
t. Universal Manufacturing Co., Inc.
u. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
4. Stainless-Steel Wire Rope and Fittings:
a. Cable Connection (The).
b. Esmet, Inc.
c. Feeney Wire Rope & Rigging.
d. Hayn Enterprises, LLC.
e. Johnson, C. Sherman, Co., Inc.
f. Loos & Co., Inc.; Cableware Division.
g. Ronstan International Inc.
h. SAVA Industries.
i. Seco South, Inc.
j. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
2.2 METALS
A. Aluminum: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher with
strength and durability properties not less than that of alloy and temper designated below.
1. Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5/T52.
2. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy [3003-H14] [5005-H32] [6061-
T6].
3. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 (ASTM B 247M), alloy 6061-T6.
4. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy A356.0-T6.
B. Copper Alloys:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ORNAMENTAL METAL 05700 - 3
1. Extruded Shapes, Bronze: ASTM B 455, alloy UNS No. C38500 (architectural bronze).
2. Extruded Shapes, Brass: ASTM B 249/B 249M, alloy UNS No. C36000 (free-cutting
brass).
3. Extruded Shapes, Nickel Silver: ASTM B 151/B 151M, alloy UNS No. C74500.
4. Castings, Bronze: [Composition bronze castings complying with ASTM B 62, alloy
UNS No. C83600 (85-5-5-5 or No. 1 composition commercial red brass)] [or] [sand
castings complying with ASTM B 584, alloy UNS No. C86500 (No. 1 manganese
bronze)].
5. Castings, Brass: Sand castings complying with ASTM B 584, alloy UNS No. C85200
(high-copper yellow brass).
6. Castings, Nickel Silver: ASTM B 584, alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel
bronze).
7. Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars; Bronze: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000
(muntz metal, 60 percent copper).
8. Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars; Brass: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C26000
(cartridge brass, 70 percent copper).
9. Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars; Copper: ASTM B 152/B 152M, alloy UNS No. C11000
(electrolytic tough pitch copper) or UNS No. C12200 (phosphorous deoxidized, high
residual phosphorous copper).
C. Stainless Steel:
1. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT [304] [316] [316L].
2. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade [CF 8 or CF 20] [CF 8M or CF 3M].
3. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type [304] [316] [316L].
4. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type [304] [316] [316L].
5. Wire Rope: [1-by-19] [7-by-7] [7-by-19] <Insert configuration> wire rope made from
wire complying with ASTM A 492, Type 316.
D. Steel and Iron:
1.
Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
2. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
3. Castings: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, or malleable iron,
ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Steel Sheet, Cold Rolled: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or
structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), exposed.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Same basic metal as fastened metal; concealed, unless otherwise indicated, with
Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners.
B. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times
the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined per ASTM E 488.
C. Wire-Rope Fittings: Fabricated from stainless steel and with strength equal to minimum
breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ORNAMENTAL METAL 05700 - 4
D. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
E. Brazing Rods: For copper alloys, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal
to be brazed and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.
F. Lacquer for Copper Alloys: Clear, air-drying,[ waterborne] acrylic lacquer specially
developed for coating copper-alloy products.
G. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 [painting Sections.] [Section
"High-Performance Coatings."]
H. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79.
I. Zinc-Rich Primer: Comply with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat.
J. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer compatible with finish paint
systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-Paint 5.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Form ornamental metal true to line and level with true curves and accurate angles and surfaces.
Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris.
B. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that will be
exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
C. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop [welding] [and] [brazing]. Clean
exposed [welded] [and] [brazed] joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Protect mechanical finishes by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Aluminum Finishes: Designations are as established by the Aluminum Association.
1. Clear Anodic Finish: Class [II, AA-M12C22A31] [I, AA-M12C22A41] complying
with AAMA 611.
2. Color Anodic Finish: Class [II, AA-M12C22A32/A34] [I, AA-M12C22A42/A44]
complying with AAMA 611.
a. Color: [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black].
3. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x, with thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel
primer/topcoat organic coating system complying with AAMA 2603 except with a
minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm), medium gloss.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ORNAMENTAL METAL 05700 - 5
a. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match sample] [As
selected from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>.
4. Siliconized Polyester Finish: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel
topcoat; with a dry film thickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 mm) for primer and 0.8 mil (0.02
mm) for topcoat.
a. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match
sample] [As selected from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color and gloss>.
5. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x, fluoropolymer thermocured system
with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride
resin by weight; complying with [AAMA 2604] [AAMA 2605].
a. System: [Two] [Three] [Four] coat.
b. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match
sample] [As selected from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color and gloss>.
C. Copper-Alloy Finishes: Designations are system established for designating copper-alloy finish
systems defined in NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products."
1. Buffed Finish: M21 (smooth specular).
2. Hand-Rubbed Finish: M31-M34 (directionally textured, hand rubbed).
3. Medium-Satin Finish: M32 (directionally textured, medium satin).
4. Fine-Matte Finish: M42 (nondirectional finish, fine matte).
5. Buffed Finish, Lacquered: M21-O6x (smooth specular).
6. Hand-Rubbed Finish, Lacquered: M31-M34-O6x (directionally textured, hand rubbed).
7. Medium-Satin Finish, Lacquered: M32-O6x (directionally textured, medium satin).
8. Fine-Matte Finish, Lacquered: M42-O6x (nondirectional finish, fine matte).
a. Clear, Organic Coating: Two coats lacquer specified for copper alloys; total
thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm).
9. Statuary Conversion Coating over Satin Finish: M32-C55.
a. Color: Match sample.
10. Patina Conversion Coating: M36-C12-C52.
a. Color: Match sample.
11. Statuary Conversion Coating, Bright Relieved and Lacquered: M12-C55-M2x-O6x.
a. Color and Buffing: Match sample.
b. Clear, Organic Coating: Two coats lacquer specified for copper alloys; total
thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm).
12. Blackened, Bright Relieved, and Lacquered: M33-O60-M2x-O6x.
a. Blackening and Buffing: Match sample.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ORNAMENTAL METAL 05700 - 6
b. Clear, Organic Coating: Two coats lacquer specified for copper alloys; total
thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm).
D. Stainless-Steel Finishes:
1. Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B finish.
2. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4 finish.
3. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6 finish.
4. Reflective, Directional Polish: No. 7 finish.
5. Mirrorlike Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No. 8 finish.
E. Steel and Iron Finishes:
1. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
a. Hot-dip galvanize steel and iron hardware to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2. Factory-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces and apply air-dried primer to provide a
minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm) to exposed surfaces and to concealed,
nongalvanized surfaces.
a. Preparation for Galvanized Metal: After galvanizing, clean and treat with metallic-
phosphate pretreatment.
b. Preparation for Uncoated Ferrous Metal: Comply with SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
3. Powder-Coat Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat ferrous metal to comply with resin
manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Preparation of Uncoated Ferrous Metal: Comply with SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
b. Preparation of Galvanized Metal: Thoroughly removing grease, dirt, oil, flux, and
other foreign matter.
c. Treat prepared metal with metallic-phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal
surfaces.
d. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film
thickness not less than 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).
e. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match sample] [As
selected from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing to in-place construction.
B.
Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. Fit exposed connections
accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated, with uniform reveals and
spaces for sealants and joint fillers.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ORNAMENTAL METAL 05700 - 7
C. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with
such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide
new units as required.
D. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses.
E. Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation. Remove
protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
END OF SECTION 05700
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood framing.
2. Wood supports.
3. Wood blocking.
4. Wood cants.
5. Wood nailers.
6. Wood furring.
7. Wood grounds.
8. Wood sheathing.
9. Wood subflooring.
10. Wood underlayment.
11. Plywood backing panels.
12. Building wrap.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product indicated.
1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements. Fire retardant is
required only at the South east corner of the builsding
B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following:
1. Treated wood.
2. Engineered wood products.
3. Foam-plastic sheathing.
4. Power-driven fasteners.
5. Powder-actuated fasteners.
6. Expansion anchors.
7. Metal framing anchors.
8. Building wrap.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2,
"Principles and Criteria":
1. Dimension lumber.
2. Timber and miscellaneous lumber.
3. Engineered wood products.
4. Plywood.
5. Oriented strand board.
6. Fiberboard wall sheathing.
7. Particleboard underlayment.
8. Hardboard underlayment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-
inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current
model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in
effect for Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Meet or exceed those indicated per manufacturer's published
values determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing
agency.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3
C. Wood Structural Panels:
1. Plywood: DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated].
2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
3. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial."
2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood)],
except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from
liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and
15 percent for plywood.
C. Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches (460 mm) above grade.
4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, provide materials that comply
with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify
fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber
Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated
wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664, for lumber and ASTM D 5516, for plywood.
2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
3. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
4. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. General: Of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee
National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 4
B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade and any of the
following species:
1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
2. Eastern softwoods; NELMA.
3. Northern species; NLGA.
4. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
C. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade and of the
following species:
1. Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (north), or Douglas fir-south; NLGA, WCLIB, or
WWPA.
D. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Any species of machine stress-rated
dimension lumber with a grade of not less than 2400f-2.0E.
E. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Any species and grade with a modulus of
elasticity of at least 1,600,000 psi (8970 MPa) and an extreme fiber stress in bending of at least
900 psi (5.86 MPa) for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness and 12-inch nominal (286-mm
actual) width for single-member use.
F. Exposed Framing: Hand select material for uniformity of appearance and freedom from
characteristics that would impair finish appearance.
1. Species and Grade: As indicated above for load-bearing construction of same type.
2.6 TIMBER AND MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. For timbers of 5-inch nominal (117-mm actual) size and thicker, provide material complying
with the following requirements:
1. Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (north), or Douglas fir-south;
Select Structural or No. 1 grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
B. Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the
following:
1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
2. Blocking. (min. 8 linear feet per bathroom, kitchen min 30feet)
3. Cants.
4. Nailers.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
7. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 5
2.7 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Composite of wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to
member lengths, manufactured with exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
Allowable design values determined according to ASTM D 5456.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Boise Cascade Corporation.
b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
c. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation.
d. Pacific Woodtech Corp.
e. Trus Joist MacMillan.
f. Union Camp Corp.; Building Products Division.
g. Willamette Industries, Inc.
h.
2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi (19.7 MPa)for 12-inch nominal-
(286-mm actual-) depth members.
3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1,900,000 psi (13 800 MPa).
B. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units complying with APA PRI-400; depths and performance
ratings not less than those indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Boise Cascade Corporation.
b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
c. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation.
d. Pacific Woodtech Corp.
e. Poutrelles International Inc.
f. Standard Structures Inc.
g. Stark Truss Company, Inc.
h. Superior Wood Systems, Inc.
i. Trus Joist MacMillan.
j. Union Camp Corp.; Building Products Division.
k. Willamette Industries, Inc.
2. Web Material: Plywood, Exterior grade.
3. Structural Capacities: Establish and monitor structural capacities according to
ASTM D 5055.
4. Trademark: Factory mark I-joists with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth,
joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and I-joist compliance with APA standard.
2.8 SHEATHING
A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 6
C. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 79/C 79M, with water-resistant material
incorporated into core and with water-repellent paper bonded to core's face, back, and long
edges.
1. Manufacturers:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. G-P Gypsum Corporation.
c. National Gypsum Company.
d. United States Gypsum Co.
e.
2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick.
3. Edge and End Configuration: V-shaped,.
D. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P
Gypsum Corp.
2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick.
a.
E. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I
F. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.
2.9 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT
A. Plywood Subflooring: Exterior, Structural I
B. Plywood Underlayment for Ceramic Tile: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, 5/8 inch (15.9
mm) thick, for ceramic tile set in epoxy morter
2.10 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged,
fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm)
thick.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners:
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high
relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.
2. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 7
3. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat
washers.
B. Metal Framing Anchors: Made from hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
b. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
c. Harlen Metal Products, Inc.
d. KC Metals Products, Inc.
e. Silver Metal Products, Inc.
f. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc.
g. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
h. United Steel Products Company, Inc.
2. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show
compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in
effect for Project.
3. Allowable Design Loads: Meet or exceed those indicated per manufacturer's published
values determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing
agency.
C. Building Paper: Asphalt-saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15
asphalt felt), unperforated.
D. Building Wrap: Air-retarder sheeting made from polyolefins; cross-laminated films, woven
strands, or spun-bonded fibers; coated or uncoated; with or without perforations; and complying
with ASTM E 1677, Type I.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Celotex Corporation (The); Building Products Division.
b. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company).
c. Parsec, Inc.
d. Raven Industries, Inc.
e. Reemay, Inc.
f. Simplex Products.
g. Sto-Cote Products, Inc.
h. Tenneco Building Products.
2. Thickness: Not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm).
3. Permeance: Not less than 10 perms (575 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).
4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less per ASTM E 84.
5. Allowable Exposure Time: Not less than three months.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 8
E. Building Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building wrap
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.
F. Sheathing Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing
and recommended by sheathing manufacturer for use with type of sheathing required.
G. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill
sealer; 1-inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
H. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 or
[ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both
adhesive and panel manufacturers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber
and plywood.
C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof
Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in the Uniform Building Code.
D. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and
fill holes with wood filler.
E. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless
otherwise indicated.
F. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and
applications indicated.
1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 9
H. Fastening Methods:
1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: Glue and nail to wood framing.
2. Subflooring: Glue and nail to wood framing.
3. Sheathing: Nail to wood framing.
4. Underlayment: Nail to subflooring.
5. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports.
I. Apply building paper horizontally with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap and 6-inch (150-mm) end lap;
fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-
inch (102-mm) overlap.
J. Building Wrap Application: Cover wall sheathing with building wrap as indicated. Cover
upstanding flashing with 4-inch (102-mm) overlap. Seal seams, edges, and penetrations with
tape.
K. Apply sheathing tape to joints between sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing.
Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing.
END OF SECTION 06100
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 1
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Standing and running trim, interior and exterior
2. Stairs and railings.
3. Paneling.
4. Siding.
5. See Section 07460 for Fiber Cement Siding
6. Metal railing top cap
7. Installation of weather barrier
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of factory-fabricated product and process indicated.
B. Samples: For the following:
1. Each type of finish required.
2. Each type of siding required.
3. Ipe
4. Weather barrier
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2,
"Principles and Criteria":
1. Standing and running trim,interior and exterior.
2. Stairs and railings.
3. Siding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," for
lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. ForWestern Red Cedar siding comply with
WRCLA standards for product and grade specified
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 2
B. Softwood Plywood: Comply with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and
Industrial Plywood."
C. Preservative Treatment: Comply with NWWDA I.S. 4 for exterior finish carpentry to receive
water-repellent preservative treatment.
D. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Where indicated, use materials impregnated with fire-retardant
chemicals per AWPA C20; exterior type or interior Type A as required.Area limited to south
east corner of building.
E. Ipe- 12% maximum moisture content, size indicated on plans
2.2 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Exterior Standing and Running Trim: Finished lumber and moldings, including Facia, door and
window trim.
1. Species and Grade: Youth grown tight grain Western SPF, RealTrim (Rough sawn) by
Woodtone pre primed with alkyd – oil primer (5 ½ mils thick) in width and thickness
indicated on drawings Application apples to trim in Wood Siding and Fiber Cement
Siding.
B. Interior Standing and Running Trim: Finished lumber and moldings.
1. Species and Grade or Cut: 1X nominal S4S Select, eastern white pine; NELMA or B &
Btr. Select or Supreme, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; WWPA
C. Wood Molding Patterns: Stock moldings made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7 and
graded under WMMPA WM 4.
1. Base: Vinyl – see Cash Allownaces
2. Casing: WM 366 (featheredge casing) S4S, 1X3
3. Shoe Mold: Clear, kiln-dried red oak; WM 126, 1/2-by-3/4-inch (13-by-19-mm) quarter-
round shoe.
4. Moldings for Transparent Finish: N-Grade.
5. Moldings for Painted Finish: P-Grade.
D. Shelving: 3/4-inch (19-mm) particleboard shelving with radiused and filled front edge
STAIRS AND RAILINGS
E. Interior Stair Treads (West Stair only): , with half-round nosing.
2.3 SIDING
A. Lumber Siding: Kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20, in size and pattern
indicated.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 3
1. Species and Grade: Western red cedar graded by WRCLA, grade for siding: A Clear
grading Rule Paragraph NLGA 200b and WCLIB 102c. Rough (undressed, 5/4 stock, 1
1/8” finished thickness.
2. Note steel corner beads indicated on drawings
3. Fiber Cement Siding- see Section 07460
B. Soffit: Select Tight knot 1X6 double bevel tounge and groove S4S Douglas Fir .
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails of stainless steel.
B. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: steel smooth shank finish nails
C. Weather Barrier: Dupont Tyvek Commercial Wrap installed in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation, for a minimum of 24 hours.
B. Prime and backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Comply with
requirements for surface preparation and application in Division 9 Section "Painting."
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
shims where required for alignment. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work.
Refinish and prime and seal cuts.
B. Consult Architect for nailing pattern for exposed exterior fasteners.
C. Use full length Trim Boards, bevel joint where joint is required. Stagger joints in multi piece
facias minimum 24” Note trim pattern for exterior trim on drawings. Bevel top of head and sill
for flashing installation, prime cuts with suppliers primer.
D. Interior trim to be picture framed
E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length
pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Stagger joints in adjacent and related trim.
Cope at returns and miter at corners.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 4
F. Siding: Install siding and flashing according to manufacturer's written recommendations and as
indicated on drawings Stain all surfaces that are not exposed for final stain application. Do not
allow nails to penetrate more than one thickness of siding, unless otherwise recommended by
siding manufacturer. Seal joints at inside and outside corners and at trim locations.
G. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual
defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
H. Fire treated Lumber. Use identical size and pattern where Frie Treated Lumber is indicated on
Drawings (siding , Facia and soffit at limited location (south east corner)
I. Assure siding substrate is appropriate for siding installation and the exterior protective
membrane and flexible window flashings are installed in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
J. Soffit: Install perpendicular to eave at rake edges. Install parallel to eave at drip edges. Miter
transitions
END OF SECTION 06200
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 1
SECTION 07131 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheet waterproofing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.
B. Shop Drawings: Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations,
inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination
conditions.
C. Product test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install
manufacturer's products.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a
damp or wet substrate.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain
watertight for period of [three] [five] <Insert number> years after date of Substantial
Completion.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RUBBERIZED-ASPHALT SHEET WATERPROOFING
A. Rubberized-Asphalt Sheet: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils
(1.4 mm) of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, polyethylene film with
release liner on adhesive side[and formulated for application with primer or surface
conditioner that complies with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction].
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. American Hydrotech, Inc.; VM 75.
b. American Permaquik Inc.; PQ 7100.
c. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.; CCW 701.
d. Cetco; Envirosheet.
e. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Bituthene.
f. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Mel-Rol.
g. T. C. Miradri; Miradri.
h. Monsey Bakor; Elasto-Seal 2000.
i. Pecora Corporation; Duramem 700-SM.
j. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 650.
k. Progress Unlimited, Inc.; Plastiwrap 60.
l. Tamko Roofing Products, Inc.; TW-60.
m. <Insert manufacturer; product.>
2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Primer: Liquid [waterborne] [solvent-borne] primer recommended for substrate by
manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.
B. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by
manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.
C. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two component, liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low
viscosity.
D. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating.
E.
Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended
by waterproofing manufacturer.
F. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick,
predrilled at 9-inch (225-mm) centers.
G. Protection Course: Semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure
laminated between 2 asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and nominal thickness [1/8 inch (3 mm)]
[1/4 inch (6 mm)].
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 3
H. Protection Course: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation and faced
both sides with plastic film, nominal thickness 1/4 inch (6 mm), with compressive strength of
15 psi (103 kPa) per ASTM D 1621 and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.4 percent
per ASTM C 272.
I. Protection Course: Molded-polystyrene board insulation, ASTM C 578, Type I, 0.90-lb/cu. ft.
(15-kg/cu. m) minimum density, 1-inch (25-mm) minimum thickness.
2.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS
A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Division 2 Section "Subdrainage."
B. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite
subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an
apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 (0.21-mm) sieve laminated to 1 side and a
polymeric film bonded to the other side of a 3-dimensional, nonbiodeg radable, molded-plastic-
sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft. (112 to 188 L/min. per m).
C. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface
drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not
exceeding No. 40 (0.43-mm) sieve laminated to 1 side of a 3-dimensional, nonbiodeg radable,
molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm per ft. (35
L/min. per m).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.
B. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids.
C. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints
and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
D. Bridge and cover [isolation joints] [expansion joints] [and] discontinuous deck-to-wall and
deck-to-deck joints with overlapping sheet strips.
1. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second sheet
strip to first and overlap to substrate.
E. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.
F. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through
waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 4
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Install self-adhering sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations in ASTM D 6135.
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry.
C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and
maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- (64-mm-) minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal
seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
D. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and
contraction joints.
E. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending
in reglets with mastic or sealant.
F. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit
and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheets extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond
repaired areas in all directions.
G. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements,
repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
H. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane before starting
subsequent construction operations.
3.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Use adhesives [or mechanical fasteners] that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and
ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during
subsequent construction.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected horizontal membrane.
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 07131
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade.
2. Foundation wall insulation (supporting backfill).
3. Cavity wall insulation.
4. Concealed building insulation.
5. Exposed building insulation.
6. Loose-fill building insulation.
7. Vapor retarders.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Product test reports.
C. Research/evaluation reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84
for surface-burning characteristics and other methods indicated with product, by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards and, for preformed units, in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, , with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2
C. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class [1 or 2] [1] [2],
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively, based
on tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches (101 mm).
D. Cellular Glass Insulation: ASTM C 552 Type unfaced insulation passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
E. Mineral-fiber blanket insulation consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock
wool:
1. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-
spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
2. Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A; Category 1,
faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder
membrane on one face.
2.2 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an
inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less
than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft. (12 kg/100 sq. m), with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm (2.9
ng/Pa x s x sq. m).
B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors with Washers: Plate or Angle formed from
perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm)
square, welded to projecting steel spindle with a diameter of 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) and length
capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position with 1-1/2- inch- (38-
mm-) square or diameter self-locking washers complying with the following:
1. Washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled
edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not
less than in place.
2. Where anchors are located in ceiling plenums attic spaces provide capped self-locking
washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap.
B. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle
of insulation anchor to maintain 1-inch (25-mm) air space between face of insulation and
substrate to which anchor is attached.
C. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to
substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions
applicable to products and application indicated. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to
envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with
insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
B. Install perimeter insulation on vertical surfaces by setting units in adhesive.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 40 inches below exterior
grade line.
2. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by
applying protection board set in adhesive.
C. Protect top surface of perimeter underslab insulation from damage during concrete work by
applying protection board.
D. Installation of General Building Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrates by method
indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is
indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide
permanent placement and support of units.
1. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive,
mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place.
Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant.
2. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
a. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of
insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
3. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the
following requirements:
a. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members.
If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce
a snug fit between ends.
b. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
4. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320
and as follows:
a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling
flanges to sides of framing members.
b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of
adjacent blanket to produce airtight installation after concealing finish material is
in place.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4
5. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type
insulation anchors as follows:
a. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive
according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions.
b. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between
concrete substrate and insulation.
c. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into
position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining
washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness.
d. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped
washers to tips of spindles.
6. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window
frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold
insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of
dimension indicated between insulation and glass.
7. Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a
density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).
E. Installation of Vapor Retarders: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected
from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as
indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including
those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
1. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall
studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of
wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
2. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape according
to vapor-retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations
with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid
substrates.
3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as
recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
4. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating
vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating
objects and vapor retarder.
5. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other
work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
6. Install 2 Layers of Vapor retarder beneath new concrete slabs
END OF SECTION 07210
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 1
SECTION 07311 - ASPHALT SHINGLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Asphalt shingles.
2. Felt underlayment.
3. Self-adhering sheet underlayment.
4. Ridge vents.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples: For asphalt shingles ridge and hip cap shingles, and ridge vent.
C. Product test reports.
D. Research/evaluation reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles ridge vents felt underlayment and self-
adhering sheet underlayment through one source from a single asphalt shingle manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingle and related roofing materials with
the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per
test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof
slopes indicated.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
asphalt shingles that fail in materials within specified warranty period.
1. Material Warranty Period: unlimited years from date of Substantial Completion, per
factory warranty from Ceratinteed
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work are not limited to, products specified.
2.2 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES
A. Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction,
glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing.
1. Products:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; <Grand Manor, Color: Black Pearl.>
B. Multitab-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule
surfaced, and self-sealing.
1. Tab Arrangement: as provided by specified product.
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felts: ASTM D 226 or ASTM D 4869, Type II, asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated
60 lb/ square to the highest standard provided by the manufacturer .
B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 45-mil-
thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS-modified
asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied Winterguard provided by
Certainteed.
2.4 RIDGE VENTS
A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard rigid section high-density polypropylene or other
UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips and with external
deflector baffles; for use under ridge shingles to the highest standard recommended by
Certainteed.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.
B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized steel
wire shingle nails, (do not use Zinc coating) minimum 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) diameter, barbed or
smooth (as recommended by shingle manufacturer shank, sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8-
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 3
inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into
solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) through OSB or plywood sheathing.
1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as
flashing.
C. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire with low
profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch (25-mm) minimum diameter or as recommended by
shingle manufacturer
2.6 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim."
1. Sheet Metal: Copper or Anodized aluminum (matching adjacent roof color)
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other
characteristics of item in accordance with Certainteed installation instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
1. Install two layers of felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet
underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3
inches (75 mm) in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches (150
mm) over self-adhering sheet underlayment in accordance with manufacturer’s
.recommendations
B. Double-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install double layers of felt underlayment on roof deck
perpendicular to roof slope in parallel courses. Install a 19-inch- (485-mm-) wide starter course
at eaves and completely cover with full-width second course. Install succeeding courses
lapping previous courses 19 inches (485 mm) in shingle fashion. Lap ends a minimum of 6
inches (150 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm).
Fasten with felt underlayment or roofing nails in accordance with manufacturers instructions
1. Install felt underlayment on roof sheathing not covered by self-adhering sheet
underlayment. Lap edges over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches
(75 mm) in direction to shed water. in accordance with manufacturers instructions
C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on
roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer
if applicable. Install at locations indicated, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less
than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm). Lap ends not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600
mm) between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days.Install in
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 4
strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions or the requirements below whichever
are greater. Assure chemical compatibility between products that interface.
D. Install Self adhering Sheet underlayment from the eave to a point six feet up thee roof from the
exterior face of an exterior wall, three feet each side of a closed or open valley, three feet below
and above any roof to wall intersection, and three feet from any rake edge
3.2 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt
Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer’s instruction. Report any contrictions to
Architect."
3.3 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION
A. Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in
ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in
NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."
B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with self-
sealing strip face up at roof edge in accordance with manufacturer ‘s instructions.
1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch (13 mm) over fascia at eaves and rakes.
C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck
with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform
exposure.
D. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of the number of roofing nails located according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Closed-Cut Valleys: Extend asphalt shingle strips from one side of valley beyond center of
valley in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions Use one-piece shingle strips without
joints in the valley. Fasten with extra nail in upper end of shingle. Install asphalt shingle
courses from other side of valley and cut back to a straight line short of valley centerline in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Trim upper concealed corners of cut-back shingle
strips.
1. Do not nail asphalt shingles within 6 inches (150 mm) of valley center or in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions..
2. Set trimmed, concealed-corner asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide bed of asphalt
roofing cement or in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions..
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 5
F. Open Valleys: Cut and fit asphalt shingles at open valleys, trimming upper concealed corners
of shingle strips. Maintain uniform width of exposed open valley in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.from highest to lowest point.
1. Set valley edge of asphalt shingles in a bed of asphalt roofing cement in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions..
2. Do not nail asphalt shingles to metal open valley flashings.
G. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.
H. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle
exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds.
Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions..
END OF SECTION 07311
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 1
SECTION 07411 - METAL ROOF SHINGLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Factory-formed and field-assembled, Copper coated Stainless steel metal roof shingles
and accessories .
B. \PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
C. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift resistance class indicated.
D. Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592
1. Wind Loads: Minimum design wind pressures of 50 lbf/sq. ft. acting inward or outward.
2. Snow Loads: 100 lbf/sq. ft..
3. Deflection Limits: Vertical deflections no greater than 1/240 of the span.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of metal roof panel and accessory indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal roof panels, including plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim,
flashings, closures, and accessories.
2. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
C. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating metal roof panel installation with
penetrations and roof-mounted items.
D. Samples: For each exposed finish.
E. Material certificates.
F. Field quality-control inspection reports.
G. Product test reports.
H. Maintenance data.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 2
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing metal roof panel assemblies
and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Twenty Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of
factory-applied finishes within specified 25 year warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHINGLE MATERIALS
A. Copper Coated Stainless Steel , 28 ga. by Fine Metal (801 462 5264)
B. Panel Sealants:
1. As recommended by manufacturer.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 3
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick minimum, consisting
of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified
asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended
by underlayment manufacturer.
1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C); ASTM D 1970.
2. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C);
ASTM D 1970.
3. Ultra by W R Grace or Carlisle WIP 300T High Temperature or equal
4. Slip Sheet: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.4 METAL ROOF PANELS
A. Diamond shape (72 standard angle , size 8) Factory-formed, designed to be field assembled.
Include accessories required for weathertight installation. Single source for all accessories
including but not limited to drip edge , vented ridge cap, valley flashings and snow hooks
1. Manufacturers:
a. Fine Metal.
b. Or Equal approved by Architect
c. Exterior Finish: Copper over Stainless Steel
d. Color: natural copper
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Roof Shingle Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel
assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants,
gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Single source for all accessories including but not limited to drip edge , vented ridge cap,
valley flashings and snow hooks Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges,
fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels.
2. Clips: As recommended by manufacturer. As recommended by manufacturer.
3.
4. Cleats: As recommended by manufacturer.
5.
6. Closure Strips: As recommended by manufacturer. Provide closure strips where
indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
B. Flashing and Trim: . Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to
provide finished appearance. Locations include eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings,
ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal
roof panels.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 4
C. Gutters for Metal Shingle Roofing: OG Formed from 20 ga. thick, copper -coated stainless
steel sheet. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other
special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections, sized
according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced
36 inches (900 mm) o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide bronze, copper, or
aluminum wire ball strainers at outlets. Finish gutters to match metal roof shingles.Coordinate
with installation of electric heat tape.
D. Downspouts: Not required at metal shingle roof. Use open end of gutter on south end of gutter
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent
possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated
performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles
and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Where indicated, fabricate metal roof panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or
separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that
will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.
C. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal,
and other characteristics of item indicated.
D. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
1. Substrate Board: Install substrate boards over roof sheathing as required by
underlayment or Metal Shingle Manufacturer
2. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim as required by Metal Shingle
Manufacturer
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Polyethylene Sheet Underlayment: Install polyethylene sheet on roof sheathing under metal
roof panels. Use adhesive for anchorage. Apply at locations indicated on Drawings, in shingle
fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).
B. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment and building-paper slip sheet on roof sheathing
under metal roof panels. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply at locations indicated
on Drawings, in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50
mm).
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 5
C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on
roof sheathing under metal roof panels. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment
manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low
temperatures. Apply over entire roof where Metal Shingles are installed, in shingle fashion to
shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm)
between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 6 inches (90 mm).Extend underlayment into
gutter trough. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
D. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
3.3 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by
applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent
separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies.
1. .
3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim,
copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,
and similar items.
2. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions,
and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3. Install Snow Hooks provided by Fine metal on north and west faces of Metal Shingle
Roof based on manufacturer’s instructions and engineered spacing pattern
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal are installed,
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of
metal roof shingle installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel
manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 07411
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SIDING 07460 - 1
SECTION 07460 – FIBER CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fiber-cement siding
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: Full-size units of each type of siding and soffit in each color, texture, and pattern
required.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of siding required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SIDING
A. Fiber-Cement Siding: Siding made from fiber-cement board that complies with ASTM C 1186,
Type A, Grade II; is classified as noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; and
has a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products are limited to, the
following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Nichia Sierra Premium Shake, prefinished with standard color factory applied
stain>.
3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Premium Shake, prefinished with standard color factory applied stain.
4. Horizontal Pattern: with min. 1 ½ overlap
5. Color and Texture: As selected from manufacturer's range (maple, caramel, or mahogany
per Architect’s selection.
2.2 SOFFIT
A. Fiber-Cement Soffit: Panels with smooth texture, installed only where indicated, partially along
south eave made from fiber-cement board that complies with ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II;
is classified as noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; and has a flame-spread
index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SIDING 07460 - 2
1. Color and Texture: Non-vented smooth soffit by JamesHardi 12” wide., primed and painted
(color selection by Architect) .
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Siding Accessories: Provide starter strips, edge trim, corner cap, and other items as
recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration.
1. Provide accessories made from same material as siding, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide accessories matching color and texture of siding, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Install 20 oz. copper panel below first course of siding where siding is within six inches (6”)
of earth. Extend copper panel six inches (6”) below finish grade. Install 60 mil ice and
water shield beneath copper panel, lace Tyvek over top of ice and water shield
B. Fasteners: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
1. Where fasteners will be exposed to view, use prefinished aluminum fasteners in color to
match item being fastened.
C. Weather Barrier: Dupont Tyvek Commercial Wrap installed in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper
sequencing.
B. Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent
requirements apply. Provide ½ “ clearance between bottom of Fiber Cement Siding and
horizontal flashing installations.
C. Install siding with mitered corners . Use polyurethane adhesive at mitered corner. Install 22 ga.
galvanized iron flashing over building corner prior to installing mitered corner application.
END OF SECTION 07460
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL ROOF PANELS 07610 - 1
SECTION 07610 – METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Prefinished, prefabricated structural standing seam roof system with
continuous interlocking machine formed field formed seams. Do not hand crimp
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 62 00: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
2. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
1. ASCE 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
2. ASTM A653: Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process.
3. ASTM A792: Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip Process.
4. ASTM C1371: Determination of Emittance of Materials Near Room Temperature Using
Portable Emissometers.
5. ASTM C1549: Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient Temperature Using a
Portable Solar Reflectometer.
6. ASTM D523: Specular Gloss.
7. ASTM E1680: Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems
8. ASTM E1592: Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
9. ASTM E1646: Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static
Air Pressure Difference.
10. ASTM E1918: Measuring Solar Reflectance of Horizontal and Low Sloped Surfaces in
the Field.
11. ASTM E1980: Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low Sloped Opaque
Surfaces.
12. ASTM E2140: Weather Penetration of Metal Roof Panel Systems by Static Water
Pressure Head.
13. CRRC-1 Method #1: Measuring Solar Reflectance of a Flat, Opaque, and Heterogeneous
Surface Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer.
14. FM Approvals Standard 4471: Class 1 Panel Roofs.
15. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
16. UL 580: Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies
17. US Environmental Protection Agency: Energy Star Reflective Roof Products
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate thickness and dimensions of parts, fastenings and anchoring methods, details
and locations of joints, transitions and other provisions necessary for thermal expansion
and contraction.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL ROOF PANELS 07610 - 2
2. Indicate locations of field- and factory-applied sealant.
C. Samples:
1. Submit two samples, 12 inches long by full panel width, showing proposed metal
thickness and seam profile.
2. Submit standard color samples of metal for Architect’s selection.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications.
E. Installer Qualifications: Submit list of completed projects, with names and contact information for
architects and contractors.
F. Test Reports: Indicating compliance of products with project requirements.
G. Warranty Documentation.
H. Insurance Documentation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Ten years' experience, minimum, in factory fabrication of metal panels.
2. Manufacturer shall carry $2,000,000 liability insurance, minimum, for metal panel system.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. Three years' experience, minimum, in application of metal roof or wall panels.
2. Five satisfactory projects with metal panel work of similar scope and complexity to Work
of this Project.
3. Installer must be approved by manufacturer in writing prior to bid. Approval document
must be included with project bid.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Agency compliant with ISO/IEC Standard 17025, or an
accredited independent agency recognized by the International Laboratory Accreditation
Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement or ANSI.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements:
1. Keep panels and accessory items dry.
2. Protect against damage and discoloration.
3. Handle panels with non-marring slings.
4. Support panels to prevent permanent deformation.
5. Store panels above ground, with one end elevated for drainage.
6. Protect panels against standing water and condensation between adjacent surfaces.
7. If panels become wet, immediately separate sheets, wipe dry with clean cloth, and keep
sheets separate for air-drying.
8. Painted panels shall be shipped with protective plastic sheeting or a strippable film
coating between panels. Remove strippable film coating prior to installation. Do not allow
strippable film coating to remain on panels in extreme heat, cold, or direct sunlight or
other UV source.
9. Do not allow panels to contact treated lumber.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL ROOF PANELS 07610 - 3
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard 25-year performance warranty, stating the
following:
1. Architectural fluorocarbon finish:
a. Will be free of fading or color change in excess of 5 Hunter delta-E units as
determined by ASTM D2244-02.
b. Will not chalk in excess of numerical rating of 8 when measured in accordance with
standard procedures specified in ASTM D4214-98 method D659.
c. Will not peel, crack, chip, or delaminate.
2. Metal substrate will not rupture, fail structurally, or perforate.
B. Installer's Warranty: Warrant panels, flashings, sealants, fasteners and accessories against
defective materials and/or workmanship, covering repairs required to maintain roof panels
watertight and weatherproof with normal usage for two years following Project Substantial
Completion date.
1. Furnish written warranty, signed by installer.
C. Weathertight Performance Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weather tight within
specified warranty period.
1. Contact AEP Span for Weather tight Warranty information and requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Products: Provide the following:
1. AEP Span, a Division of ASC Profiles, Inc.; SpanSeam-.
B. Substitution Limitations: Substitions will be considered
.
C. Performance Criteria
1. Wind Uplift: Class 90 per UL 580.
a. Panel system shall be ASTM E1592 tested under the supervision of an ANSI or
ISO/IEC accredited laboratory and the laboratory shall issue the test report.
b. Deflection Limits: Withstand wind loads with deflections no greater than 1/180 of the
span.
2. Air Infiltration: Tested in accordance with ASTM E1680.
a. 0.022 cfm per linear foot of joint at static test pressure differential of 12.00 psf.
b. 0.002 cfm per linear foot of joint at static test pressure differential of 12.00 psf.
3. Water Infiltration Under Static Pressure: Tested with sidelap sealant per ASTM E1646.
a. No leakage through panel joints at 15.00 psf.
b. No leakage through panel joints at 20.00 psf.
4. Water Penetration: No leakage through panel sideseams and endlaps after six hours
when tested according to ASTM E2140 at a static water pressure head of 6.00 inches.
5. Thermal Movements: Accommodate thermal movement without buckling, joint opening,
overstressing components, failure of connections, or other detrimental effects, through
the following temperature changes:
a. 120 degrees F, ambient.
b. 180 degrees F, material surface.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL ROOF PANELS 07610 - 4
D. Sustainability Characteristics:
a. Provide
Energy
Star
qualified product for slope indicated in Drawings.
b. Solar reflective index (SRI): Not less than 29per ASTM E1980.
c. Reflectance and Emissivity:
1) Solar Reflectance: Not less than 0.25per ASTM test methods C1549 or
E1918, or CRRC-1 Method #1.
2) Thermal Emissivity: Not less than 0.75per ASTM C1371.
2. Shipping Distance: Provide panels manufactured at the following factory:
a. Fontana, California 92335
b. Tacoma, Washington 98421
E. Manufacturing Characteristics: Provide panels complying with provisions of Buy American Act
41 U.S. C 10a - 10d.
2.2 PANELS
A. Panels: AEP Span, a Division of ASC Profiles, Inc.; Preformed Metal Standing Seam Roofing –
Span-Lok hp (SL2HP212, SL2HP216), Curved Span-Lok (SL2C216), SpanSeam (SPS2216),
and.
1. Material: Steel conforming to ASTM A792.
a. 22 Gauge: Yield strength 50,000 psi; with aluminum-zinc alloy coating conforming to
ASTM A792, Class AZ50.
2. Panel Width and Pattern:Sixteen (16) inches .
a. 12-inch panel width, flat pan.
3. Panel Seam Height: 2 inches.
* *Dimensions are approximate.
4. Panel Finish: Provide primer and top finish coat on exposed faces; provide primer and
backer coat on concealed faces of panels.
a. DuraTech® 5000: Polyvinylidine Fluoride, full 70 percent Kynar 500®or Hylar
5000®, consisting of a baked-on 0.15-0.20 mil corrosion resistant primer and a
baked-on 0.70-0.80 mil finish coat with a specular gloss of 8 to 15 when tested in
accordance with ASTM D523 at 60 degrees.
b. Panel Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
5. Seam Sealant: Factory apply high-grade butyl mastic sealant within the confines of
panel’s female leg, designed to seal against adjacent male panel leg.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL ROOF PANELS 07610 - 5
2.3 SUBSTRATES
Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick minimum, consisting of slip-
resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt
adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C); ASTM D 1970.
Low Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C);
ASTM D 1970.
Ultra by W R Grace or Carlisle WIP 300T High Temperature or equal
Slip Sheet: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.4 CLIPS AND FASTENERS
A. Clips: Provide clip designed to allow panels to thermally expand and contract. Clip shall
incorporate a self-centering feature to allow 1 inch of movement in both directions along panel
length. Clip type shall be selected to meet positive and negative pressures as specified.
1. Sealant: Factory-installed sealant to provide continuity of seal at clip locations.
B. Bearing Plate: Designed with tabs to attached clip base to bearing plate on the ground, prior to
installation.
C. Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard #12 - 14 by 1 1/4 inch long self-drilling, hex head drive
screws for metal; noncorrosive base material. In accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations
D. ACCESSORIES
E. Trims and Flashings: Material, metal thickness, and finish to match panels. Profiles indicated in
Drawings.
1. Provide manufacturer’s standard accessories and other items essential to completeness
of standing seam roof installation.
F. Panel Penetration Flashings: As recommended by panel manufacturer; designed to provide
sufficient movement to prevent creation of points of fixity at penetrations.
G. Sealant for Field Application: high grade non-curing butyl or curing urethane sealant as
recommended by panel manufacturer. Do not use sealant containing asphalt. [ee Section
07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" Assure chemical compatibility with other products that interface
sealants.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication, General:
1. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings or specified herein, fabricate panels in continuous
lengths and fabricate flashings and accessories in longest practical lengths. Contact AEP
Span if panel lengths required 77 feet or longer.
2. Panels shall be factory correctively-leveled.
B. Panels:
1. Provide panels in full length from ridge to eave when possible.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL ROOF PANELS 07610 - 6
2. Where single length panels are not practical, provide mated swaged panels for positive
joint end laps, shingled to accommodate water run-off (fabricated with overlap in direction
of water flow).
3. Roof panels shall have flush horizontal and vertical surfaces to facilitate sealing at
terminations. Panel configurations which create voids and requiring supplemental closure
devices shall not be considered acceptable.
4. Engineer panels to use concealed anchors that permit expansion and contraction, except
at eaves, end laps, ridges, valleys, hips and gables.
C. Seams:
1. Panel seams shall interlock entire length of seam.
2. Design standing seam to lock up and resist joint disengagement during design wind uplift
conditions as calculated according to local building codes.
3. Provide pre-installed sealant within confines of panel’s female leg to aid in resistance of
leaks and provide panel-to-panel seal while allowing expansion and contraction
movement.
4. Seams shall be continuously locked or crimped together by mechanical means during
installation. Seaming tools shall be sourced from manufacturer’s recommended vendor.
D. Fabrication Tolerances:
1. Flat metal surfaces will display waviness commonly referred to as “oil canning”. This is
caused by steel mill tolerances and is a characteristic, not a defect, of panels manufactured
from light gauge metal. Panels are factory correctively-leveled to minimize the occurrence of
“oil canning”. As such, “oil canning” will not be accepted as cause for rejection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: With Installer present.
1. Examine conditions and substrates on which metal panels are to be installed. Structural
support or substrate shall be flat and plumb to avoid panel stresses and distortion.
2. Prior to starting work, correct defects.
B. Field Measurements:
1. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress.
2. Field measure prior to fabrication. Show recorded dimensions on shop drawings,
including locations of shop-fabricated openings.
3. If field measurements differ from drawing dimensions, notify Architect prior to fabrication.
C. Substrate Tolerances: Deviations from flat plane shall not exceed the following.
1. 1/4 inch in 20 feet.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Substrate and Underlayment: Install according to approved shop drawings and metal panel
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Panels and Trim: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for assembly, installation and
erection for weather tight installation.
1. Install according to approved shop drawings. Machine crimp, do not hand crimp.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
METAL ROOF PANELS 07610 - 7
2. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
Anchor securely in place using clips and fasteners spaced in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations for design wind load criteria.
3. Form seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seaming tool; completely engage
panel, clip, and factory-applied sealant in seam.
4. Comply with methods and recommendations of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual for flashing configurations required.
5. Discrepancies between job site conditions and shop drawings shall be brought to the
attention of the Architect for resolution.
6. Cutting and Fitting:
a. Cut panels neat, square, and true with shearing action cutters. Torch or power saw
cutting is prohibited.
b. Openings 6 inches and larger: Shop fabricate and reinforce to maintain original load
capacity.
c. Openings less than 6 inches: Field cutting is acceptable.
7. Dissimilar Metals or Materials:
a. Where panel or trim may come in contact with dissimilar metals or treated lumber,
fabricate transition to facilitate drainage and minimize possibility of galvanic action.
Galvanic action can cause panels and trim to fail prematurely.
b. At points of contact with dissimilar metal or treated lumber, coat panel and trim with
protective paint or separate materials with a weatherproof underlayment.
c. Direct contact or run-off from CCA, ACQ, CA, or other treated lumber (outdoor
wood) or fire retardant impregnated or treated wood shakes or siding can cause
panels and trim to fail prematurely. Avoid contact with these materials.
B. Accessories: Install trims, flashings, and roofing specialties according to Drawings and
manufacturer's recommended details.
Install Self adhering Sheet underlayment under the entirety of the metal roof , three feet each side of a
closed or open valley, three feet below and above any roof to wall intersection.
C. Sealant Installation: Apply according to approved shop drawings and SMACNA Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual recommendations.
1. Provide airtight and waterproof installation.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Repairs:
1. Touch up paint is not required for panels with scratches that do not expose metal.
2. Panels or flashings with finish damage exposing metal or with substrate damage shall be
replaced.
B. Cleaning and Waste Management:
1. At completion of each day’s work and at work completion, sweep panels, flashings, and
gutters clean. Do not allow fasteners, cuttings, filings, or scraps to accumulate.
2. Clean exposed surfaces of work promptly after completion of installation.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect Work as required to ensure that roofing will be without damage at Final Completion.
END OF SECTION
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1
SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Manufactured reglets. See Section 09220 for Reglets in Stucco
2. Formed roof drainage system. See Section 07720 for Gutters and Downspouts
3. Formed low-slope roof flashing and trim.
4. Formed steep-slope roof flashing and trim.
5. Formed wall flashing and trim.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, profiles, shapes, seams, dimensions, and details for fastening,
joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim.
C. Samples: For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical roof eave, including specified gutter fascia fascia trim apron
flashing, approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long, including supporting construction
cleats, seams, attachments, underlayment, and accessories.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or H01, cold-rolled copper sheet.
B. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: (Kynar 500 PVDF or equal) Steel sheet metallic
coated I accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
a. Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-
enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil (0.005 mm) for
primer and 0.8 mil (0.02 mm) for topcoat.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
C. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing
and trim installation.
D. Self Adhering Sheet Waterproofing per Section 07131
1. Slip Sheet if required by manufacturer: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft.
(0.16 kg/sq. m).
2. High heat resistant (VYCOR by W R Grace Co or equal
E. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-
locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1. Nails for Copper Sheet: Copper or hardware bronze, 0.109 inch (2.8 mm) minimum and
not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) long, barbed with large head.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or
factory-applied coating.
3. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with
hex washer head.
4. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
F. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 3
G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
H. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant,
polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
I. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound.
J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil
(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.
2.3 REGLETS
A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of
separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated
B. See Section 09220 for reglets in stucco.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Cheney Flashing Company, Inc.
b. Fry Reglet Corporation.
c. Heckmann Building Products Inc.
d. Hickman, W. P. Company.
e. Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.
f. Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc.
g.
2. Material: Copper, 20 oz./sq. ft. Kynar coated steel Sheet Metal 20 ga..
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field
measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
1. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-
lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot
be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)
deep, filled with elastomeric or butyl sealant concealed within joints.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 4
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal
flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal, and in thickness not less than that of metal being secured.
2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters: ( Coordinate with Section 07720)Fabricate to cross section indicated,
complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum
96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets
fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than
twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, gutter bead
reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.
1. Fabricate from the following material:
a. Copper: 20 oz per sq. ft. (0.7 mm thick).
b. Copper Coated Stainless Steel: 0.0250 inch (0.65 mm) thick.
c. Kynar coated steel: 20 ga. thick.
d. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: 20 ga. thick.
B. Downspouts: Fabricate round downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal
hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
1. Fabricate downspouts from the following material:
a. Copper: [20 oz./sq. ft.
b. Copper Coated Stainless Steel: [0.025 inch thick.
c. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: 20 thick.
2.6 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Apron, Step, Cricket, and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft. .
2. Same Kynar finished roofing (incl. color) as adjacent roof 20ga
B. Valley Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft.
2. Same Kynar finished roofing (incl. color) as adjacent roof 20ga
C. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft.
2. Same Kynar finished roofing (incl. color) as adjacent roof 20ga
D. Eave, Rake, Ridge, and Hip Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft.
2. Same Kynar finished roofing (incl. color) as adjacent roof 20ga
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 5
2.7 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to
extend to width of wall openings or trim whichever is greater. Form head and sill flashing with
2-inch- (50-mm-) high end dams. Fabricate from the following material:
1. 20 ga.Kynar finished steel to match finished color of adjacent trim . Selected color by
Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding
rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks.
D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric or butyl sealant.
E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600
mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be
used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked
flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with elastomericor butyl sealant concealed
within joints.
G. Fasteners: Use non corrosivefasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4
inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.
1.
Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
2. Copper: Use copper or stainless-steel fasteners.
3. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
H. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required for watertight construction.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 6
I. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges
of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) except where pretinned surface
would show in finished Work.
1. Do not solder prepainted, metallic-coated steel sheet.
3.2 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof
perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed
with elastomeric or butyl sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or
fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets and straps spaced not more than 24 inches apart.
Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.
1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 30 feet apart.
Install expansion joint caps.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide fasteners
designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at top
and bottom and at approximately 48 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between.
3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements
and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams
that will be permanently watertight.
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations
in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.
1. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate
at 24 inch centers.
C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG
Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at
16-inch (400-mm) centers.
2. Anchor interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at [18-inch (450-mm)]
<Insert spacing> centers.
D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.
Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Secure in a
waterproof manner. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 7
counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with elastomeric or butyl
sealant.
E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation
of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:
1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with
flashing.
2. Seal with elastomeric] or butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof
except for lead flashing on vent piping.
3.4 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall
flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
B. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Division [3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete] [4
Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies]."
C. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to
extend to width of wall openings or trim whichever is greater .
END OF SECTION 07620
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 1
SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Gutters and downspouts and related accessories
2. Gutter support brackets
3. Downspouts and accessories
4. Coordinate with installation of self regulating heat tape
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed factory-applied[ color] finish required and for each type of
roof accessory indicated, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details
for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing
indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
listed in other Part 2 articles.
1. Guttersupply
2. Approved Equal
2.2 METAL MATERIALS
A. Copper -Coated Satinless Steel for Gutters and accessories
1. CCRBG6XCO18 6CC REV BEAD HALF ROUND GUTTER
2. #10 Combo Shank & Circle Gutter Hanger (confirm compatibility with specified gutter)
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 2
B. Copper for downspouts and accessories
1. 3” diameter 16 oz plain round downspout with elbows, miters, and endcaps as needed
2. Plan Roind Downspout hooks, secure downspout at 4 foot increments.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof
accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory
installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling,
leaking, and fastener disengagement.
B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of ,stainless-steel roof accessories with bituminous coating where in
contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories
directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and
cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory
manufacturers for waterproof performance.
D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in
alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
E. Seal joints with sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories.
F. Coordinate with installation of electric heat tape
END OF SECTION 07720
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 1
SECTION 08111 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit
and Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking.
Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
fabrication.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement
of defective doors.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. CECO Door Products.
2. Curries Company.
3. Security Metal Products.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable
for exposed applications.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated;
fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
B. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by
referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical
performance level:
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, or one-piece
polystyrene core, securely bonded to both faces.
a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings
indicated.
3. Level/Model: Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), minimum
16 gauge (0.053-inch - 1.3-mm) thick steel, Model 2.
4. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to have the face sheets joined by a continuous weld
extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground, filled and dressed smooth.
Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
5. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel
channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the
face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw
attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or
composite channel fillers are not acceptable.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 3
6. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge
continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped.
7. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing
plates from same material as door face sheets.
C. Manufacturers Basis of Design:
1. CECO Door Products (C): Legion Series.
2. Curries Company (CU): 707 Series.
3. Security Metal Products
2.4 ENERGY EFFICIENCY HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design specified, not less than thickness indicated;
fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 867.
B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc coated steel that
complies with ASTM A924 A60. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below
by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model, ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical
performance level, and HMMA 867 for door construction.
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Foamed in place polyurethane and steel stiffened laminated core with
no stiffener face welds, in compliance with HMMA 867 “Laminated Core”.
a. Provide 22 gauge steel stiffeners at 6 inches on-center internally welded at 5" on-
center to integral core assembly, foamed in place polyurethane core chemically
bonded to all interior surfaces. No stiffener face welding is permitted.
b. Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U-Factor 0.29 and R-Value
3.4, including insulated door, thermal-break frame and threshold.
3. Level/Model: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level A (Heavy Duty), Minimum 18
gauge (0.042 inch - 1.1-mm) thick steel, Model 2.
4. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to be mechanically interlocked with hairline seam.
Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
5. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel
channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the
face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw
attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or
composite channel fillers are not acceptable.
6. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9".
7. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing
plates from same material as door face sheets.
C. Manufacturers Basis of Design:
1. CECO Door Products (C) - Trio-E/Trio Series.
2. Curries Company (CU) - 777 Trio-E/Trio Series.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 4
2.5 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Exterior Masonry Frames: Fabricated of hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM
A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames, with the exception of knock down types, with "closed and tight" miter
seams continuously welded on face, finished smooth with no visible seam unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors (up to 48 inches in width): Minimum 14 gauge (0.067-
inch -1.7-mm) thick steel sheet.
4. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors (48 inches and up in width): Minimum 12 gauge (0.081-
inch -2.7-mm) thick steel sheet.
5. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel
sheet.
6. Manufacturers Basis of Design:
a. CECO Door Products (C) - SU Series.
b. Curries Company (CU) - M Series.
c. Security Metal Products
C. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement
plates from same material as frames.
2.6 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size,
formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated
or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not
less than 0.177 inch thick.
2. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engauge stud and not less than 0.042 inch thick.
B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated
material, not less than 0.042 inches thick.
C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
2.7 LOUVERS
A. Metal Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard metal louvers unless otherwise indicated.
1. Blade Type: Vision proof inverted V or inverted Y.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 5
2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with
baked enamel or powder coated finish. Match pre-finished door paint color where
applicable.
2.8 LIGHT OPENINGS AND GLAZING
A. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints at fabricators shop. Fixed
and removable stops to allow multiple glazed lites each to be removed independently.
Coordinate frame rabbet widths between fixed and removable stops with the type of glazing and
installation indicated.
B. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors and Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 20
gauge thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.
C. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16
mm) high unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixed frame moldings and stops on outside of
exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames
D. Preformed Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-
inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for
use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. Match pre-finished door paint color where
applicable.
E. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with the hollow metal
door manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Factory Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors as indicated. Doors with factory
installed glass to include all of the required glazing material.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate,
frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by
others.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8.
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide optional weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to
permit moisture to escape where specified.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 6
2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors with applied trim or kits to fit. Factory install
glazing where indicted.
3. Louvers: Factory cut openings in door and install louvers into prepared openings where
indicated.
4. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragals as noted in door hardware sets in Division 08
Section "Door Hardware" on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-
performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on
which astragal is mounted.
5. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge strap for
continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
D. Hollow Metal Frames:
1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness
metal as frames.
2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to
the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling.
Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening.
3. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings
and to jambs by butt welding.
4. Equal Rabbet Frames: Provide frames with equal rabbet dimensions unless glazing and
removable stops require wider dimensions on glass side of frame.
5. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at
door openings 48-inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations.
6. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge straps for
continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
7. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security screws at exterior
locations.
8. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges
and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements.
9. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
10. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 7
b. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in
metal stud partitions.
c. Severe Storm Shelter Openings: Provide jamb, head, and sill anchors in accordance
with manufacturer’s tested and approved assemblies.
11. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door
silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
12. Bituminous Coating: Where frames are fully grouted with an approved Portland Cement
based grout or mortar, coat inside of frame throat with a water based bituminous or
asphaltic emulsion coating to a minimum thickness of 3 mils DFT, tested in accordance
with UL 10C and applied to the frame under a 3rd party independent follow-up service
procedure.
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface mounted door
hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 26 Sections.
2.11 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum
finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory
applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings.
B. Factory Pre-Finishes: Factory apply electrostatic paint finish to doors and frames in accordance
with ANSI A250.3 test procedure acceptance criteria for steel doors and frames with factory
applied finished coatings.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame
manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back
set, etc.).
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumbness.
C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and
Frames."
D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11 and NFPA 80 at fire rated openings.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and secured,
remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as necessary to
comply with installation tolerances.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.
3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with mortar.
4. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in
head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 9
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
D. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with
hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after
installation.
C. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or
damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying,
rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint.
END OF SECTION 081113
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1
SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS AND WOOD FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge
construction, louvers, trim for openings, and WDMA I.S.1-A or AWS classifications. Include
factory finishing specifications.
B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical
hardware to the wood door supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the
finish hardware items.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
5. Indicate fire protection ratings for fire rated doors.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory finished doors.
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for
each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of
three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished
work.
2. Corner sections of doors, 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual
materials to be used.
a. Provide samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.
b. Finish veneer faced door samples with same materials proposed for factory
finished doors.
3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.
E. Informational Submittals:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2
1. Submit manufacturer's environmental documentation and applicable sustainability
program credits that are available to contribute towards a LEED rated project
certification.
F. Warranty: Sample of special warranties.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package pre-finished doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons and wrap bundles
of doors in plastic sheeting.
C. Mark each door on top rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.
b. Telegraphing of core construction in wood face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-
inch span.
c. Telegraphing of core construction and delaminating of face in decorative laminate-
faced doors.
2. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
3. Warranty Period for Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation according to
manufacturer's written warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CORE CONSTRUCTION
A. Particleboard Core Doors:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3
1. Particleboard: Wood fiber based materials complying with ANSI A208.1 Particleboard
standard. Grade LD-2.
2. Adhesive: Fully bonded construction using Polyurethane (PUR) glue.
3. Blocking: When through-bolted hardware is not used, provide wood blocking in
particleboard core doors as follows:
a. 5-inch (125-mm) top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers.
b. 5-inch (125-mm) mid-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.
1) Optional Cores for Blocking: Provide doors with either glued-wood-stave or
structural-composite-lumber core instead of particleboard core for doors
indicated to receive closers and exit devices.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Graham: PC, PC5
2.2 VENEERED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Graham: GPD
2. Marshfield
3. VT Industries
2.3 LIGHT FRAMES AND GLAZING
A. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Rated Doors over 20-minute rating: Manufacturer's
standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or
powder coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Comply with final hardware
schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment
before factory machining.
2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed steel edges for hardware for pairs
of fire rated doors.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4
C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces,
and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of
rabbeted doors same as door stiles.
D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,
before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Transparent Finish: Provide a clear protective coating over the wood veneer allowing the
natural color and grain of the selected wood species to provide the appearance specified. Stain is
applied to the wood surface underneath the transparent finish to add color and design flexibility.
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: Meet or exceed WDMA I.S. 1A TR6 Catalyzed Polyurethane finish performance
requirements.
3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 5
1. Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D. Factory Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or
refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 081416
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 1
SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Access doors and frames.
B. See Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for mortise or rim cylinder locks and master keying.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of access door indicated.
B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating access door and frame installation
with ceiling support, ceiling-mounted items, and concealed Work above ceiling.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
D. Schedule: Door and frame schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, construction
details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Size and Location Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed
to gain access to concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet:
1. Hot-Rolled: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, and surface defects; pickled and oiled.
2. Cold-Rolled: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M,
Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
a. Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet, complying with ASTM A 591/A 591M,
Class C coating, may be substituted at fabricator's option.
3. Electrolytic Zinc Coated: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), with Class C
coating and phosphate treatment to prepare surface for painting.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 2
4. Metallic Coated: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with A60
(ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 (Z180) mill-phosphatized zinc
coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T6.
D. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, alloy 6061-T6.
E. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet formed
to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum panels indicated.
F. Plaster Bead: Casing bead formed from 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet with
flange formed out of expanded metal lath and in size to suit thickness of plaster.
G. Paint:
1. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal
modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664;
selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish
paint systems indicated, and capability to provide sound foundation for field-applied
topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
2. Shop Primer for Metallic-Coated Steel: Organic zinc-rich primer complying with SSPC-
Paint 20 and compatible with topcoat.
2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acudor Products, Inc.
2. Bar-Co, Inc. Div.; Alfab, Inc.
3. Cendrex, Inc.
4. Cesco Products.
5. Elmdor/Stoneman; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co.
6. Jensen Industries.
7. J. L. Industries, Inc.
8. Karp Associates, Inc.
9. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
10. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc.
11. Milcor Limited Partnership.
12. Nystrom Building Products Co.
13. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
14. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).
15. <
B. Flush, Insulated, Fire-Rated Access Doors and Trimless Frames:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 3
1. Material: Prime-painted steel sheet.
2. Surface Type: Ceramic Tile, Gypsum board .
3. Locations: Walls and ceilings.
4. Fire-Resistance Rating: 1 hour.
5. Temperature-Rise Rating: 250 deg F (139 deg C) at the end of 30 minutes.
6. Door: Flush panel with core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a
minimum thickness of 0.036 inch (0.9 mm).
7. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with drywall bead.
8. Hinges: Concealed pin type
9. Automatic Closer: Spring type.
10. Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by screwdriver with interior release.
C. Exterior, Flush Access Doors and Frames: Weatherproof with extruded door gasket.
1. Surface Type: Wood Siding Masonry Concrete.
2. Locations: [Walls] [Ceilings] [Walls and ceilings].
3. Door: Minimum 0.036-inch- (0.9-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel sheet; flush panel
construction with 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick fiberglass insulation.
4. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch (1.5-mm) extruded aluminum with mill finish.
5. Hinges: Continuous piano hinge, zinc plated.
6. Latch: Screwdriver-operated cam latch.
7. .
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor
door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as
locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
C. Install access doors with trimless frames flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to
receive finish material.
D. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
END OF SECTION 08311
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 1
SECTION 08361 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes electrically operated sectional overhead doors.
B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.
C. See Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and
accessories.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide sectional overhead doors capable of withstanding the effects
of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation
of door components:
1. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting
inward and outward.
2. Air Infiltration: Maximum Rate: 0.08 cfm (0.038 L/s) at 15 mph (24 km/h).
3. Impact Test for Flying Debris: Comply with ASTM E 1996, tested according to
ASTM E 1886.
a. Level of Protection: Enhanced Protection
b. Wind Zone 110 mph (176 km/h)] , pressure test to 3/4 and 1-1/2 x design pressure
(positive and negative).
B. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide sectional overhead door components and operators
capable of operating for not less than 100,000 cycles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional overhead door and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not detailed in manufacturer's
product data.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
D. Delegated Design Submittal;: For Sectional Doors indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation
E. Maintenance Data
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 2
F. Warranties: Sample of Warranty
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.marked and intended location and application
C. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to complt with DASMA 102
D. Warranty: Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within
Five years from the Date of Substantial Completion
E. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within Ten years
from the Date of Substantial Completion
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Aluminum Doors with Glazed Panels:
a. Overhead Door Corp.
2.2 GLAZED ALUMINUM SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
A. Panel thickness; 1 ¾”
B. Center Stile Width: 21/32”
C. End Stile Width; 2 ¾”
D. Intermediate rail Pair Width: 1 3/8”
E. Top Rail Width: 3 ¾”
F. Bottom rail Width: 4 ½”
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 3
G. Aluminum Pnels: 0.050 thick
H. Stiles and Rails: 6063- T^ alumini=um
I. Springs: 100,000 cycles
J. Gazing: ½” Insulating Glass (Cardinal 366, tempered)
K. Finish and Color: Anodized Finish: Bronze Anodized
L. Track: 3”
M. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.
N. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of
flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of overhead door.
2.3 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware to suit door type.
B. Hinges: Heavy-duty galvanized steel hinges at each end stile and at each intermediate stile.
Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails. Provide double-end hinges where
required and for doors exceeding 16 feet (4.87 m) in width.
C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers (3”) with steel ball bearings in case-hardened steel races.
2.4 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM
A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechaniam consisting of adjustable –tension springs mounted
on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs calibrated for a minimum of
100,000 cycles.
B. Cable Drums and shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted
on torsion shaft grooved to receive door lifting cables as door is raised.. Mount counterbalance
mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft.
C. Cable: Galvanized steel lifting cables
D. Cable Safety Device: Include, on each side-edge of door, a device designed to automatically
stop door if either cable breaks.
E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the
wall and to level shaft and prevent sag.
F. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 4
2.5 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and
provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycle requirements specified, with
electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, grear reduction unit, solenoid-
operateed brake, clutch, remote-control stations,control devices, integral gearing for locking
door, and accessories required for proper operation. Comply with NFPA 70. Provide control
equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6; with NFPA 770,
Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.
B. Usage Classification: Electrical operator and components capable of operating for not less than
the number of cycles indicated per hour for each door (90 cylcles)
C. Door- Operator Type: Unit of type indicated, consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts
sprockets chains and controlls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification.
D. Electric Motors: comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure
type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 11 Section “Common Motor
Requirements for Equipment” unless otherwise indicated
E. 1. Electrical Characteristics:
F. a. Phase: Polyphase
G. b. Volts: 208V
H. c. Hertz: 60
I. 2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for
motor exposure indicated.
J. 3. Motor Size: Minimum size to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction
from any position, at a speed not less than 8 inches per second and not more than 112 inches per
second, without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.
K. 4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring:
Manufacturer’s standard.
L. Obstruction Detection device: Equip motorized doors with indicated external automatic safety
sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops
and reverses downward door travel.
M. 1.Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer’s satandard system designed to detect an
obstruction in the door opening without contact between door and obstruction. Coordinate
mounting height with height of apparatus bumper.
N. 2. Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather
stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control
circuit using manufacturer’s standard take-up reel or self coiling cable.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 5
O. Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button
controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
P. 1. Interior Units, full guarde, surface mounted, heavy duty type, with general purpose
NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.
Q. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for
emergency manual operation, Design manual mechanism so force required for door operation
does not exceed 25 lbf (111N)
R. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operatotor with hand –operated disconnect
mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency
manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount
mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent
motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.
S. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit switch
adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.
T. Radio Control System: Consisting of three cannel universal coaxial receiver to open, close and
stop door: two per operator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install door, track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware
according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified.
B. Tracks: Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required fro rigid
installation of track, and door operating equipment. Repair galvanized coating on trcks
according to ASTM A 780.
C. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of
warp, twist or distortion,. Adjust doors and seals to provide weather tight fit around entire
perimeter.
D. STARTUP SERVICES: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup
services and train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional
doors..
END OF SECTION 08361
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 1
SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior and interior aluminum-framed storefronts including fixed windows shown on
drawings.
a. Glazing is retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides
2. Exterior and interior manual-swing aluminum doors.
3. Exterior and interior aluminum door frames.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding,
without failure, the effects of the following:
1. Structural loads.
2. Thermal movements.
3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
5. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.
c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements, to glazing.
d. Glazing-to-glazing contact.
e. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
g. Sealant failure.
h. Failure of operating units to function properly.
B. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: 50 lb/ sq.ft.
C. Deflection of Framing Members Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/240 of clear span or an
amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 1/8 inch whichever is less.
D. Structural-Test Performance: Systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 2
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems,
including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent
deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds.
E. Temperature Change (Range): Systems accommodate 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
F. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of systems of
0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 331
G. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Systems do not evidence water penetration through
fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-
pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24
lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
H. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas of systems have condensation-
resistance factor (CRF) of not less than [53] <Insert CRF> when tested according to
AAMA 1503.
I. Average Thermal Conductance: Fixed glazing and framing areas of systems have average U-
factor of not more than [0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.92 W/sq. m x K)] when tested
according to AAMA 507.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
2. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types,
functions, quantities, and locations.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
D. Product test reports.
E. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer and capable of preparation of data for
aluminum-framed systems including Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis
of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 3
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 699 for
testing indicated.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockups as shown on Drawings
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with
requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
e. Failure of operating components to function properly.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does
not include normal weathering.
1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for aluminum-framed systems is based on Kawneer
Trifab 601UT Framing System. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named
product or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. .Kawneer.
2. Or Architect approved equal
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 4
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer.
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural
movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing
system
4. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel
inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
D. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing
compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to
match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible
deflection.
E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer
for joint type.
2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded,
that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 5
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.
2.5 DOORS
A. Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors, for manual swing operation.
1. Door Construction: extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically
fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that
incorporate concealed tie rods. Size per Manufacturer’s data
a. Thermal Construction: In conformance with manufacturer’s data
2. Door Design: In conformance with manufacturer’s data
a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches
(255 mm) above floor or ground plane.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
B. Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
2.6 DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide heavy-duty units in sizes and types recommended by entrance system and
hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated.
B. Scheduled Door Hardware: Provide door hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule
at the end of Part 3.
1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and hardware manufacturer are
listed in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3 to establish minimum
requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of
each type of door hardware.
a. Provide named hardware manufacturer's products.
C. Cylinders: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
D. Cylinder Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control
number and include notation to be furnished by Owner.
E. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for
aluminum framing.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 6
2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Insulating Materials: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
B. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per
coat.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members,
and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for
spandrel glazing or panels.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops).
D. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary
support device (dutchman) to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.
E. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for
installing hardware.
1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install
three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames
for pairs of doors.
F. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip
mortised into door edge.
2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 7
G. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and
tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.
H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Color Anodic Finish: Class I , color anodic coating complying with AAMA 611.
1. Color: Medium bronze or Dark bronze per Architect’s selection from sample provded.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
2. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
3. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
4. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp
or rack.
E. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
1. Structural-Sealant Glazing:
a. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant
manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.
Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
b. Install weatherseal sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions
to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended
by sealant manufacturer.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 8
F. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight
closure.
2. Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface-mounted hardware according to hardware
manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
G. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce
weathertight installation.
H. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum
tolerances:
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/16 inch in 12 feet
(3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/8 inch (6 mm) over total length.
2. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch
(0.8 mm).
3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/16 inch
(3 mm).
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 75 feet
(23 m) by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested
according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.
B. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. See Sction 08710
PRIVATE tbl1@dom1
Door Hardware Set No. [#]
Single Door No. [#]; each to have the following:
[#] [*] Hanging Devices <Insert description.> <Insert
manufacturer
.>
<Insert finish.>
[#] Securing Devices (inactive leaf)<Insert
description.>.
<Insert
manufacturer
.>
<Insert finish.>
[#] Securing Devices (active leaf) <Insert description.> <Insert <Insert finish.>
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 9
manufacturer
.>
[#] Operating Trim <Insert description.> <Insert
manufacturer
.>
<Insert finish.>
[#] Accessories for Pairs of Doors <Insert description.> <Insert
manufacturer
.>
<Insert finish.>
[#] Closing Devices <Insert description.> <Insert
manufacturer
.>
<Insert finish.>
[#] Protective Trim Units <Insert description.> <Insert
manufacturer
.>
<Insert finish.>
[#] Stops and Holders <Insert description.> <Insert
manufacturer
.>
<Insert finish.>
[#] Accessories <Insert description.> <Insert
manufacturer
.>
<Insert finish.>
[#] Miscellaneous Items <Insert description.> <Insert
manufacturer
.>
<Insert finish.>
* Number of [butt] [offset-pivot]
hinges, as specified.
END OF SECTION 08411
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 1
SECTION 08550 - WOOD WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following aluminum-clad wood-framed window product types:
1. Casement windows.
2. Double-hung windows.
3. Fixed windows.
4. Patio Sliding Doors
B. See Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements for wood windows, including those
specified to be factory glazed.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance requirements
indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified
and that are of minimum test size required by AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2.
B. AAMA/NWWDA Performance Requirements: Provide wood windows of the performance
class and grade indicated that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2.
C. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole-window U-value maximum of
<.3 at 15-mph (24-km/h) exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures.
D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient: Provide wood windows with Cardial 366 Glass
E. Specific Product PerformanceRequirements: Comply with Section 2.2 of
AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 as applicable to types of wood windows indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of wood window indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other
Work, and operational clearances.
1. Include structural analysis data indicating deflection limitations of glass framing systems,
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
D. Product test reports.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 2
E. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.
B. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, "Voluntary Specifications
for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors," for minimum standards of
performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and
GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace wood windows that fail in materials and workmanship within [two] <Insert number>
years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Warranty Period for Glass: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Andersen Commercial Group; Andersen Corp.
2. Eagle Window & Door, Inc.; an American Architectural Products Corporation Company.
3. Kolbe & Kolbe Millwork Co., Inc.
4. Marvin Windows and Doors.
5. Jeld-Wen, Inc.
6. Pella Corporation.
7. Pozzi Wood Windows; Jeld-Wen, Inc.
8. Weather Shield Mfg., Inc.
9. Sierra Pacific
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 3
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Aluminum Extrusions and Rolled Aluminum for Cladding, Baked-Enamel Finish:
Manufacturer's standard baked enamel complying with AAMA 2603.
1. Color: Bronze
B. Aluminum Extrusions and Rolled Aluminum for Cladding, High-Performance Organic Finish:
Two-coat thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent
polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected from manufacturer's full range of standard colors]
C. GLAZING
D. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing
requirements applicable to glazed wood window units.
E. Glass: Clear, insulating-glass with low-e coating or film]for> units complying with Division 8
Section "Glazing."
2.3 INSECT SCREENS
A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable
arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Locate screens on inside or
outside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator.
1. Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for
Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows," Residential R-20 class.
2. sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated.
3. Finish: Anodized aluminum in manufacturer's standard color.
B. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 20X30 (0.85-by-0.42-mm) mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads;
woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact
damage, and weather deterioration in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656.
1. Mesh Color: Charcoal Grey
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate wood windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with
AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for performance class and performance grade indicated. Include a
complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.
B. Fabricate wood windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.
C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and
ventilator, unless otherwise indicated.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 4
D. Factory machine windows for openings and hardware that is not surface applied.
E. .
F. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section
"Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator
frames.
2.5 WOOD FINISHES
A. Factory-Finished Windows: Provide fabricator's standard factory finish
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction.
B. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.
C. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion
or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements
specified in "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2.
D. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at
contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate
hardware and moving parts.
E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior
concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,
stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove
contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
F. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
G. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's
written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels
and clean surfaces.
H. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
END OF SECTION 08550
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1
SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:
1. Swinging doors.
2. Sliding Doors
3. Other doors to the extent indicated.
B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical door hardware.
2. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry.
2. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry.
3. Section 08 01 00 – Operations and Maintenance.
4. Section 08 06 10 – Door Schedule.
5. Section 08 06 71 – Door Hardware Schedule.
6. Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
7. Section 08 14 16 – Flush Wood Doors.
8. Section 08 81 00 – Glass and Glazing.
9. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.
D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code.
3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2
E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:
1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series
2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware
delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or
accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software
and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service.
Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other
work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check
Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled
electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to
source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware,
and fire and detection alarm systems.
C. Door and Frame Preparation: Related Division 08 Sections (Steel, Aluminum and Wood) doors
and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive
the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system
hardware without additional in-field modifications.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified
in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions
of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace
components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are
not limited to, the following:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
2. Faulty operation of the hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Special Warranty Periods:
1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches.
2. Five years for exit hardware.
3. Ten years for manual door closers.
4. Two years for electromechanical door hardware.
1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
B. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with the
specified warranty period, provide continuous (6) months full maintenance including repair and
replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required
for proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and
installation of original products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware
Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.
1. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and
other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door
Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware
designations, as follows:
a. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed
for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
2. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following.
Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this
Section.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4
a. Permanent cylinders, cores, and keys to be installed by Owner.
B. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in
writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01,
Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and
their designated consultants.
2.2 HANGING DEVICES
A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified
in the Door Hardware Sets.
1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.
b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.
c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.
d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for
every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.
2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized
for door thickness and clearances required:
a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified.
b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.
3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing hinges unless Hardware
Sets indicate standard weight.
b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets
indicate heavy weight.
4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on
Drawings:
a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a
groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the
following applications:
1) Out-swinging exterior doors.
2) Out-swinging access controlled doors.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies (HA).
b. McKinney Products (MK).
c. Stanley Hardware (ST).
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5
2.3 DOOR OPERATING TRIM
A. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and
design specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and
height as required where conflicting hardware dictates.
1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, 4-inches wide by 16-inches high, with square
corners and beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.
2. Straight Pull Design: Minimum 1-inch round diameter stainless steel bar or tube stock
pulls with 2 1/2-inch projection from face of door unless otherwise indicated.
3. Offset Pull Design: Minimum 1-inch round diameter stainless steel bar or tube stock pulls
with 2 1/2-inch projection and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated.
4. Push Bars: Minimum 1-inch round diameter horizontal push bars with minimum
clearance of 2 1/2-inch projection from face of door unless otherwise indicated.
5. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured
master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source
manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Stanley Best (BE).
C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:
1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam.
2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised
trim ring.
3. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be
flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.
D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. Conduct specified "Keying
Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. Furnish
factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as
directed by Owner. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows:
1. Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key and a master key.
2. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, and a
grand master key.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6
3. Great-Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, a
grand master key, and a great-grand master key.
4. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.
5. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key.
E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:
1. Top Master Key: One (1)
2. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2)
3. Master Keys (per Master Key Group): Two (2)
4. Grand Master Keys (per Grand Master Key Group): Two (2)
5. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2)
6. Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2)
F. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders or temporary keyed
construction cores where specified. Provide construction master keys in quantity as required by
project Contractor. Replace construction cores with permanent cores. Furnish permanent cores
for installation as directed under specified "Keying Conference".
G. Key Registration List: Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper
format for importing into key control software.
2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational
Grade 1 certified mortise locksets furnished in the functions as specified in the Hardware Sets.
Locksets to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant, stamped 12 gauge minimum formed
steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. Lockset
trim (including knobs, levers, escutcheons, roses) to be the product of a single manufacturer.
Furnish with standard 2 3/4" backset, 3/4" throw anti-friction stainless steel latchbolt, and a full
1" throw stainless steel bolt for deadbolt functions.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Stanley Best (BE) – 47H Series.
B. Lock Trim Design: As specified in Hardware Sets.
2.6 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
A. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified
panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets.
Mounting rails to be formed from smooth stainless steel, brass or bronze architectural materials
no less than 0.072" thick, with push rails a minimum of 0.062" thickness. Painted or aluminum
metal rails are not acceptable. Exit device latch to be investment cast stainless steel, pullman
type, with deadlock feature.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series.
2.7 DOOR CLOSERS
A. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface
mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and
fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers
to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with
adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control.
Provide non-handed units and high impact, non-corrosive plastic covers standard.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DC8000 Series.
b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 351 Series.
c. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 7500 Series.
2.8 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
A. Door Protective Trim
1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the
Hardware Sets.
2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door
width (LDW) on stop side and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side.
Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware
dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.
3. Metal Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified metal protection plates (kick,
armor, or mop), beveled on four edges (B4E), fabricated from the following.
a. Stainless Steel: 050-inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK).
b. Brass or Bronze: 050-inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK).
c. Laminate Plastic or Acrylic: 1/8-inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK).
4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware
Sets.
5. Metal Door Edging: Door protection edging fabricated from a minimum .050-inch thick
metal sheet, formed into an angle or "U" cap shapes, surface or mortised mounted onto
edge of door. Provide appropriate leg overlap to account for protection plates as required.
Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.
6. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8
2.9 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware
Sets.
B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall
bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated,
unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor
stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide
overhead type stops and holders.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and
holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and
jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered
steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and
function.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Rixson Door Controls (RF).
b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
2.10 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified
below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and
provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior
applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.
B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by
a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control
ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: :Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.
1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure
Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Pemko Manufacturing (PE).
2.11 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
2.12 FINISHES
A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes
complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes
indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than
specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types,
drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been
resolved in writing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment
to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.
1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and
adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking
devices; closing devices; and seals.
B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1
"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware
is located.
C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and
written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into
surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and
reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9
Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates
involved.
D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying
with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed.
Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will
not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in
report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door
hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed
hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the
latest possible time frame.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. and provide final protection and
maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of
owner occupancy.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware.
3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are
a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies,
conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with
corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set
should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application
and functionality.
B. Refer to Section 080671, Door Hardware Schedule, for hardware sets.
C. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:
1. MK - McKinney
2. PE - Pemko
3. AD - Adams Rite
4. RO - Rockwood
5. BE - Stanley Security Solutions Inc (BE)
6. SA - Sargent
7. RF - Rixson
8. NO - Norton
9. SU - Securitron
Hardware Schedule
Set: 01
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12
Doors: E101
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK087100
1 Dormitory Lock 45H7TA 15J 626 BE 087100
1 Door Closer R 7500 689 NO087100
1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO087100
1 Threshold 272A Full Notch MSES25 PE 087100
1 Gasketing S773BL (head & Jamb) PE 087100
2 Gasketing ACP112BL PE 087100
1 Sweep 18062CNB PE 087100
Set: 02
Doors: E102, E103
3 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK087100
1 Exit Device 43 8804 LC US32D SA 087100
1 Cylinder 1E-72 626 BE
1 Vandal Resistant Trim VRT22 US32D RO087100
1 Door Closer PR7500 689 NO087100
1 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO087100
1 Threshold 272A Full Notch MSES25 PE 087100
1 Rain Guard 346C PE 087100
1 Gasketing S773BL (head & Jamb) PE 087100
2 Gasketing ACP112BL PE 087100
1 Sweep 18062CNB PE 087100
Set: 03
Doors: E107, E108
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK087100
1 Classroom Lock 45H7R 15J 626 BE 087100
1 Door Closer R 7500 689 NO087100
1 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Mop Plate K1050 4" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO087100
1 Threshold 272A Full Notch MSES25 PE 087100
1 Gasketing S773BL (head & Jamb) PE 087100
2 Gasketing ACP112BL PE 087100
1 Sweep 18062CNB PE 087100
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13
Set: 04
Doors: E104, E105, E106
1 All hardware is furnished by the door supplier.
Set: 05
Doors: E202, E203, E203B
1 All hardware is furnished by the door supplier.
Set: 06
Doors: 110, 110B
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK087100
1 Office Lock 45H7AB 15J 626 BE 087100
1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO087100
3 Silencer 608 RO087100
Set: 07
Doors: 111, 216, 217, 228
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK087100
1 Privacy Latch 45H0L 15J VIN 626 BE 087100
1 Door Closer R 7500 689 NO087100
1 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Mop Plate K1050 4" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO087100
3 Silencer 608 RO087100
Set: 08
Doors: 112
2 Hinge TA2714 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK087100
1 Storeroom Lock 45H7D 15J 626 BE 087100
1 Surface Overhead Stop 9-X36 630 RF 087100
3 Silencer 608 RO087100
Set: 09
Doors: 114, 116, 212, 218
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14
3 Hinge TA2714 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK087100
1 Storeroom Lock 45H7D 15J 626 BE 087100
1 Surface Overhead Stop 9-X36 630 RF 087100
3 Silencer 608 RO087100
Set: 10
Doors: 210
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK087100
1 Passage Latch 45H0N 15J 626 BE 087100
1 Door Closer PR7500 689 NO087100
1 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO087100
3 Silencer 608 RO087100
Set: 11
Doors: 211
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK087100
1 Storeroom Lock 45H7D 15J 626 BE 087100
1 Door Closer 7500 689 NO087100
1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO087100
1 Threshold 173A MSES25 PE 087100
1 Gasketing S773BL (head & Jamb) PE 087100
1 Gasketing ACP112BL PE 087100
2 Door Bottom 411ARL PE 087100
Set: 12
Doors: 214
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK087100
1 Pull Plate 106x70C US32D RO087100
1 Push Plate 70C US32D RO087100
1 Door Closer PR7500 689 NO087100
1 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO087100
3 Silencer 608 RO087100
Set: 13
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 15
Doors: 215
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK087100
1 Classroom Lock 45H7R 15J 626 BE 087100
1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO087100
3 Silencer 608 RO087100
Set: 14
Doors: 219, 220, 221, 222
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK087100
1 Passage Latch 45H0N 15J 626 BE 087100
1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO087100
1 Threshold 173A MSES25 PE 087100
1 Gasketing S773BL (head & Jamb) PE 087100
2 Gasketing ACP112BL PE 087100
1 Door Bottom 411ARL PE 087100
Set: 15
Doors: 213
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK087100
1 Keypad Lock 45HZ7DV 15KP 626 BE 087100
1 Door Closer PR7500 689 NO087100
1 Kickplate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO087100
3 Silencer 608 RO087100
Notes: Install keypad lock at 60" AFF.
Set: 16
Doors: 115
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK087100
1 Classroom Lock 45H7R 15J 626 BE 087100
1 Door Closer R 7500 689 NO087100
1 Electromagnetic Holder 994 689 RF 087400
3 Silencer 608 RO087100
Set: 17
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 16
Doors: E100, E201
1 Continuous Hinge KCFMXX-HD1 PE 087100
1 Rim Exit Device 8800 US32D AD087100
1 Cylinder 1E-72 626 BE
1 Door Pull BF167 US32D RO087100
1 Door Closer UNIJ7500 7786 689 NO087100
1 Threshold 272A Full Notch MSES25 PE 087100
1 Sweep 18062CNB PE 087100
Notes: Exit device, pull and cylinder will be furnished by Owner.
END OF SECTION 087100
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GLAZING 08800 - 1
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
3. Glazed curtain walls.
4. Glazed entrances.
5. Interior borrowed lites.
6. Storefront framing. See Section 08411
7. See Section 08361 for glazing in Overhead Doors
8. Special Glazing
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a
specified gas.
B. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining
and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include
peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
C. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to
the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of
glass.
D. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining
and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include
edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes
exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind
and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage
attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GLAZING 08800 - 2
sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other
defects in construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only.
Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass
lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than
thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following
criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,
according to the following requirements:
a. Specified Design Wind Loads: 20 lb /sq.ft or not less than wind loads applicable
to Project as required by ASCE 7 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures": Section 6.0 "Wind Loads."
b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set
vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.
1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.
c. Thickness of Tinted and Heat-Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness for
each tint color indicated throughout Project.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass
framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): ; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures
indicated below:
1. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall
unit and for each lite 6.0 mm thick and a nominal [1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-)wide interspace.
One inch insulating Glass is required in Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts
(Section 08411)
2. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program
for the following methodologies:
a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).
b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200.
c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Samples: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square, for each type of glass product indicated, other than
monolithic clear float glass.
C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GLAZING 08800 - 3
D. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant
manufacturers, for testing according to ASTM C 1087, samples of each glazing material type,
tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect
elastomeric glazing sealants:
B. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80
and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.
C. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201
D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for
Sealed Insulating Glass Units."
E. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least
one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the Insulating Glass
Certification Council or Associated Laboratories, Inc.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form,
made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass
units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to
Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out
to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units
that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project
site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GLAZING 08800 - 4
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class
indicated.
1. Ultra-Clear (Low-Iron) Float Glass: Class I (clear); with a minimum 91 percent visible
light transmission and a minimum solar heat gain coefficient of 0.87.
a. Available Products:
1) Cardinal Glass LoE3 366
2) Or Architect approved equal.
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class,
kind, and condition indicated.
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where
needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites
and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article.
3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated
glass).
5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat-
strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated.
C. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition B (spandrel glass, one surface
ceramic coated), Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3, and complying with other
requirements specified.
1. Fallout Resistance: Provide spandrel units identical to those passing the fallout-
resistance test for spandrel glass specified in ASTM C 1048.
D. Coated Spandrel Float Glass: Float glass complying with other requirements specified and with
the following:
1. Fallout Resistance: Provide spandrel units identical to those passing the fallout-
resistance test for spandrel glass specified in ASTM C 1048.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GLAZING 08800 - 5
E. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass
separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units
and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article.
1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed
to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to
comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article.
2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating-
glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly
from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.
3. Sealing System: Dual seal.
4. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction
complying with the following requirements:
a. Spacer Material:
b. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.
2.3 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below,
complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile
and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864.
2. EPDM, ASTM C 864.
3. Silicone, ASTM C 1115.
4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115.
5. Any material indicated above.
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of
material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and
hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
1. Neoprene.
2. EPDM.
3. Silicone.
4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber.
5. Any material indicated above.
2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GLAZING 08800 - 6
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test
assemblies to obtain fire-protection rating.
2.5 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids
content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with
or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for
application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with
ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with
AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of
liquid sealant.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness
required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GLAZING 08800 - 7
F. FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
G. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and
face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
2.7 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS
1. Coated Clear Float-Glass Units MG-<#>: Class 1 (clear) or ultra-clear (low-iron) float
glass annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where heat strengthening is
required to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites
and to comply with system performance requirements Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float
glass Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass.
2. Available Products:
a. Cardinal Glass LoE3 366 with 3 silver layers
3.
2.8 MONOLITHIC CERAMIC-COATED SPANDREL-GLASS UNITS
A. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel-Glass Units CSG-<#>:
1. Available Products:
a. Viracon Ceramic Frits
2. Class 1 (clear) or1 (clear) ultra-clear (low-iron) float glass.
3. Thickness: 6.0 mm
4. Ceramic Coating Color: Dark Gray
5. Coating Location: Second surface.
2.9 INSULATING-GLASS UNITS
A. Clear Insulating-Glass Units IG-<#>:
1. Available Products:
a. Cardinal Glass LoE3 366
2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 6.0 mm
3. Interspace Content: Air.
4. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass.
a. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)[ or ultra-clear (low-iron) float glass.
b. Kind FT (fully tempered) where required.
B. Passive Solar Low-E Insulating-Glass Units IG-<#>:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GLAZING 08800 - 8
1. Available Products:
a. Cardinal LoE3 366
2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 6.0 mm.
3. Interspace Content: Air.
4. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass
a. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) or ultra-clear (low-iron) float glass.
b. Annealed] Kind HS (heat strengthened) Kind FT (fully tempered) where required.
5. Low-E Coating: 3 silver layers
C. Solar-Control Low-E Insulating-Glass Units IG-<#>:
1. Available Products:
a. Cardinal LoE3 366
2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 6.0 mm
3. Interspace Content: Air.
4. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) or 1 (clear) ultra-clear (low-iron) float glass
5. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) or ultra-clear (low-iron) float glass.
a. Annealed Kind HS (heat strengthened) Kind FT (fully tempered) where required.
6. Low-E Coating: 3 silver layers.
D. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Insulating-Glass Units IG-<#>:
1. Available Products:
a. Viracon Ceramic Frits, insulation airspace 1 inch
2. Construction: Provide units that comply with requirements specified for insulating-glass
units designated IG-<#> except for indoor lite.
3. Indoor Lite: Ceramic-coated spandrel glass.
a. Ceramic Coating Location: Fourth surface.
E. Special Glazing
1. Available Products: LuciteLux 030 Polar White MG by Lucite International (Mitsubishi
Rayon, single gazed installation at limited locations
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GLAZING 08800 - 9
2.10 EXECUTION
2.11 GLAZING
A. General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants,
gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including
those in referenced glazing publications.
1. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,
minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass
with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and
impair performance and appearance.
3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
4. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course
of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
6. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270
mm).
7. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
B. Tape Glazing: Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed
edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. Install tapes continuously, but
not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
1. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs.
Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
2. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not
lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
3. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant if required by manufacturer.
4. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting
dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of
removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of
openings.
5. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
C. Gasket Glazing (Dry): Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket
manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
1. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in
place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
2.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression
gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place
against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GLAZING 08800 - 10
centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing
bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
3. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
D. Sealant Glazing (Wet): Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant
backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent
sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure.
Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed
sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
1. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
2. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
2.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating
substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such
protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances
immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
END OF SECTION 08800
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1
SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco)
2. Work includes patching of existing exterior openings in stucco finished areas. Substrate
of patched areas to match existing adjacent materials (generally CMU). Patches to be
blended to be indistinguishable from finish on adjacent surfaces
3. Installation of Weather Barrier behind new stucco installations
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type of factory-prepared colored textured finish coat indicated; 12 by 12
inches (305 by 305 mm), and prepared on rigid backing.
C. Weather Barrier
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.
B. Exterior Plasterwork: Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F (4.4
deg C).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 2
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Dupont Tyvek StuccoWrap: installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions
B. .If paper backing is required, retain paragraph and subparagraph below with any type of lath
retained above. Verify with manufacturers that paper backing selected is available for lath
configurations selected above.
C. Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable paper or Grade B,
Style 1a vapor-retardant paper in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
1. Provide paper-backed lath unless otherwise indicated at exterior locations
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
B. Accessories: Extruded Aluminium by Fry Reglet Company. Priovide shop drawings of
appropriate assemblies that will include : Cannel Screed (3/4” wide), F drip cap at door and
window heads in Fry Reglet assemble (in new stucco locations only), X corner moulding, FPM
moulding at sill and other pieces to accomplish an integrated insatllation
C. Color : Dark Bronze
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of
damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long,
free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster.
C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.
D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required
by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths
required to achieve penetration through joined materials of not fewer than three exposed
threads. in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063 in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS
A. La Harbra Fastwall 300 Krack Shield . Manufacturers instructions and specification supercede
specifications herein. Notify Architect of contradictions.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 3
B. Colorants for Finish-Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plaster color to
match Architect's sample, Colorfast Pigment System by Parex>.
C. Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents,
and proprietary ingredients
D. La Harbra Cement Finishe in new stucco areas: Santa Barbara Finish. Match adjacent texture at
patches
1. .According to ASTM C 926, mix in subparagraph below is suitable for use over "high-
absorption" plaster bases such as concrete masonry, absorptive brick, and tile.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects
caused by plastering.
B. Prepare solid-plaster bases that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to
bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
3.3 INSTALLING METAL LATH
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063 in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
3.4 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings in accordance with
instructions by Fry Reglet and La Habra .
B. Reinforcement for External Corners:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Install Architect selected cornerbead at interior and exterior locations.
C. Control Joints: Install Architect selected Fry Reglet control joints at locations indicated on
Drawings. and in specific locations identified by Architect for visual effect.
3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 4
B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry plaster bases in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide Santa Barbara Mission Finishto match Architect's
sample.
D. .
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore
cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing
(check cracking), dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to
substrate has failed.
END OF SECTION 09220
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 1
SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum wallboard.
2. Exterior gypsum board panels for ceilings and soffits.
3. Tile backing panels.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples: For each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings,
provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Mockups: Before finishing gypsum board assemblies, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9
sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1. Install mockups for the following applications:
a. Surfaces with texture finishes.
b. Surfaces indicated to receive nontextured paint finishes.
c. Surfaces indicated to receive textured paint finishes.
2. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING
1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch
(4.12-mm) diameter.
2. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of
0.0538 inch (1.37 mm), a minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange, and in depth
indicated.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
a. Cold Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with
minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.
b. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep.
1) Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
c. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep members designed to
reduce sound transmission, and asymmetrical with single leg or hat shaped with
two legs.
d. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm)
4. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm)
5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to
reduce sound transmission. Asymmetrical or hat shaped, with face attached to single
flange by a slotted leg (web) or attached to two flanges by slotted or expanded metal legs.
6. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with
minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange, and in depth indicated.
a. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum
bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
b. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-
(1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter
wire.
7. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,
and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 3
2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Panel Size, General: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize
joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.
1. Type X: In thickness indicated and with long edges tapered.
C. Sag-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than
regular-type gypsum board, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick, and with long edges tapered. Apply on
ceiling surfaces.
D. Proprietary Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to produce
greater resistance to surface indentation and through-penetration than standard gypsum panels,
with core type and in thickness indicated, and with long edges tapered.
1. Available Products:
a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Abuse Wallboard.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Brand Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Panels.
E. Exterior Gypsum Panels for Ceilings and Soffits:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931/C 931M, with core type and in thickness
indicated and with manufacturer's standard edges.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with core type and in
thickness indicated.
a. Product: G-P Gypsum Corp; Dens-Glass Gold.
F. Tile Backing Panels:
1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M, with core type and in
thickness indicated.
2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with core type and
in thickness indicated.
a. Product: G-P Gypsum Corp.; Dens-Shield Tile Backer.
3. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9, in thickness indicated.
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. L-Bead:
4. U-Bead: .
5. Expansion (Control) Joint: where different substrates meet.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 4
B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet or rolled zinc.
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip
covering slot opening. [Use where indicated] <Insert requirements>.
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-
type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, flanges of trim
accessories, and fasteners, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound
D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable topping
compounds.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by manufacturer.
E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type,
sandable topping compounds.
2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by manufacturer.
3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 5
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining,
gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), recommended for sealing interior
concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
1. Available Products:
a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant.
b. Pecora Corp.; BA-98.
c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
D. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel
stud size.
E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
2.7 TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
B. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray
application.
1. Available Products:
a. G-P Gypsum Corp.; GyProc Vermiculite Ceiling Texture.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture
(Aggregated).
2. Texture: Light knock down
EXECUTION
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 6
2.8 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing
installation.
B. Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing:
1. Suspend ceiling hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects
within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension
system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
3. Attach hangers to structural members. Do not support ceilings from or attach hangers to
permanent metal forms, steel deck tabs, steel roof decks, ducts, pipes, or conduit.
4. Screw furring to wood framing.
5. Wire-tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for
assemblies indicated.
C. Partition and Soffit Framing:
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install isolation strip between
studs and wall.
2. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended
ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings.
Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating
partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
3. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's
applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at
jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs)
at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or
roof structure above.
4. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless
otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required
above door heads.
D. Z-Furring Members: Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members.
1. Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with 10-inch (250-mm) staples
fabricated from 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter, tie wire and inserted through slot in
web of member.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 7
E. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: Install to comply with requirements specified in Division 7
Section "Building Insulation."
2.9 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION
A. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
1. Space screws a maximum of 8 inches o.c. for vertical applications.
2. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c.
3. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of board.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
4. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
5. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill
screws.
6. Within Stairways install Abuse Resistant Wallbaord in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
7. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports
with screws.
8. Laminating to Substrate: Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written
recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive
has set.
B. Exterior Ceilings and Soffits: Apply exterior gypsum panels perpendicular to supports, with
end joints staggered and located over supports.
1. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
C. Tile Backing Panels:
1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where
panels abut other construction or penetrations.within bathrooms and laundry where tile is
not insatlled
2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where
panels abut other construction or penetrations.
3. Cementitious Backer Unit Application: ANSI A108.11. behind all locations tile is to be
installed
2.10 FINISHING
A. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to
framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 8
B. Finishing Gypsum Board Panels: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control
joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare
gypsum board surfaces for decoration.
1. Prefill open joints beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not
intended for tape.
3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written
instructions for use as exposed soffit board.
4. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to
ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:
1. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless
otherwise indicated .
2.11 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces
receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a
uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin
application or of application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture
finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite
these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and
overspray to prevent damage according to texture finish manufacturer's written
recommendations.
END OF SECTION 09260
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912 - 1
SECTION 09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of all exposed exterior and interior]
items and surfaces. This includes all exterior and interior walls that are removed by demolition
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of
coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5.
1. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
2. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C).
D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the
quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912 - 2
1. Quantity: 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).
2. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado).
3. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints).
4. Kelly-Moore Paint Co. (Kelly-Moore).
5. M. A. Bruder & Sons, Inc. (M. A. B. Paint).
6. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints).
7. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will
not be acceptable.
C. Chemical Components of Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions:
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L.
2. Non-Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
3. Anticorrosive Coatings: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
4. Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
5. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
6. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by
weight total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more
benzene rings).
7. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain acrolein; acrylonitrile;
antimony; benzene; butyl benzyl phthalate; cadmium; di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate; di-n-
butyl phthalate; di-n-octyl phthalate; 1,2-dichlorobenzene; diethyl phthalate; dimethyl
phthalate; ethylbenzene; formaldehyde; hexavalent chromium; isophorone; lead;
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912 - 3
mercury; methyl ethyl ketone; methyl isobutyl ketone; methylene chloride; naphthalene;
toluene (methylbenzene); 1,1,1-trichloroethane; or vinyl chloride.
D. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 PREPARATORY COATS
A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler of finish coat
manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on
substrate indicated.
B. Exterior Primer: Exterior alkyd or latex-based primer of finish coat manufacturer and
recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.
1. Ferrous-Metal and Aluminum Substrates: Rust-inhibitive metal primer.
2. Zinc-Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer.
3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate
indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.
C. Interior Primer: Interior latex-based or alkyd primer of finish coat manufacturer and
recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.
1. Ferrous-Metal Substrates: Quick drying, rust-inhibitive metal primer.
2. Zinc-Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer.
3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate
indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.
2.4 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint No. 171.
2. Coronado; 8-Line Supreme Acrylic Latex Flat.
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2200-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Flat Finish.
4. Kelly-Moore; 1205 Color Shield Exterior Flat Acrylic House Paint.
5. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kote Latex House Paint 409 Line.
6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-600 Series SpeedHide Exterior House Paint Flat Latex.
7. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Flat House & Trim Paint A6 Series.
B. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170.
2. Coronado; 12-Line Supreme Acrylic Semi-Gloss.
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2406-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Semi-
Gloss Finish.
4. Kelly-Moore; 1250 Acry-Lustre Exterior Semi-Gloss Acrylic Finish.
5. M. A. B. Paint; Sea Shore/Four Seasons Acrylic Latex Trim Enamel 024 Line.
6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi-Gloss Acrylic
Latex Paint.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912 - 4
7. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Gloss A8 Series.
8.
C. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28.
2. Coronado; 80 Line Rust Scat Acrylic Latex High Gloss Enamel.
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish.
4. Kelly-Moore; 5780 DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel.
5. M. A. B. Paint; Rust-O-Lastic Gloss Acrylic (DTM) Maintenance Finish 043 Line.
6. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-300 Series Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance
Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels.
7. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W100 Series.
2.5 INTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274.
2. Coronado; 30-Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Eggshell Enamel.
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1402-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Interior Wall & Trim
Enamel.
4. Kelly-Moore; 1610 Sat-N-Sheen Interior Latex Low Sheen Wall and Trim Finish.
5. Kelly-Moore; 1686 Dura-Poxy Eggshell Acrylic Enamel.
6. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kote Latex Satin Eggshell Enamel 405 Line.
7. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-400 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel.
8. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Egg-Shell Enamel B20W200 Series.
B. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276.
2. Coronado; 32-Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel.
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1406-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi-Gloss Interior Wall &
Trim Enamel.
4. Kelly-Moore; 1649 Acrylic-Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel.
5. Kelly-Moore; 1685 Dura-Poxy Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel.
6. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kote Latex Semi-Gloss 410 Line.
7. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex.
8.
Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31W200 Series.
C. Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel No. M28.
2. Coronado; 414 Line Super Kote 5000 Acrylic High Gloss Enamel.
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish.
4. Kelly-Moore; 1680 Dura-Poxy Gloss Acrylic Enamel.
5. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Architectural High Gloss Latex Enamel 022-127 Line.
6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-8534 SpeedHide Interior Latex 100 Percent Acrylic Gloss Enamels.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912 - 5
2.6 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES
A. Open-Grain Wood Filler:
1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Paste Wood Filler No. 238.
2. Coronado; none required.
3. ICI Dulux Paints; none required.
4. Kelly-Moore; none required.
5. M. A. B. Paint; Paste Wood Filler.
6. Pittsburgh Paints; none required.
7. Sherwin-Williams; Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler.
B. Interior Waterborne Clear Satin Varnish: Acrylic-based polyurethane.
1. Benjamin Moore; Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane No. 423, Satin.
2. Coronado; 70-10 Aqua-Plastic Urethane Clear Satin.
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1802-0000 WoodPride Interior Waterborne Aquacrylic Satin Varnish.
4. Kelly-Moore; 2097 Kel-Thane II Clear Acrylic Urethane--Satin.
5. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Water Based Satin Polyurethane 088-900s.
6. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-49 Rez Satin Acrylic Clear Polyurethane.
7. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Satin, A68 Series.
8. <Insert manufacturer's comparable clear satin varnish.>
C. Interior Waterborne Clear Gloss Varnish: Acrylic-based polyurethane.
1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Polyurethane Finishes High Gloss
No. 428.
2. Coronado; 70-10 Aqua-Plastic Urethane Clear Gloss.
3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1808-0000 WoodPride Interior Waterborne Aquacrylic Gloss Varnish.
4. Kelly-Moore; 2096 Kel-Thane II Clear Acrylic Urethane--Gloss.
5. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Water Based Gloss Polyurethane 088-899 Line.
6. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-45 Rez Full-Gloss Acrylic Clear Polyurethane.
7. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Gloss, A68 Series.
8. <Insert manufacturer's comparable clear gloss varnish.>
D. Paste Wax: As recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912 - 6
C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and
similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible
because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface
preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release
agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to
improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac
or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill
holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand
smooth when dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges,
ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters,
cases, and paneling.
c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet
wall construction occurs on back side.
e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated;
remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or
mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.
a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer Delete
subparagraph below if treatment is not required.
b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat
before priming.
c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-
brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with
same primer as the shop coat.
5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so
surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
E. Material Preparation:
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912 - 7
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
F. Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector
covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings
in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.
1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
3. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
G. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional
coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.
I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by manufacturer.
K. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
L. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete
coverage with pores filled.
M. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects
due to insufficient sealing.
N. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912 - 8
O. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even
luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange
peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
P. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no
evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface
imperfections.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from Project site.
B. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
3.3 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior [flat acrylic paint]
B. Concrete Unit Masonry:
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats] over a block filler.
a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint.
Mineral-Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels:
1. Factory Finish
C. Smooth Wood:
1. Acrylic Finish: [One finish coat] [Two finish coats] [<Insert number> finish coats] over
a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior [flat acrylic paint] [low-luster acrylic paint] [semigloss
acrylic enamel] [full-gloss acrylic enamel for concrete, masonry, and wood].
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912 - 9
D. Wood Trim:
1. Acrylic-Enamel Finish: [Two finish coats] over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic enamel
E. Plywood:
1. Acrylic Finish: [One finish coat] [Two finish coats] [<Insert number> finish coats] over
a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint.
F. Ferrous Metal:
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer (not required on shop-primed items).
b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals.
G. Zinc-Coated Metal:
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coatsover a galvanized metal primer.
a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals.
H. Aluminum:
1. Acrylic-Enamel Finish: [One finish coat] [Two finish coats] [<Insert number> finish
coats] over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under acrylic finishes.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior [semigloss acrylic enamel] [full-gloss acrylic enamel for
ferrous and other metals].
2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: [One finish coat] [Two finish coats] [<Insert number> finish
coats] over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under alkyd finishes.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss alkyd enamel.
3.4 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912 - 10
b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel
2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.
B. Concrete Unit Masonry:
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler.
a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
b. Finish Coats: Interior [flat acrylic paint] [low-luster acrylic enamel] [semigloss
acrylic enamel].
2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: [One finish coat] [Two finish coats] [<Insert number> finish
coats] over a filled surface.
a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
b. Finish Coat: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.
C. Gypsum Board:
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Use Semi Gloss on walls and ceilings in Appartus Bays
c. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel on other interior surfaces
2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Use Semi Gloss on walls and ceilings in Apparatus Bays
c. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel
D. Wood and Hardboard:
1. Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semigloss alkyd-enamel
finishes.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
E. Ferrous Metal:
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912 - 11
b. Finish Coats: Interior full gloss acrylic enamel].
2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss alkyd enamel for wood and metal surfaces].
F. Zinc-Coated Metal:
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior .
2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss alkyd enamel for wood and metal surfaces.
G. All-Service Jacket over Insulation:
1. Acrylic Finish: [Two] <Insert number> finish coats. Add fungicidal agent to render
fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coats: Interior flat latex-emulsion size.
3.5 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE
A. Stain-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of varnish over a sealer coat and interior wood stain.
B. Delete paste wood filler coat below for tight-grained wood such as birch or poplar. Retain filler
coat for oak and walnut and similar open-grain woods.
1. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler.
2. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain.
3. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer.
4. Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear gloss varnish.
C. Natural-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of varnish over a sealer coat
1. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler.
2.
Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer.
3. Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear gloss varnish.
END OF SECTION 09912
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS 09931 - 1
SECTION 09931 - EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of wood stains on exterior wood
siding and soffits.
B. Fiber Cement Siding is Factory Finished and is not applicable to this Section
C. Exterior Woood Trim is painted in accordance with Section 09912
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of stain indicated.
B. Samples: For each color and stain material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual
conditions, on representative Samples of actual substrates.
1. Stained Wood: Provide 8- by 24-inch Samples.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of
stain and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish
of approved sample Submittals.
1. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
2. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
B. Apply stains only when temperatures of surfaces to be stained and the surrounding air are
between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C) .
C. Do not apply stain in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; when
temperatures are less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS 09931 - 2
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra stain materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in
quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Quantity: 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products named in other
Part 2 articles.
B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Duckback Products, Chico
2.2 EXTERIOR WOOD STAIN MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one
another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Stain-Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality stain material of the various stain
types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated. Stain-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will
not be acceptable.
C. Colors: Superdeck 1901 (Cedar) Exterior Transparent Stain.
2.3 EXTERIOR WOOD STAIN PRODUCTS
A. Transparent Oil/Alkyd Stain: Superdeck 1901 (Cedar) Exterior Transparent Stain
B. Clear Wood Finish for Soffits:
1. Benjamin Moore: Moorwood Penetrating Clear Wood Finish & Preservative No. 088.
2. Coronado: 199-10 Exterior Clear Wood Finish.
3. Samuel Cabot: Clear Solutions 3000/9100 Series.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS 09931 - 3
PART 3 - <>EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application.
B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and
similar items already installed that are not to be stained. If removal is impractical or impossible
because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation
and staining.
1. After completing staining operations, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in
trades involved.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be stained according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. Allow unseasoned
or shiny new wood to weather three months before staining.
1. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty tinted to final color to eliminate rust
leach stains.
2. Mixing: Stir stain thoroughly before applying and frequently during application to
maintain color consistency. Maintain containers used in mixing and application in a
clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
D. Minimum Spreading Rate: Apply stain at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to ensure
proper penetration. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of stain
material being applied.
E. Siding: Apply stain evenly with brush, roller, or spray. Thoroughly stain edges and ends of
boards. Brush out excess stain that collects in butts of shingles or boards. Avoid staining in
direct sunlight. Apply stain to concealed surfaces before installing siding
F. Protect work of other trades, whether being stained or not, against damage from staining.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and restaining as approved by Architect.
G. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly stained finishes. After completing staining
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced stained
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
3.2 EXTERIOR WOOD STAIN SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Wood Siding: Provide the following on exterior wood siding, and soffits:
1. Transparent Oil/Alkyd Stain: One coat. For Siding
2. Clear Wood Finish: One coat For Soffit.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS 09931 - 4
END OF SECTION 09931
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 1
SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fixed and operable, extruded-aluminum and formed metal louvers
B. See Division 15 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads
and wind loads based on a uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1436 Pa), acting inward or
outward, without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused
by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from a
temperature change (range) of 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces, by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
connections, and other detrimental effects.
C. Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, and Wind-Driven Rain Ratings: As demonstrated by
testing manufacturer's stock units according to AMCA 500-L.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal,
include printed catalog pages showing AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
1. Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
C. Samples: For each type of finish.
D. Product test reports.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Louvers:
a. Airline Products Co.
b. Airolite Company (The).
c. American Warming and Ventilating, Inc.
d. Arrow United Industries.
e. Carnes Company, Inc.
f. Cesco Products.
g. Construction Specialties, Inc.
h. Dowco Products Group; Safe-Air of Illinois, Inc.
i. Greenheck.
j. Industrial Louvers, Inc.
k. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
l. Metal Form Manufacturing Company, Inc.
m. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
n. Nystrom Building Products.
o. Reliable Products; Hart & Cooley, Inc.
p. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC.
q. Vent Products Company, Inc.
B. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each louver is based on the product named. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of
the other manufacturers specified.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) zinc coating, mill phosphatized.
C. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Fabricate frames to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and
installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
B. Join frame members to each other and to louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 3
2.4 FIXED, AND OPERABLE EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A. Horizontal or Vertical Storm-Resistant Louver <
1. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) for blades and
0.080 inch (2.0 mm) for frames.
2. Performance Requirements:
a. Free Area: Not less than as indicated on the drawings
b. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg (25-Pa) static pressure drop at 700-
fpm (3.6-m/s) free-area velocity.
c. Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 99 percent effectiveness when
subjected to a rain fall rate of 3 inches (75 mm) per hour and a wind speed of of
50 mph (22.4 m/s)at a core area intake velocity of 400 fpm (2.0 m/s)
B. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver :
1. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) for blades and
0.080 inch (2.0 mm) for frames.
2. Performance Requirements:
a. Free Area: Not less than indicated on drawings
b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 1000 fpm (5.1 m/s).
c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg (25-Pa) static pressure drop at 800-
fpm (4.1-m/s) free-area velocity.
3. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2.5 FIXED, AND OPERABLE FORMED-METAL LOUVERS
A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver :
1. Frame and Blade Material and Nominal Thickness: Galvanized steel sheet, not less than
0.052 inch (1.3 mm) for frames and 0.052 inch (1.3 mm) for blades.
2. Performance Requirements:
a. Free Area: Not less than indicated on drawings
b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 950 fpm (4.8 m/s)
c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg (25-Pa) static pressure drop at 800-
fpm (4.1-m/s) free-area velocity.
2.6 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide screen at interior face of each exterior louver.
B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens
are attached.
C. Louver Screening:
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 4
1. Bird Screening: Stainless steel, 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) square mesh, 0.047-inch (1.19-
mm) wire.
2. .
2.7 FINISHES
A. Aluminum, Anodic Finish: Class I, color anodic coating complying with AAMA 611.
1. Color: Dark bronze.
B. Galvanized Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and other contaminants.
Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to
ASTM A 780. Apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.
C. Galvanized Steel, Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after
installation is indicated, apply an air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where
required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot
be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or
provide new units.
E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying
a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry,
or dissimilar metals.
END OF SECTION 10200
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 1
SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Portable fire extinguishers.
2. Fire-protection cabinets.
3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
4. Owner-Furnished Material: Fire extinguishers.
B. See Division 9 painting Sections for field painting fire-protection cabinets.
C. See Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for hose systems, racks, and valves.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, panel style,
and details of installation.
3. Show location of knockouts for hose valves.
B. Samples: For each exposed cabinet finish.
C. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of [fire
extinguishers] [fire hoses, hose valves, and hose racks] indicated are accommodated.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 2
B. Apply [decals] [vinyl lettering] on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is
complete.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: [Six] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each product is based on the product named.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a
comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type
of use and finish indicated, and as follows:
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Copper-Alloy Brass Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C26000 (cartridge brass,
70 percent copper).
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 3
E. Copper-Alloy Bronze Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal,
60 percent copper).
F. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, [3] [6] mm thick.
G. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick,
Class [1 (clear)] [2 (tinted, heat absorbing, and light reducing), bronze tint].
H. Break Glass: Clear float glass, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick, single
strength.
I. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm
thick.
J. Wire Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1, Form 1, Quality q8, Mesh m1 (diamond), 6 mm
thick.
K. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, 3 mm thick, double strength.
L. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), [1.5] [3] [6] mm
thick, with Finish [1 (smooth or polished)] [2 (patterned, textured)].
M. Acrylic Bubble: One piece.
2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. [Available ]Manufacturers:
1. Amerex Corporation.
2. Ansul Incorporated.
3. Badger Fire Protection.
4. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
5. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
6. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation.
7. JL Industries, Inc.
8. Kidde Fyrnetics.
9. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
10. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico.
11. Moon American.
12. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
13. Watrous; Div. of American Specialties, Inc.
14. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each [fire-protection
cabinet] [mounting bracket] [fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket] indicated.
1. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B [and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections,
maintenance, and recharging].
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 4
C. Stored-Pressure Water Type <Insert drawing designation>: UL-rated 2-A, 2.5-gal. (9.5-L)
nominal capacity, with water in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage.
D. Stored-Pressure Antifreeze Type <Insert drawing designation>: UL-rated 2-A, 2.5-gal. (9.5-
L) nominal capacity, with water and approved antifreeze solution mixed for temperatures as low
as minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C) in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage.
E. Stored-Pressure Water-Mist Type <Insert drawing designation>: UL-rated 2-A:C, 2.5-gal.
(9.5-L) nominal capacity, with water in enameled-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage.
F. Wet-Chemical Type <Insert drawing designation>: UL-rated 2-A:1-B:C:K, [1.6-gal. (6-L)]
[2.5-gal. (9.5-L)] nominal capacity, with [potassium acetate] [potassium citrate] [potassium
carbonate]-based chemical in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage.
G. Regular Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container <Insert drawing designation>: UL-rated [2-
B:C, 1-lb (0.4-kg)] [10-B:C, 2.5-lb (1.1-kg)] [10-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg)] [40-B:C, 5.5-lb (2.5-kg)]
[40-B:C, 6-lb (2.7-kg)] [60-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg)] [120-B:C, 20-lb (9.1-kg)] nominal capacity,
with sodium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.
H. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container <Insert drawing designation>: UL-rated
[1-A:10-B:C, 2.5-lb (1.1-kg)] [2-A:10-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg)] [3-A:40-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg)] [3-
A:40-B:C, 6-lb (2.7-kg)] [4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg)] [20-A:120-B:C, 20-lb (9.1-kg)]
nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel
container.
I. Purple-K Dry-Chemical Type in Aluminum Container <Insert drawing designation>: UL-
rated [10-B:C, 2.5-lb (1.1-kg)] [30-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg)] [120-B:C, 20-lb (9.1-kg)] nominal
capacity, with potassium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in enameled-aluminum container.
J. Carbon Dioxide Type <Insert drawing designation>: UL-rated [5-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg)] [10-
B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg)] [10-B:C, 15-lb (6.8-kg)] [10-B:C, 20-lb (9.1-kg)]nominal capacity, with
carbon dioxide in [manufacturer's standard enameled-metal] [enameled-steel] [enameled-
aluminum] container.
K. Dry-Powder Type <Insert drawing designation>: [FMG-approved, ]UL-rated Class D, 30-lb
(13.6-kg) nominal capacity, with [sodium chloride] [copper]-based powder in enameled-steel
container; with pressure-indicating gage.
L. Halon Type <Insert drawing designation>: UL-rated [5-B:C, 2.5-lb (1.1-kg)] [10-B:C, 5-lb
(2.3-kg)] nominal capacity, in enameled-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage.
M. Clean-Agent Type in Aluminum Container <Insert drawing designation>: UL-rated [1-B:C,
1.4-lb (0.6-kg)] [2-B:C, 2.5-lb (1.1-kg)] [5-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg)] nominal capacity, with HCFC
blend B agent and inert material in enameled-aluminum container; with pressure-indicating
gage.
N. Clean-Agent Type in Steel Container <Insert drawing designation>: UL-rated [5-B:C, 4.75-
lb (2.2-kg)] [1-A:10-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg)] [2-A:10-B:C, 14-lb (6.4-kg)] nominal capacity, with
HFC blend agent and inert material in enameled-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 5
2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET <Insert drawing designation>
A. Basis-of-Design Product: <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a
comparable product by one of the following:
B. [Available ]Manufacturers:
1. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
2. General Accessory Mfg. Co.
3. JL Industries, Inc.
4. Kidde Fyrnetics.
5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
6. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico.
7. Moon American.
8. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
9. Watrous; Div. of American Specialties, Inc.
10. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire [extinguisher] [extinguisher and hose valve] [hose, rack,
valve, and extinguisher] [hose, rack, and valve] [hose valve].
D. Cabinet Construction: [Nonrated] [1-hour fire rated] [2-hour fire rated].
E. Cabinet Material[ and Shelf]: [Enameled-steel] [Aluminum] [Stainless-steel] sheet.
F. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim
indicated.
1. Trimless with Plaster Stop: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with exterior
finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim attached to cabinet.
Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached to box to act as plaster stop.
2. Trimless with Hidden Flange: Flange of same metal and finish as box overlaps
surrounding wall finish and is concealed from view by an overlapping door.
3. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend)
of 1/4 to 5/16 inch (6 to 8 mm).
G. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of
trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch (32- to 38-mm) backbend depth.
2. Rolled-Edge Trim: [2-1/2-inch (64-mm)] [4-inch (102-mm)] [4-1/2-inch (114-mm)]
<Insert dimension> backbend depth.
H. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall; with no
trim.
I. Cabinet Trim Material: [Steel sheet] [Aluminum sheet] [Extruded-aluminum shapes]
[Stainless-steel sheet] [Copper-alloy brass sheet] [Copper-alloy bronze sheet] [Same
material and finish as door].
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 6
J. Door Material: [Steel sheet] [Aluminum sheet] [Extruded-aluminum shapes] [Stainless-
steel sheet] [Copper-alloy brass sheet] [Copper-alloy bronze sheet].
K. Door Style: [Fully glazed, frameless, backless, acrylic panel] [Fully glazed panel with
frame] [Full bubble, frameless] [Full bubble with frame] [Full bubble with frameless,
rotating turntable] [Horizontal duo panel with frame] [Vertical duo panel with frame]
[Center glass panel with frame] [Solid opaque panel with frame] [Flush opaque panel,
frameless, with no exposed hinges].
L. Door Glazing: [Clear float glass] [Tempered float glass (clear)] [Tempered float glass
(bronze tint)] [Break glass] [Tempered break glass] [Wire glass] [Mirror glass] [Acrylic
sheet] [Break acrylic bubble] [Molded acrylic bubble].
1. Acrylic Sheet Color: [Clear] [Bronze] transparent acrylic sheet.
2. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet painted [white] [red] [black] on
unexposed side.
3. Acrylic Bubble Color: [Clear] [Bronze] [Red], transparent.
M. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1. Provide [projecting lever handle with cam-action latch] [projecting door pull and
friction latch] [recessed door pull and friction latch] [manufacturer's standard].
2. Provide [continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim,] [concealed hinge]
[pivot hinge] [manufacturer's standard hinge] permitting door to open 180 degrees.
N. Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to
fire-protection cabinet, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
2. Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and
mounting clip, secured to cabinet.
3. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed
into face.
4. Door Lock: [Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling
sharply on door handle] [Cylinder lock, keyed alike to other cabinets].
5. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "[FIRE
EXTINGUISHER] <Insert identification>."
1) Location: Applied to [cabinet door] [cabinet glazing] [location indicated
on Drawings].
2) Application Process: [Silk-screened] [Engraved] [Etched] [Decals]
[Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters].
3) Lettering Color: [Red] [Black] [White].
4) Orientation: [Vertical] [Horizontal] [As indicated on Drawings].
6. Alarm: Manufacturer's standard alarm that actuates when fire-protection cabinet door is
opened and that is powered by [batteries] [low voltage, complete with transformer].
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 7
O. Finishes:
1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:
a. Exterior of cabinet [door] [trim] [, door, and trim], except for those surfaces
indicated to receive another finish.
b. Interior of cabinet[ and door].
2. Aluminum: [Class I, clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611] [Class I, color
anodic coating complying with AAMA 611] [Baked enamel].
a. Color and Texture: [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black]
[Gold] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range].
3. Steel: [Factory primed with manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free,
universal primer, for field painting] [Baked enamel, with minimum dry film
thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm)].
a. Color and Texture: [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range].
4. Stainless Steel: [Bright, cold-rolled, unpolished, No. 2B] [Bright, directional polish,
No. 4] [Satin, directional polish, No. 6] [Satin, reflective, directional polish, No. 7]
[Mirrorlike reflective, nondirectional polish, No. 8].
5. Copper Alloy, Brass: [Buffed] [Hand rubbed] [Hand rubbed, lacquered] [Medium
satin] [Fine matte] [Statuary conversion] [Patina conversion].
6. Copper Alloy, Bronze: [Buffed] [Hand rubbed] [Hand rubbed, lacquered] [Medium
satin] [Fine matte] [Statuary conversion] [Patina conversion].
2.5 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. [Available ]Manufacturers:
1. Amerex Corporation.
2. Ansul Incorporated.
3. Badger Fire Protection.
4. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
5. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
6. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation.
7. JL Industries, Inc.
8. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
9. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
10. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
B. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard[ galvanized] steel, designed to secure fire
extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
1. Color: [Red] [Black].
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 8
C. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in
red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a. Orientation: [Vertical] [Horizontal].
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door,
and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind
smooth.
1. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm-)
thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick, fire-barrier
material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated
and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum
1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose [valves] [racks] and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping
connections before cabinet installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where [recessed]
[semirecessed] [recessed and semirecessed] cabinets will be installed.
C. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged,
defective, or undercharged units.
D. Prepare recesses for [recessed] [semirecessed] [recessed and semirecessed] fire-protection
cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
E. Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
FIRE STATION #2 RENOVATION 16 JULY 2012
VAIL, CO
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 9
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is
not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets.
2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.
3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.
G. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
H. Identification: Apply [decals] [vinyl lettering] at locations indicated.
I. Fire-Rated [Hose and Valve] [Hose-Valve] Cabinets: Install cabinet with not more than 1/16-
inch (1.6-mm) tolerance between pipe OD and knockout OD. Center pipe within knockout.
1. Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
J. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly.
K. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair.
END OF SECTION 10520